Vernon City Council
March 1, 2022

1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.

2. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and non-fabricated iron and steel products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch thick and heavier.

C. Prime Painted Finish: Apply shop primer to all surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finish. Do not paint contact surfaces, which are to be welded, high strength bolted and riveted.

1. Preparation for Shop Priming: Clean ferrous metal of scale, rust, oil, moisture, and dirt before applying paint. Comply with SSPC Articles SP-1, “Solvent Cleaning”, and SP-3 “Power Tool Cleaning” or SP7, “Brush-Off Blast Cleaning”.

D. Stainless Steel Finish: Bright, Directional Polish: No. 4 finish

1. Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish.

2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.

3. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 05500-10

2.21 Floor Drains
A. General: Unless noted otherwise, all floor drains shall consist of an 8-inch coated cast iron floor drain with a P-Trap and outlet drain size per plan.

B. Manufacturers: Zurn Z415B or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examination: Examine surfaces and spaces to receive metal work. Inspect for proper size, structural soundness, and location. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

B. Coordination: Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery and installation of such items.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Embedded Items: Set sleeves and other metal fabrications embedded in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations; protect sleeves from water and concrete entry.

B. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required.

C. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, shimming, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. Use metal, same as item being installed, for shimming; for exposed work, fill shim space uniformly with nonshrink nonmetallic grout.

1. Provide temporary bracing and support for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry and similar construction.

2. Fit exposed connections accurately to form hairline joints. Weld connections, which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of installation conditions or shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of units, which have been hot-dip galvanized, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.

D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.

Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 05500-11

3.3 SETTING LOOSE PLATES
A. Preparing Surfaces: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.

B. Positioning: Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut-off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout.

C. Grouting: Pack non-shrink nonmetallic grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Anchor supports securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF BOLLARDS
A. Bollards: Fill bollards fully with concrete having a 28-day minimum compressive strength of 3,000psi. Finish top of concrete smooth and uniform, crowned to shed water.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF RAILINGS
A. General: Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated, or if not indicated, as required by design loadings.

1. Set posts plumb in each direction within 1/8" in 3 feet.

2. Align rails level (or properly sloped) within 1/4" in 12 feet.

3. Do not cut, weld or abrade surfaces that have been finished after fabrication and are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting and fitting.

B. Anchoring Rail Ends:

1. Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored into wall construction with lead expansion shields and bolts.

2. Anchor rail ends to steel with steel oval or round flanges welded to rail ends and bolted to structural steel members, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Wall-Mounted Handrails: Secure wall handrails with brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with not less than 1-1/2 inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated, or if not indicated, at spacing required to support design loads. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as follows:

1. Use type of bracket with pre-drilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.

2. For concrete and solid masonry, use drilled-in expansion shield and concealed hanger bolt.

3. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts having square heads.

4. For wood stud partitions, use lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installations for accurate location of backing members.

5. For steel framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed anchors using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads.

Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 05500-12 D. Railing Connections:

1. Non-welded Connections: Use mechanical joints for connecting components. Locate exposed fasteners in least conspicuous locations. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws with plastic filler cement, colored to match finish of rails.

2. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for connecting components. Cope or butt components to provide full contact, or use fittings designed for this purpose.

3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanizing Repair: All repairs to damaged galvanized coatings, including but not limited to damage due to welding, shall be performed with zinc-based solder (stick galvanizing) in accordance with ASTM A780. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply zinc-based solder to comply with ASTM A 780.

1. Only where specifically approved by the Professional of Record, high zinc dust content paint with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with ASTM A 780 may be used.

C. Completion: Completed metal work shall be securely anchored, free from rattles and excessive vibration during use. Items shall be plumb, level, straight and properly aligned. Exposed grouting shall be neat, uniform, and without holes and gaps.

1. Joints shall be snug fitting and uniform; exposed welds shall be ground smooth and touched-up, and free of crevices, spatter and flux. Bolts, screws, nuts and other threaded fasteners shall occur only where permitted, and shall be drawn up tightly but not over-tightened; exposed heads and nuts shall be undamaged.

2. Remove, adjust and reinstall, or remove and replace, items, which are not in compliance due to improper installation and materials, and items, which are defective or damaged.

3. Clean finished surfaces, which are soiled and marked by metal work installation. Remove and replace other materials, which cannot be cleaned and those damaged by metal work installation. -END OF SECTION-
Misc. Metals, Fasteners and Special Finishes
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 05501-1 SECTION 05501

MISCELLANEOUS METALS, FASTENERS AND SPECIAL FINISHES
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide all labor, materials, bolts, fasteners, equipment and service necessary for fabrication and erection of structural steel and aluminum and for fabrication and installation of miscellaneous non-ferrous metals in accordance with the Contract Documents and not specifically included under other Sections of these Specifications.

1. Erection

2. Shop and Erection Drawings

3. Shop Painting

4. Galvanizing

5. Aluminum Work Protection

6. Cleaning Aluminum Work

7. Miscellaneous Items

8. Loose Lintels

9. Sleeves and Inserts

10. Aluminum Pipe Railing

11. Plate Covers and Frames

12. Guard Chains

13. Lifting Hooks

14. Sand Trap Grating and Frame

15. Cast Iron Wheel Guard

16. Cast Aluminum Nosings

17. Floor Hatches and Frames

18. Access Doors
B. Related Sections:

1. Section 04200 – Reinforced Concrete Block Masonry

2. Section 05530 – Aluminum Grating

1.2 REFERENCES
A. All work under this Section shall be governed by:

1. Specifications for the design, fabrication and erection of structural steel for buildings – American Institute of Steel Construction, current edition.

2. Aluminum Construction Manual, Section 1, Specifications for Aluminum Structures – The Aluminum Association.

3. All welding shall conform to the latest code of the American Welding Society.

4. ASTM A 276
Misc. Metals, Fasteners and Special Finishes
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 05501-2

5. ASTM A 325

6. ASTM F 593, 294

7. Federal Specification FF-S-325

8. ASTM A 48

9. Federal Specification TT-V-51F

10. ANSI B94.12

11. ASTM A 12, A 153, A 384, A 593 and A 780

12. SSPC SP-1, SP-2, SP3, SP-7

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

B. As required by the Specifications, submit for review completely detailed and certified shop and erection drawings of the miscellaneous metal work. All Coatings or other protection against corrosion to be applied at the shop or in the field shall be indicated on these drawings. The shop drawings for aluminum work shall show the alloys and tempers to be used, and the finish, if any to be applied.

C. Shop drawings, giving complete information necessary for fabrication, layout and installation of metal work shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review prior to fabrication.

D. Preparation of shop drawings for fabricated metal items shall be coordinated with the manufacturers, of various equipment in order to comply with details, locations, openings and arrangements required by the manufacturers, of various equipment in order to comply with details, locations, openings and arrangements, required by the manufacturers.

E. Field measurements shall be made to verify all dimensions in the field, which may affect installation of work before shop drawings are made and/or fabrication is performed.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The design, detail and workmanship of steel plates and structural steel shall conform to the AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.

B. Where welding is permitted or required, it shall conform to the current requirements of the American Welding Society for the type of work in question.

C. Aluminum work shall be fabricated in a shop where the quality of work is in accordance with the highest standards for work of this type. All work shall be executed by mechanics skilled in the fabrication of aluminum, and shall be true to detail with sharp, clean profiles, fitted with proper joints and intersections and with finishes as specified.

D. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Shearing and punching shall leave clean true lines and surfaces.

1.5 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DIMENSIONS
A. The general design and dimensions of the miscellaneous metal work are indicated on the Drawings, correctness of the details and dimensions of the finished articles is required. Verification of conditions at the job before fabrication and coordination of the work with that of all other trades to prevent interference.

Misc. Metals, Fasteners and Special Finishes
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 05501-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel plated and structural steel shapes shall conform to ASTM Standard Specification for Structural Steel, Designation A36.

B. Sheet steel shall be cold rolled or hot rolled carbon sheet steel conforming to ASTM Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality, Designation A36 or AST ASTM Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 maximum, percent), Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality, Designation A569, as appropriate.

C. Steel pipe shall conform to ASTM Standard Specifications for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless, Designation A53.

D. Stainless steel shall be Type 304 unless otherwise indicated or specified.

E. Aluminum work shall be fabricated of plates, rolled or extruded shapes, sheets or casting conforming (unless otherwise permitted or indicated) to the following alloy and temper designations of the Aluminum Association:

1. Structural rolled or extruded shapes 6061-T6.

2. Extruded shapes 6063-T5.

3. Plates 6061-T6.

4. Gratings (bearing bars) 6061-T6 (crimp bars) 6063-T6.

5. Castings 214.

6. Sheets 3003-F.

7. Bolts and nuts 2024-T4.

8. Pipe Railing 6063-T6.

2.2 STEEL
A. Structural steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A-36. Structural tubing, where used, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A-500, Grade B, and the ends of the tubing shall be properly sealed to protect the internal surfaces. Steel anchor bolts shall be ASTM A-36 hot rolled threaded rod or bar stock, except where stainless steel is indicated on the Drawings.

B. Structural steel members as required shall conform to ASTM Standard shapes.

C. Base and bearing plates shall be provided where necessary to provide maximum bearing value of not more than 200psi on solid concrete masonry units not more than 750psi on concrete and shall be grouted in place.

D. Steel lintels shall be provided for all square head openings in masonry where shown and where other lintels are not indicated on the Drawings. Lengths of bearing at each end of lintels shall be not less than 1 inch per foot of span, but in no case less than 8 inches shall be increased or the lintels shall be fitted with bearing plates as required to provide unit pressures in pounds per square inch of not more than 200 on solid concrete masonry units and 625 on concrete. All new steel lintels shall be shop primed and ready to receive coatings as specified under Section 09900 Painting. Finish coats are specified in Division 09 – Finishes.

2.3 SHOP PAINTING
A. Painting of miscellaneous ferrous metal work is specified under Division 9.

Misc. Metals, Fasteners and Special Finishes
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 05501-4

2.4 GALVANIZING
A. Items of miscellaneous iron work and steel work indicated on the Drawings or specified to be galvanized shall be zinc coated by the hot dip process in conformity with ASTM Standard Specification for Zinc (hot galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip, Designation A123-78; or ASTM Standard Specifications for Zinc Coating (hot-dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware, Designation A153-78, as appropriate. Galvanizing is specified under Article 3.04, "Hot-Dip Galvanizing."

2.5 ALUMINUM
A. All structural and miscellaneous aluminum shall be Alloy 6061 (Alloy 6063 for extrusions), Temper T6, unless otherwise noted, indicated or accepted by the CITY. Where welding is necessary in fabrication, is shall be done in conformance with Section 7 "Welded Construction" of Specification for Aluminum Structures, referenced hereinbefore.

2.6 ALUMINUM WORK PROTECTION
A. Aluminum surfaces which after erection would otherwise be in contact with concrete or brick masonry or with mortar, shall be protected from contact therewith by a coat of bitumastic super service black manufacturer by the Koppers Company, Inc. Pittsburgh, PA; Tarmastic 100 manufactured by Porter Coating Division, Porter Paint Company, North Kansas City, MO; or an acceptable equivalent product. Areas where the paint has been damaged by abrasion or other cause shall be cleaned and repainted as directed so that the aluminum will have a complete protective paint film when brought into contact with the material against which it is being protected. Before application of coating, the surface shall be cleaned of all dirt, heavy deposits of grease or oil and other foreign substances and shall be immersed in or swabbed with an acceptable solvent. Next the surfaces shall be rinsed with clear water and thoroughly dried.

B. Attention of the Specifications in regard to protection against electrolysis where aluminum is to be used in conjunction with dissimilar metals is required.

C. Where a shop coating of methacrylate lacquer has been specified on aluminum work to protect the surface from stain, the protective coating of lacquer worn off during handling or erection shall be replaced in the field by a new coating of lacquer of the same type.

D. During construction, care shall be taken to prevent damage to the aluminum work from splashing or the accumulation of paint, concrete, mortar, or other similar materials.

2.7 STAINLESS STEEL
A. Stainless steel shapes shall be ANSI Type 304 or 316 in accordance with ASTM A-276. Miscellaneous bar stock products such as pipe straps shall be 300 Series stainless steel. Anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be ANSI Series 300 stainless steel.

2.8 FASTENERS
A. Bolts, Nuts and Washers:

1. Structural bolts shall be ANSI Type 300 Series stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F-593, with ASTM F-594 nuts. All bolts shall have hexagonal heads.

2. Anchors and bolts including nuts and washers shall be provided where necessary for securing the work in place. Sizes, types and spacings of anchors and bolts not indicated or specified otherwise shall be as necessary for their purposes. Anchor bolts and anchors for the erection of structural steel shall be stainless steel Type 316. Anchored bolts, nuts, and washers for all other uses including, but not limited to, underwater use and for the installation of equipment, piping, pumps and motors shall be stainless steel Type 316.

Misc. Metals, Fasteners and Special Finishes
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 05501-5 B. Expansion Anchors (In Concrete):

1. Expansion anchors shall be of three (3) types:
a. Stainless steel wedge type.
b. Self-drilling plated type with stainless steel bolt and stainless steel washer. c. Type of expansion anchor desired shall be noted on Drawings.

2. Stainless steel wedge type anchors shall be ITW Ramset/Red Head or ENGINEER approved equal of Type 316 stainless steel. Anchors shall meet or exceed latest Government GSA Federal Specifications FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4, Class 1. Anchor shall be used with 300 series stainless steel bolt and washer.

3. Self-drilling plated anchors shall be ITW Ramset/Red Head of ENGINEER approved equal. Anchors shall meet or exceed latest Government GSA Federal Specification FF-S-325, Group III, Type 1. Selfdrilling anchors shall be electro-deposited zinc plated and chromate dipped, to meet or exceed the requirements of the latest Federal Specification QQ-Z-325, Type II, Class 3. Cutting teeth shall have minimum hardness of 82 Rockwell A scale.

4. Steel expansion anchors shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

5. Self-drilling expansion anchors shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

To insure full development strength, all self-drilling expansion anchors shall be expanded over the plug in the final set, by using a bolt screwed into the female threads and impacted by hand with a suitable hammer. The final set shall not be accomplished by using the drilling tool.

6. After installation, pull-out tests by the anchor manufacturer's representative may be requested by the Engineer. If so, the Engineer will specify the number and location of the tests.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
A. Items of miscellaneous metal work not particularly specified hereinafter shall be of the shape, size, materials and details indicated on the Drawings or suitable for the purpose intended.

2.10 LOOSE LINTELS
A. Furnish all loose lintels as indicated on the Drawings or required by the Work. The loose lintels shall be fabricated from structural steel shapes and plates. All loose lintels shall be shop primed and ready to receive coatings as specified under Section 09900 - Painting.

2.11 SLEEVES AND INSERTS
A. Attention is directed to the requirements of the Specifications regarding sleeves and inserts.

2.12 ALUMINUM PIPE RAILING
A. The aluminum pipe railing shall be the product of company normally engaged in the manufacture of pipe railing. Railing shall be shop assembled in lengths not to exceed 24-feet for field erection.

B. Handrails and stair rails shall be designed to withstand a 200 pound concentrated load applied in any direction at any point on the top rail. Handrails and stair rails shall also be designed to withstand a load of 50 pounds per foot applied horizontally to the top rail. The 200 pound load will not be applied simultaneously with the 50 pounds per foot load. In addition, the handrails shall be designed to withstand a load of 100 pounds per foot horizontal load. The 100 pounds per foot vertical load does not apply to stair rails.

C. The manufacturer shall submit calculations to the Engineer for approval. Testing of base castings or base extrusions by an independent lab or manufacturer’s lab (if manufacturer’s lab meets the requirements of the Aluminum Association) will be an acceptable substitute for calculations. Calculations will be required for approval of all other design aspects.

Misc. Metals, Fasteners and Special Finishes
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 05501-6 D. Post spacing shall be a maximum of 6-feet 0 inches. Posts and railings shall be a minimum of 1½ inches Schedule 40 aluminum pipe alloy 6063-T6, ASTM B 429 or ASTM B 221. The handrail manufacturer shall show that their posts are of adequate strength, the manufacturer may reduce the post spacing or add reinforcing dowels or may do both in order to meeting loading requirements.

E. The handrail shall be made of pipes joined together with component fittings. Samples of all components, bases, toe plate and pipe must be submitted for approval. Components that are glued at the joints will not be acceptable. Handrail and components shall be Kee Clamp, Inc., Golden Railings or approval equal.

F. Posts shall not interrupt the continuation of the top rail at any point along the railing, including corners and end terminators.

G. The midrail at a corner return shall be able to withstand a 200 pound load without loosening.

H. Expansion bolts shall be spaced 10 diameters apart and 5-diameter edge distance for not reduction in pullout strength. A safety factor of four shall be used on expansion bolt pullout values published by the manufacturer.

I. Toe plate shall conform to OSHA Standards. Toe plate shall be a minimum of 4 inches high and shall be an extrusion that attaches to the posts with clamps, which allow for expansions and contraction between posts.

Toe plates shall be set ¼-inch above the walking surface. Toe plates shall be provided on handrails as required by OSHA and/or as shown on Drawings. Toe plates shall be shipped loose in stock lengths with premanufactured corners for field installation.

J. Openings in the railing shall be guarded by a self-closing gate. Safety chains shall not be used unless specifically shown on the Drawings.

K. Finish shall be Aluminum Association M10-C22-A41 (215-R1). The pipe shall be plastic wrapped. The plastic wrap is to be removed after erection.

L. Aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete, grout or dissimilar metals will be protected with a coat of bituminous paint, mylar isolators or other approved material.

2.13 PLATE COVERS AND FRAMES
A. The plate covers and frames shall be the sizes indicated on the Drawings. The frames shall be aluminum angles of the sizes indicated with welded strap anchors for securing the frames in the concrete. The frames shall have mitered corners with welded joints ground smooth where exposed.

B. The covers shall be ¼-inch thick aluminum tread plate having an acceptable nonskid surface and reinforced with aluminum bars welded to the underside of the cover in accordance with the details. Plate covers shall be capable of supporting a uniform superimposed load of 100 psf for the span with a deflection of less than ¼-inch based on allowable fiber stress of 16,000 psi. The covers shall be made to fit neatly and accurately in the frames.

C. Hinged covers shall be furnished with heavy-duty stainless steel, plain bearing hinges with stainless steel pins.

The hinges shall be fastened to the covers and frames with stainless steel machine screws. The hinged covers shall be provided with flush lift handles fabricated from ½-inch diameter aluminum rod, alloy 6061-T6511.

D. A single leaf of hinged plate covers shall be no greater than 3 -feet x 5-feet in size.

E. Removable plate covers shall have 1-inch diameters finger holes to facilitate removal. All edges of holes cut in the plate covers shall be ground smooth.

F. Removable plate covers shall be no greater than 14 square feet in size with the longer dimension no greater than 7-feet.

Misc. Metals, Fasteners and Special Finishes
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 05501-7 G. Gasket plate covers shall have continuous compressible neoprene seals between the cover and the frame at the perimeter. The covers shall be secured to the frames with countersunk, flathead, stainless steel machine screws spaced approximately 6 inches on centers.

2.14 GUARD CHAINS
A. Removable guard chains at openings in aluminum pipe railings shall be fabricated from wrought, non-welded aluminum chain having 12 links per foot. The chains shall be secured to aluminum eyes bolted or welded to pipe stanchion at on end of the opening. The free ends of the chains shall be provided with hooks formed from ¼-inch diameter solid aluminum rod for attaching to similar eyes in the pipe stanchion at the opposite end of the opening.

2.15 CAST IRON WHEEL GUARDS
A. Wheel guards where indicated on the Drawings shall be cast iron guards of the sizes and types indicated on the Drawings as herein specified and shall be manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company, Neenah, WI; Flockhart Foundry Company, Neward, NJ; McKinley Iron Work, Fort Worth, TX or ENGINEER approved equal. Wheel guards shall be given one shop coat of rust inhibitive paint before shipment.

B. Wheel guards shall be heavy-duty concrete fill type, cast iron wheel guards, No., R-4983-C manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company Type 706A manufactured by Flockhart Foundry Company or ENGINEER approved equal. The guards shall be set 2 inches into the pavement and shall be bolted to the masonry walls. The guards shall be filled with Class A concrete and the tope of the fill sloped at a 15 degree angle from the building.

2.16 CAST ALUMINUM NOSINGS
A. The cast aluminum nosing shall be abrasive cast aluminum nosing securely fastened with stainless steel, flat head bolts and wing anchors set into the fresh concrete. The nosings shall be the products of Wooster Products, Inc., Wooster, OH; American Abrasive Metals Company, Irvington, NJ; Andco Building Specialties or ENGINEER approved equal.

2.17 FLOOR HATCHES AND FRAMES
A. The floor hatches and frames shall be flush floor hatches provided by manufacturer as shown in the Drawings or ENGINEER approved equal. Where noted, the hatches shall be H-20 rated. The hatches shall be double or single leaf type and of the sizes indicated on the Drawings. The hatches shall be factory assembled and shipped complete with frame for installation on the job. The hatches shall be furnished with hinges, hold open safety lock bars, and flush lift handles. Gutter type hatches shall have a 1½-inch drainage coupling located in on corner of the channel frame.

B. The floor hatches and frames shall be fabricated from aluminum with ¼-inch extruded aluminum frames and 1/40 inch diamond checkered aluminum plate covers. The covers shall be reinforced to be capable of withstanding a uniform live load of 300 psf (min.).

2.18 ACCESS DOORS
A. Doors shall be flush panel access doors as manufactured Inryco, Inc., Milwaukee, WI; Karp Associates, Inc., Maspeth, NY; BOICO, Birmingham, AL or ENGINEER approved equal. Doors and frames to be steel with concealed hinge and flush screwdriver operated locks.

2.19 CASTINGS
A. All miscellaneous iron castings shall be of best quality materials free from flaws and unsightly defects. Gray cast iron shall be ASTM A 48 Class 35 (35,000 psi tensile strength). Furnish and install in the locations indicated casting of the type and size shown on the Drawings.

Misc. Metals, Fasteners and Special Finishes
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 05501-8

2.20 CARPENTERS IRON WORK
A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for head and nuts which bear on wood structural connections, elsewhere, furnish steel washers.

2.21 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports as required to complete the work. Fabricate miscellaneous units to the sizes, shapes and profiles shown or if not shown, of the required dimensions to receive adjacent grating plates, louvers, vents, grilles, screens or other work to be retained by the framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars of all welded construction using mitered corners, welded brackets and splice plates and a minimum number of joints for filed connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items to be anchored to the work.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 ANCHORAGE ITEMS
A. Furnish all bolts, nuts, shims, pins, screws, nails and other anchors, which, may be required by the Drawings or job conditions to secure all items permanently in place whether or not specifically called for or shown on the Drawings.

3.2 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION OF METAL WORK
A. General: All metal items shall be accurately fabricated and erected with exposed joints close fitting. All joints shall be such of character and so assemble that they will be as strong and rigid as adjoining sections. Joints shall be located where least conspicuous. Items shall have smooth finished surfaces except where otherwise shown or specified.

B. Built-In Items: Members or parts to be built-in with masonry or concrete shall be in a form affording a suitable anchorage or shall be provided with approved anchors, expansion shields or other approved means of securing members.

C. Dissimilar Metals: Ferrous and non-ferrous metals shall be insulated at all contacts with felt washer, strips or sheets, bitumastic paints, or other acceptable means. All aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete shall be coated with two (2) coats of Federal Specification TT-V51F Asphalt Varnish or ENGINEER approved equal.

D. Connections:

1. All required anchors, couplings, bolts and nuts required to support miscellaneous metalwork should be furnished and installed as required.

2. Weights of connections and accessories shall be adequate to safely sustain and withstand stresses and strains to which they will be normally subjected.

3. Connections shall be bolted except where welding is called for in the Drawings. Bolts shall be ¾-inch diameter unless noted or required otherwise.

A. Expansions Anchors:

1. Expansions anchors shall be installed in holes drilled into concrete with carbide tipped drill bits conforming to ANSI B94.12-1977, using a rotary impact hammer for ½-inch and 3/8-inch anchors. Hole depth shall equal or exceed the anchor manufacturer’s minimum recommended embedment. Should hole depth equal anchor manufacturer’s minimum recommended embedment, hole shall be cleaned out Misc. Metals, Fasteners and Special Finishes
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 05501-9 by air pressure. The minimum hole depth shall be per anchor manufacturer’s recommendations. Assure hole is perpendicular and conforms in size to anchor manufacturer’s recommendation.

2. Washer and nut shall be assembled on anchor so that the tope of the nut is flush with the top of the anchor. Then the anchor shall be driven into the hole through the work until the washer bears against the work. The anchor shall be expanded in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. General: Provide stainless steel fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required.

4. Bolts and Buts: Regular hexagon head type, stainless steel, Grade A (within tankage)

5. Lag Bolts: Stainless steel (within tankage)

6. Machine Screws: Stainless steel

7. Wood Screws: Stainless steel

8. Plain Washers: Stainless steel

9. Masonry Anchorage Devices: Galvanized

10. Toggle Bolts: Stainless steel (within tankage)

11. Lock Washers: Stainless steel

12. Bolts, buts, lags, toggle bolts and lock washers above and exterior to tankage shall be galvanized

3.3 WELDING
A. Welding procedures, welders and welding operators, both for shop and field welding, shall be qualified and certified in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1 “Welding in Building Construction” of the American Welding Society. Manufacturer’s and fabricator’s shop drawings shall clearly show complete information and all field welding shall be performed in conformance with this information regarding location, type, size and length of all weld, all in accordance with AWS A2.0 “Standard Welding Symbols” of the American Welding Society. Special conditions shall be fully explained by notes and details.

3.4 HOT-DIP GALVANIZING
A. All fabrication, galvanizing and repair shall comply with ASTM Standards as they apply in accordance with the publication “ASTM Standard for Materials Hot-Dip Galvanized after Fabrication, 1981” issued by American Hot-Dip Galvanizers Association, Inc. In particular, the following specific standards shall apply to work under this contract: ASTM A 123, A 153, A 384, A 385, A 563 and A 780.

B. Items to be galvanized shall be fabricated in accordance with ASTM A 385-80.

C. Galvanizing for fabricated steel items, shall conform to ASTM A 123-78 and shall be done after fabrication.

Steel assemblies shall be subject to safeguarding from warpage and distortion during galvanizing per ASTM A 384-76.

D. Galvanizing for structural steel fasteners and hardware shall conform to ASTM A 153-80. Galvanized bolts, nuts and washers shall be centrifugally spun after galvanizing. Nuts shall have threads tapped oversize, after galvanizing, in accordance with ASTM A 563-80.

E. Upon field erection, any damage measuring more than 1/10-inch wide shall be repaired with a zinc-based solder or zinc-rich paint in accordance with ASTM A 780-80. Marred, damaged, or uncoated areas 4-square inches and less shall be patched with a zinc-based solder to a thickness of 5-milligrams; areas greater than 4- square inches shall be patched with an organic zinc-rich paint to a dry film, Devcon Z, LPS Instant Cold Galvanized or ENGINEER approved equal. The resident project representative shall determine the extent of damage, which would require recoating.

Misc. Metals, Fasteners and Special Finishes
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 05501-10 F. Items subject to distortion during transit, such as thin, curved members, etc., shall be stacked on edge and/or blocked to prevent radius change or other distortion while in transit to and from the galvanizing plant.

3.5 PAINTING
A. Painting of miscellaneous ferrous metal work is specified under Division 09 - Finishes.

3.6 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Rough Hardware:

1. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structure. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Division 05 - Metals.

2. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts, which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.

B. Miscellaneous Steel Trim:

1. Provide shapes and sizes for profiles shown. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work.

2. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim where indicated.
- END OF SECTION -
Commercial Steel Security Fence System
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 05565-1 SECTION 05565

COMMERCIAL STEEL SECURITY FENCE SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials and appurtenances necessary for installation of the steel corrugated pale security fence system defined herein.

1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02200 - Earthwork
B. Section 03300 - Concrete

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall supply a steel security fence system (including the reinforced concrete footings) of a Welded and Steel Corrugated Pale Security (Trident Type) Fence System. The system shall be 8’ height from the finished grade. The system shall include all necessary components (i.e., panels, posts, gates and hardware) needed for installation. CONTRACTOR and or manufacturer shall be responsible for providing the necessary coating of the provided Fence System per the contract documents.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and materials and techniques specified.

1.5 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

B. ASTM B117 - Practice for Operating Salt-Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

C. ASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss. 0020
D. ASTM D714 - Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering in Paint.

E. ASTM D822 - Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus.

F. ASTM D1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments.

G. ASTM D2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates.

H. ASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact).

I. ASTM D3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.

J. ASTM F2408 – Ornamental Fences Employing Galvanized Steel Tubular Pickets.

Commercial Steel Security Fence System
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 05565-2

1.6 SUBMITTAL
A. Submittal shall include necessary structural calculations stamped by a licensed engineer in the State of California for the applicable site conditions. Submittal shall also include necessary layout drawings, detailed bill of materials, and intended Coatings System of the fence system shall also be included in the submittal.

1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damage occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage, and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism and theft.

1.8 PRODUCT WARRANTY
A. All structural fence components (i.e. rails, pickets, and posts) shall be warranted within specified limitations, by the manufacturer for a period of 20 years from date of original purchase. Warranty shall cover any defects in material finish, including cracking, peeling, chipping, blistering or corroding.

B. Reimbursement for labor necessary to restore or replace components that have been found to be defective under the terms of manufactures warranty shall be guaranteed for five (5) years from date of original purchase.

PART 2 – MATERIALS

2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Impasse II High Security Steel Fence System by Ameristar Fence B. Or Engineer Approved Equal.

2.2 MATERIAL
A. Steel material for fence framework (i.e., corrugated pales, rails and posts), when galvanized prior to forming, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A924/A924M, with a minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi (310 MPa). The steel shall be hot-dip galvanized to meet the requirements of ASTM A653/A653M with a minimum zinc coating weight of 0.90 oz/ft2 (276 g/m2), Coating Designation G-90.

B. Material for corrugated pales shall be a nominal 2.75” x .75” x 14 Ga. Tamperproof fasteners shall be used to fasten each pale to rail at every intersection. Fence posts and gate posts shall meet the minimum size requirements of Table 1.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Pales, rails and posts shall be pre-cut to specified lengths. All rails shall be pre-punched to accept tamperproof security fasteners. Post flange shall be pre-punched to accept rail to post attachment. Post web shall be punched providing a clear opening for interior of rails to align throughout the entire system for affixing conduit, video cabling, IDS wiring, and other components for a complete systems integration. All rails shall be attached to post flange providing a bracket-less design at each intermediate post.

B. The manufactured galvanized framework shall be subjected to the PermaCoat® thermal stratification coating process (high-temperature, in-line, multi-stage, multi-layer) including, as a minimum, a six-stage pretreatment/wash, an electrostatic spray application of an epoxy base, and a separate electrostatic spray application of a polyester finish. The base coat shall be a thermosetting epoxy powder coating (gray in color) with a minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508mm). The topcoat shall be a “no-mar” TGIC polyester powder coat finish with a minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508mm). The color shall be (specify Black, Bronze, Commercial Steel Security Fence System
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 05565-3 White, or Desert Sand). The stratification-coated framework shall be capable of meeting the performance requirements for each quality characteristic shown in Table 2.

C. Completed panels shall be capable of supporting a 400 lb. load (applied at midspan) without permanent deformation. Panels shall be biasable to a 30˚ change in grade.

D. Fence system shall be designed to minimize the system impedance to comply with IEEE grounding requirements. No additional grounding material, beyond the structure grounding lug installation, will be required to create a safe low resistance fence system. By way of fence construction, the entire fence system is inherently grounded without the need for any additional work. Grounding location at the post is for taking the fence system to site ground.

E. Swing gates shall be fabricated using 2” sq. x 12ga rail, 2” sq. x 12ga. gate ends, and 2.75” x .75” x 0.075 pales. Gates that exceed 6’ in width will have a 2” sq. x 11ga. intermediate upright. All rail and upright intersections shall be joined by welding. All pale and rail intersections shall also be joined by welding.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. All new installation shall be laid out by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the construction plans.

3.2 FENCE INSTALLATION
A. Fence post shall be spaced according to Table 3, plus or minus ¼”. For installations that must be raked to follow sloping grades, the post spacing dimension must be measured along the grade. Fence panels shall be attached to the line and end posts with fasteners supplied by the manufacturer. Attachment to corner post shall be made using brackets and fasteners supplied by the manufacturer (See Figure 1). Posts shall be set in concrete footers having a minimum depth of 36” (Note: In some cases, local restrictions of freezing weather conditions may require a greater depth). The “Earthwork” and “Concrete” sections of this specification shall govern material requirements for the concrete footer. Posts setting by other methods such as plated posts or grouted core-drilled footers are permissible only if shown by engineering analysis to be sufficient in strength for the intended application.

3.3 FENCE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE
A. When cutting/drilling rails or posts adhere to the following steps to seal the exposed steel surfaces; 1) Remove all metal shavings from cut area. 2) Apply zinc-rich primer to thoroughly cover cut edge and/or drilled hole; let dry. 3) Apply 2 coats of custom finish paint matching fence color. Failure to seal exposed surfaces per steps 1-3 above will negate warranty. Ameristar spray cans or paint pens shall be used to prime and finish exposed surfaces; it is recommended that paint pens be used to prevent overspray.

3.4 GATE INSTALLATION
B. Gate posts shall be spaced according to the manufacturers’ gate drawings, dependent on standard out-to-out gate leaf dimensions and gate hardware selected. Type and quantity of gate hinges shall be based on the application; weight, height, and number of gate cycles. The manufacturers’ gate drawings shall identify the necessary gate hardware required for the application. Gate hardware shall be provided by the manufacture of the gate and shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.5 CLEANING
C. The CONTRACTOR shall clean the jobsite of excess materials; post-hole excavations shall be scattered uniformly away from posts.

Commercial Steel Security Fence System
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 05565-4 Table 1 – Minimum Sizes for Posts
Fence Posts (Nominal) Panel Height
3” x 2.75” x 12 Ga. I-Beam Up to & Including 8’ Height
4” x 2.75” x 11 Ga. I-Beam Over 8’ Height up to & including 10’ Height Gate Height
Gate Leaf Up to & Including 6’ Over 6’ Up to &
Including 8’
Over 8’ Up to &
Including 10’
Over 12’
Up to 4’ 3” x 12Ga. 3” x 12 Ga. 4” x 11 Ga. 4” x 11 Ga. 4’1” to 6’ 3” x 12Ga. 3” x 12 Ga. 4” x 11 Ga. 4” x 11 Ga. 6’1” to 8’ 4” x 11 Ga. 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 8’1” to 10’ 4” x 11 Ga. 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 10’1” to 12’ 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 8” x 1/4" 12’1” to 16’ 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 8” x 1/4” 8” x 1/4"
Table 2 – Coating Performance Requirements
Quality Characteristics ASTM Test Method Performance Requirements Adhesion D3359 – Method B Adhesion (Retention of Coating) over 90% of test area (Tape and knife test).

Corrosion Resistance B117, D714 & D1654 Corrosion Resistance over 3,500 hours (Scribed per D1654; failure mode is accumulation of 1/8” coating loss from scribe or medium #8 blisters).

Impact Resistance D2794 Impact Resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward impact using

0.625” ball).

Weathering
Resistance
D2244, D523 (60˚ Method) Weathering Resistance over 1,000 hours (Failure mode is 60% loss of gloss or color variance of more than 3 delta-E color units).

Table 3 – Post Spacing
Span 8’ Nominal (95” Rail)
Line & End Posts
Post Size 3” x 2.75” x 12 Ga. I-Beam 4” x 2.75” x 11 Ga. I-Beam Post Settings ± ¼” O.C. 96” 96”
*For Corner Posts see Figure 1
Figure 1
- END OF SECTION -
DIVISION 06 (Not Used)

WOOD & PLASTICS
DIVISION 07

THERMAL & MOISTURE

PROTECTION
Roof Accessories
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 07220-1 SECTION 07220

ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish and install all roof accessories and appurtenant work as needed to construct a built-up roof, complete, including but not limited to roof ventilators and hatches, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Codes: All codes, as referenced herein, are specified in Section 01090 - Reference Standards.

B. Trade Standards: National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) C. Manufacturer's Standards: In addition to the standards listed above, roof accessories and their installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery of Materials: Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken, packages, containers or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer.

B. Storage: All materials shall be carefully stored on wood blocking in an area that is protected from the elements. Storage shall be in a manner that will prevent damage or marring of finish.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOF VENTS
A. Roof relief vents with bird screens shall be provided, where shown on the plans, and shall be of the type recommended by the National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) and approved by the roofing manufacturer.

2.2 ROOF ACCESS HATCHES
A. Roof access hatches shall be provided where shown on the plans and shall be constructed of 14 gage (curb & cover) with cover operations being assisted by a fully enclosed compression spring operators as manufactured by KARP Assoc., Maspeth, NY or equal.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. The installation shall conform to applicable codes and the manufacturer's published or written recommendations, specifications, and published installation instructions for the type of work being performed.

The construction shall be coordinated with the work of other trades.

B. All roof openings, roof-mounted equipment, duct openings and skylights shall be provided with a prefabricated curb unless the equipment above the roof opening is supplied with its own curb which extends to 8 inches or higher beyond the top of the roof insulation. Curb configuration shall match roofing typical.

Roof Accessories
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 07220-2 C. Roof hatches with ladders shall be provided with a ladder-up device.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Roof Hatches, Openable Fire and Smoke Hatches and Roof Ventilators: Shall be installed over prepared openings with their own curbs or prefabricated curbs, and shall be fastened to roof deck in accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions. Lifting mechanisms and accessories shall be adjusted to insure proper operation. Abraded prime and finish coat surfaces shall be touched-up after completion of installation with the same type finish and the same dry-film thickness.

B. Protective Coating: All roof accessories shall be coated in accordance with Section 09800 - Special Coating, to match the roofing color. Primer coats shall be compatible with finish coats. - END OF SECTION -
Metal Wall and Soffit Panels
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 07412-1 SECTION 07412

METAL WALL AND SOFFIT PANELS
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish and install metal wall and soffit panels for a complete weather-tight system in accordance to the Contract Documents.

1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 – General Requirements, apply to this Section.

B. This Section includes the following: Factory-formed and field-assembled, exposed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 05 – Metals

2. Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 – Submittals.

B. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles and finishes for each type of metal wall panel and accessory.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal wall panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures and accessories and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Metal Wall and Soffit Panels: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other metal wall panel accessories.

2. Trim and Closures: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.

3. Accessories: 12 inches (300 mm) long Samples for each type of accessory.

4. Exposed Gaskets: 12 inches (300 mm) long.

5. Exposed Sealants: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealants in ½-inch (13 mm) wide joints formed between two (2) 6-inch (150mm) long strips of material matching the appearance of metal wall panels adjacent to joint sealants.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer.

F. Maintenance Data: For metal wall panels to include in Maintenance Manuals.

G. Warranty: Special warranties specified in this section.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

Metal Wall and Soffit Panels
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 07412-2 B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal wall panel through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles and dimensional requirements of metal wall panels and are based on the specific system indicated.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with Requirements as referenced in Section 01040 – Coordination. Review methods and procedures related to metal wall panel assemblies including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Meet with CITY, Architect, testing and inspecting Agency Representative, metal wall panel Installer, metal wall panel Manufacturer's Representative, structural-support Installer and Installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal wall panels including Installers of doors, windows and louvers.

2. Review and finalize Construction Schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review Methods and Procedures related to metal wall panel installation, including Manufacturer's written Instructions.

4. Examine support conditions for compliance with Requirements, including alignment between and attachment to structural members.

5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings and condition of other construction that will affect metal wall panels.

6. Review Governing Regulations and Requirements for Insurance, Certificates and Testing and Inspecting, if applicable.

7. Review Temporary Protection Requirements for metal wall panel assembly during and after installation.

8. Review wall panel Observation and Repair Procedures after metal wall panel Installation.

9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery of Materials: Deliver components, sheets, metal wall panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal wall panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Storage:

1. Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

2. Stack metal wall panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weather-tight and ventilated covering. Store metal wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal wall panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting or other surface damage.

3. Store metal-faced composite wall panels vertically, covered with suitable weather-tight and ventilated covering. Store metal-faced composite wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal-faced composite wall panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting or other surface damage. Do not allow storage space to exceed 120 degree F (49 degree C).

4. Protect strippable protective covering on metal wall panels from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal wall panel installation.

Metal Wall and Soffit Panels
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 07412-3

5. Protect foam-plastic insulation as follows:
a. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. b. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic insulation materials to Project site before installation time.
c. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal wall panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by field measurements before metal wall panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, either establish framing and opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal wall panels without field measurements, or allow for field trimming of panels. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual building dimensions, locations of structural members, and openings correspond to established dimensions.

1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate metal wall panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of studs, soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure and noncorrosive installation.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. The manufacture shall provide a 2-year warranty.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.

2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PANEL MATERIALS
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50; structural quality.

2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

3. Exposed Finishes: Zincalume Plus.

Metal Wall and Soffit Panels
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 07412-4 B. Panel Sealants:

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape ½-inch (13mm) wide and 1/8-inch (3mm) thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal wall panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal wall panel manufacturer.

2.3 SOUND ATTENUATION METAL PANEL
A. Panel system shall be constructed of a foam composite of two roll formed steel faces surrounded and entirely bonded to a close cell poured-in-place polyisocyanurate foam core. The exterior steel face shall be compositely bonded to the interior steel face but is otherwise isolated from contact. The integrated accessories shall allow for easy cladding attachments and panel installation.

1. Panel Thickness: 3”

2. Subtrate: AZ50 Galvalume

3. Finish: Epoxy Primer – Both Sides

4. Support Requirement: See Plans

5. Attachment Method: Panel clips, pre-punched rails integrated with the panel joinery and integrated brick tie clips.

6. Sealing Method: Joint has factory applied sealant. Panel ends and marriage beads to factory sealant applied during installation.

7. Exterior Cladding Attachment Method: Subgrits attached to panel clips, rails integrated brick ties for brick installation.

8. Weight: 1.9 lbs/sq. ft.

B. Approved Manufacturers

1. Centria

2. Or Engineer Approved Equal

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
A. Steel Sheet Components, General: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.

B. Base or Sill Angles or Channels: 0.079-inch (2.0-mm) bare steel thickness, cold-formed, galvanized steel sheet.

C. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

1. Fasteners for Wall Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex-head carbon-steel screws, with a stainless-steel cap or zinc-aluminum-alloy head and EPDM or neoprene sealing washer.

2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex washer head.

Metal Wall and Soffit Panels
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 07412-5 B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.6 EXPOSED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS
A. General: Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

B. Corrugated-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with alternating curved ribs spaced at

2.67 inches (68mm) o.c. across width of panel.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: IMSA Building Products Nu-Wave Corrugated or a comparable product of one of the following:
a. AEP-Span.
b. ATAS International.
c. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
d. Flexospan Steel Buildings, Inc.

2. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 24 gauge for curved panels, 22 gauge for flat panels. a. Exterior Finish: Zinalume Plus.
b. Color: Natural.

3. Panel Coverage: 34.67-inch (881mm).

4. Panel Height: 0.875-inch (22mm).

2.7 METAL SOFFIT PANELS
A. Metal Soffit Panels: Match profile and material of metal wall panels.

1. Finish: Match finish and color of metal wall panels or as indicated on Drawings.

B. Corrugated-Profile Metal Soffit Panels: Perforated panels; with lapped joint between panels.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: IMSA Building Products Nu-Wave Corrugated or a comparable product of one of the following:
a. AEP-Span.
b. ATAS International.
c. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
d. Flexospan Steel Buildings, Inc

2. Material: Same materials, finish, and color as metal wall panels, except perforated.

3. Panel Coverage: 34.67-inche (881mm).

4. Panel Height: 0.875-inch (22mm).

5. Perforation: 60 Degree Staggered, 0.125-inch diameter, 0.250-inch center spacing, 22.7 % open area.

2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal wall panels.

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer.

Metal Wall and Soffit Panels
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 07412-6

3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell expanded cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch (25mm) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.0179-inch (0.45mm) thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals and fillers.

Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal wall panels.

2.9 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

1. Form panel lines, breaks and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from warp and buckle.

2. Fabricate wall panels with panel stiffeners as required to maintain fabrication tolerances and to withstand design loads.

B. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.

C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams.

Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.

5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.

6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” or metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

Metal Wall and Soffit Panels
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 07412-7 C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal wall panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Examine primary and secondary wall framing to verify that angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of interfering with insulation attachment.

B. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Section 07620 – Flashing and Sheet Metal.

C. Miscellaneous Framing: Install base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel support members and anchorage according to ASTM C 754 and metal wall panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

1. Soffit Framing: Wire-tie furring channels to supports, as required to comply with drawings as indicated.

3.3 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts and subgirts, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Field cutting of metal wall panels by torch is not permitted.

2. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels.

3. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels.

4. Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all openings.

Fasten with self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be concealed by metal wall panels are installed.

5. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.

6. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.

7. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds.

8. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.

9. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete, and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing.

Metal Wall and Soffit Panels
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 07412-8

10. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts or self-tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws.

11. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.

B. Fasteners: Steel Wall Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.

D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.

1. Seal metal wall panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07920 – Caulking and Sealants.

3.4 FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Lap-Seam Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.

1. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.

2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal wall panels.

3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer.

4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.

5. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal wall panels and between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.

6. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end laps, and on side laps of nesting-type panels; on side laps of corrugated nesting-type, ribbed, or fluted panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels weatherproof to driving rains.

7. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (150mm) end lap, sealed with butyl-rubber sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

B. Metal Soffit Panels: Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing.

1. Flash and seal panels with weather closures where metal soffit panels meet walls and at perimeter of all openings.

3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips and similar items.

Metal Wall and Soffit Panels
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 07412-9 B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10-feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1-inch (25mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal wall panel units within installed tolerance of ¼-inch in 20-feet (6mm in 6m), nonaccumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch (3mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect completed metal wall panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing.

B. Remove and replace applications of metal wall panels where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

C. Additional tests and inspections, at CONTRACTOR's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt and sealant.

C. Replace metal wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
- END OF SECTION -
Equipment Roof Hatch
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 07723-1 SECTION 07723

EQUIPMENT ROOF HATCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide equipment roof hatches to be installed as part of the shade structure for the pump.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including profiles, accessories, location, adjacent construction interface, and dimensions.

C. Warranty: Submit executed copy of manufacturer’s standard warranty.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: A minimum of 5 years experience manufacturing similar products.

B. Installer: A minimum of 2 years experience installing similar products.

C. Manufacturer’s Quality System: Registered to ISO 9001:2008 Quality Standards including in-house engineering for product design activities.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in manufacturer’s original packaging. Store materials in a dry, protected, well-vented area.

Inspect product upon receipt and report damaged material immediately to delivering carrier and note such damage on the carrier’s freight bill of lading.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty. Materials shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of five years from the date of purchase. Should a part fail to function in normal use within this period, manufacturer shall furnish a new part at no charge.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Type F Roof Hatch by The Bilco Company, P.O. Box 1203, New Haven, CT 06505, 1-800-366-6530, Fax: 1-203-933-8478, Web: www.bilco.com.

B. Or Engineer Approved Equal.

2.2 ROOF HATCH
A. Furnish and install where indicated on plans metal roof hatch Type F, size width: 48" (1219mm) x length: 48" (1219mm). Length denotes hinge side. The roof hatch shall be single leaf. The roof hatch shall be preassembled from the manufacturer.

Equipment Roof Hatch
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 07723-2 B. Performance characteristics:

1. Cover shall be reinforced to support a minimum live load of 40 psf (195kg/m2) with a maximum deflection of 1/150th of the span or 20 psf (97kg/m2) wind uplift.

2. Operation of the cover shall be smooth and easy with controlled operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing.

3. Operation of the cover shall not be affected by temperature.

4. Entire hatch shall be weathertight with fully welded corner joints on cover and curb.

C. Cover: Shall be 11 gauge (2.3mm) aluminum with a 3” (76mm) beaded flange with formed reinforcing members. Cover shall have a heavy extruded EPDM rubber gasket that is bonded to the cover interior to assure a continuous seal when compressed to the top surface of the curb.

D. Cover insulation: Shall be fiberglass of 1” (25mm) thickness, fully covered and protected by an 18 gauge (1mm) aluminum liner.

E. Curb: Shall be 12” (305mm) in height and of [select: 14 gauge (1.9mm) paint bond G-90 galvanized steel or 11 gauge (2.3mm) aluminum]. The curb shall be formed with a 3-1/2” (89mm) flange with 7/16” (11mm) holes provided for securing to the roof deck. The curb shall be equipped with an integral metal cap flashing of the same gauge and material as the curb, fully welded at the corners, that features the Bil-Clip® flashing system, including stamped tabs, 6” (153mm) on center, to be bent inward to hold single ply roofing membrane securely in place.

F. Curb insulation: Shall be rigid, high-density fiberboard of 1” (25mm) thickness on outside of curb.

G. Lifting mechanisms: Manufacturer shall provide compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes to provide, smooth, easy, and controlled cover operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing. The upper tube shall be the outer tube to prevent accumulation of moisture, grit, and debris inside the lower tube assembly. The lower tube shall interlock with a flanged support shoe [for aluminum construction: welded to the curb assembly; for steel construction: through bolted to the curb assembly].

H. Hardware

1. Heavy pintle hinges shall be provided

2. Cover shall be equipped with a spring latch with interior and exterior turn handles

3. Roof hatch shall be equipped with interior and exterior padlock hasps.

4. The latch strike shall be a stamped component bolted to the curb assembly.

5. Cover shall automatically lock in the open position with a rigid hold open arm equipped with a 1” (25mm) diameter red vinyl grip handle to permit easy release for closing.

6. Compression spring tubes shall be an anti-corrosive composite material and all other hardware shall be zinc plated and chromate sealed. [For installation in highly corrosive environments or when prolonged exposure to hot water or steam is anticipated, specify Type 316 stainless steel hardware].

7. Cover hardware shall be bolted into heavy gauge channel reinforcing welded to the underside of the cover and concealed within the insulation space.

I. Finishes: Factory finish shall be [select: alkyd based red oxide primed steel or mill finish aluminum].

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and openings for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Equipment Roof Hatch
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 07723-3

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Locate units level, plumb, and in proper alignment with adjacent work.

1. Test units for proper function and adjust until proper operation is achieved.

2. Repair finishes damaged during installation.

3. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces using methods acceptable to the manufacturer which will not damage finish. -END OF SECTION-
Caulking and Sealants
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 07920-1 SECTION 07920

CAULKING AND SEALANTS
PART 1 -- GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish and install caulking and sealing as indicated in Division 03.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

B. Indicate manufacturers and brand names, colors available and locations where each will be used.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of the general conditions except as noted below.

B. Guarantee all work of this section for a period of 2 years.

C. Guarantee all work against water leaks, air infiltration, sagging and pulling loose.

D. Guarantee shall include replacement and/or repair of other work damaged by water leakage in caulking and sealant work.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sealants in original sealed containers, each bearing manufacturer’s name and product designation.

B. Do not retain at the job site material, which has exceeded the shelf life recommended by its manufacturer.

PART 2 -- MATERIALS

2.1 SEALANTS
A. Types 1 to 4 Sealants: Polyurethane sealants conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-00227E Type II & ANSI A116.1.

1. Type 1 Sealant: Two part 30-40 Shore A, non-sag
a. Manufacture Sikaflex – 2C or equal

2. Type 2 Sealant: Two part, 35-45 Shore A, self-leveling.

3. Type 3 Sealant: Two part, 20-35 Shore A, self-leveling.

4. Type 4 Sealant: Two part, 20-35 Shore A, non-sag.

B. Type 5 Sealant: One component, elastomeric gun grade polyurethane sealant conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. Use NT, M, A, G and I Federal Specifications TT-S-00230C Type 2, Class A.

1. Manufacturer: Sonneborn Sonolastic NP 1 or equal.

2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Primers: As specified by sealant manufacturer
B. Backup Materials: Closed cell polyethylene foam
C. Bond Breaker: Polyethylene film.

Caulking and Sealants
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 07920-2

2.3 COLOR
A. Color for each location of use shall be as selected in accordance with the contract documents. Nonavailability of a required color within a particular brand of otherwise approved material shall not act to relieve obligation to furnish material of required color and conforming to specifications.

B. Colors shall be selected to best blend with adjoining materials.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION

3.1 LOCATIONS FOR SEALANT TYPES
A. Type 1 Sealant: Use for all interior and exterior construction, expansion joints, etc. associated with sealing the joints in the concrete tanks
B. Type 2 Sealant: Except as hereinafter specified, use for all interior and exterior horizontal joints subject to foot traffic.

C. Type 3 Sealant: Except as hereinafter specified, or where Type 1 sealant is required, use for all exterior horizontal joint.

D. Type 4 Sealant: Use for all exterior vertical surfaces.

E. Type 5 Sealant: Use for all interior work except where Type 1 sealant is required.

F. Caulk and seal all open joints, both interior and exterior; at junction of metal frames and walls; at other locations as noted on drawings.

G. Generally, expansion joints in exterior concreted flatwork on grade, curbs and gutter for sitework, etc.; joint fillers will not require a joint sealant. Where sealant is noted on drawings for such joints, sealant shall be Type 1 and a bond breaker shall be installed along top of joint filler, full width of joint, to present contact between sealant and joint filler.

3.2 SEALANT AND JOINT DETAILS
A. Joint Sizes:

1. Types 1, 2, 3 and 4 Sealants:
a. Minimum joint size: ¼-inch x ¼-inch
b. Depth to width ration of joint shall be a recommended by sealant manufacturer. c. Maximum width: Sealant manufacturer’s recommended maximum.

2. Type 4 Sealant: Maximum joint size shall be 3/8-inch x ½-inch.

B. Joints deeper than above shall have backup material installed to maintain specified depth.

C. With Types 1, 2, 3 and 4 sealants, a bond breaker shall be installed, unless backup material is used, so that sealant bonds only sides of joints.

3.3 SEALANT INSTALLATION
A. Carefully and thoroughly clean surfaces with cleaner, and in matter recommended by sealant manufacturer.

B. Prime surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer.

C. Apply sealants smoothly and uniformly. Mask surfaces each side of joints to protect adjacent surface and to form straight, even edges.
- END OF SECTION -
DIVISION 08

DOORS & WINDOWS
Steel Doors and Frames
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 08110-1 SECTION 08110

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish and install steel doors, frames and related items, complete, operable, including all finish hardware, and all appurtenant work, complete and operable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Codes: All codes, as referenced herein, are specified in Section 01090 - Reference Standards.

B. Commercial Standards:

ASTM A 366 Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality ANSI A115 Series Door and Frame Preparation
UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

C. Trade Standards: National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) or Steel Door Institute (SDI).

D. Manufacturers' Standards: In addition to the standards listed above, the steel doors and frames and their installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall show details of the products and systems and connections to adjoining materials. Schedules showing sizes, types, and locations of door louvers and glass shall be submitted along with manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Doors and frames shall be shipped and stored with temporary stiffeners and spacers in place to prevent distortion.

B. Doors and frames shall be delivered in original, unbroken packages, containers or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer.

C. Doors and frames shall be carefully stored on wood blocking in an area that is protected from the elements.

Storage shall be in a manner that will prevent damage or marring of finish.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION - GENERAL
A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: All steel doors and frames shall be shop fabricated and shop assembled, where possible. Temporary stiffeners, spacers, and other accessories necessary to facilitate handling and accurate erection shall be provided. After fabrication, all tool marks and other surface imperfections shall be filled and ground smooth.

Steel Doors and Frames
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 08110-2 B. Fire Rating and Labeling: Doors and frames specified or shown as fire-rated shall bear a UL label indicating the type of rating for which certified. Designs and construction of such products shall have specific UL approval according to current procedures for the specified fire rating, either 3-hour, 1½-hour, ¾-hour or 20- minute as shown. Hollow steel doors and frames for fire-rated openings shall conform to Underwriters' Laboratories listing and shall be UL labeled.

C. Materials for Doors and Frames: All hollow metal doors and frames shall be fabricated entirely from prime quality, commercial grade, cold-rolled steel conforming to ASTM A 366, Type II or III.

D. Priming and Painting: Doors and frames shall be chemically treated to ensure maximum paint adhesion and shall have all exposed surfaces painted with a rust-inhibitive primer after fabrication.

E. Hardware: Doors and frames shall be reinforced and drilled or tapped for fully templated hardware; and shall be reinforced with plates for surface-mounted hardware, meeting ANSI A115 Series requirements. Hardware shall be as specified in Section 08710 - Finish Hardware and/or as shown.

2.2 METAL FRAMES
A. Pressed Metal Frames: Pressed steel frames for doors and other openings shall be combination buckled frame and trim of type and sizes as shown. Metal shall not be lighter than 16-gauge steel. Frames shall be of the welded unit type. Special frames, oversized frames and frames with transom shall be provided where shown.

2.3 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors shall be welded inside each frame jamb head, and holes shall be provided for floor anchorage. Minimum thickness of floor anchors shall be 14-gauge.

B. Anchors for Masonry/Concrete Installations: Frames for installation in masonry and/or concrete walls shall be provided with variable jamb anchors of the T-strap, stirrups and strap or wire type. The number of anchors provided per frame jamb and head shall be as follows:

1. Frames up to 7-feet 6 inches in height: Three (3) anchors.

2. Frames over 7-feet 6 inches to 8-feet 0 inches in height: Four (4) anchors.

3. Frames over 8-feet 0 inches in height: One (1) anchor for each 2-feet 0 inches or fraction in height.

4. Frame head anchors shall be not less than those required in Section 01090 - Reference Standards.

5. Curries.

2.4 SILENCER HOLES
A. Appropriate holes for silencers shall be provided in the doorframes, which are not designated to receive weather stripping, seals or sound seals.

2.5 STEEL DOORS
A. Design and Construction: Steel doors shall be of hollow metal construction and shall be of full flush design with no visible seams. Face sheets shall be not less than cold-rolled, stretcher-leveled, 18-gage steel. All doors shall have flush seamless face sheets with continuously and fully welded seam edges. Doors shall be rigid and neat in appearance, and shall be free from warpage or buckle. Corner bends shall be true and straight and shall be of not less than the minimum radius for the gage of metal used. The door top and bottom shall be internally reinforced by steel members welded in place. Tops of exterior doors shall be provided with flush, water and weather tight, top enclosures.

B. Transom Panels: Transom panels shall be provided where shown and shall be of construction same as doors.

Steel Doors and Frames
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 08110-3 C. Door and Transom Cores: Doors and transom cores shall be water-resistant honeycomb with minimum R of four (4) [fiberboard] [mineral]. Fire rated doors shall be solid or fiber mineral core doors as required to meet code and Reference Standards requirements.

D. Louvers: Door louvers for steel doors shall be of steel of the type, which integrally frames the opening and can attach securely. Louvers shall be of the inverted "Y" blade type for exterior use and "V" blade for interior use. Exterior louvered openings shall be provided with removable type insect screens. Door louvers shall be uniformly located in doors and shall be of sizes shown. Louvers at labeled doors shall be equipped with concealed fusible links.

E. Double Doors: Double doors shall be provided with a "T" type steel astragal unless otherwise specified in Section 08710 - Finish Hardware.

F. Lock Box: Lock box to be provided by CITY.

G. Manufacturers or Equal:

1. Forderer Cornice Works;

2. Krieger Steel Products Co.;

3. Overly Manufacturing Co.;

4. Or Engineer Approved Equal.

2.6 Knox Box
A. Description: A small, wall mounted safe shall be provided with all necessary keys, access cards, entry items and emergency planning documents necessary in a location deemed acceptable by the local Fire Department Authority. The safe provided shall be compliant to National Fire Code (NFPA, IFC, IBC).

B. Fabrication: Knox box shall be a surface mount type. The box shall be fabricated using a 1/4-inch plate steel housing with a 5/8-inch thick steel door. The steel door shall have an interior gasket seal. Vault shall have an anti-theft relocking mechanism with drill resistant hard-plate lock protector. Where applicable, components shall be constructed of stainless steel.

C. Vault and Lock UL Listings:

1. UL 1037 – Standard for Antitheft Alarms and Devices

2. UL 1610 – Standard for Central-Station Burglar Alarm Units

3. UL 1332 – Standard for Organic Coatings for Steel Enclosures for Outdoor Use Electrical Equipment

4. UL 437 – Standard for Key Locks
D. Approved Manufacturers:

1. CONTRACTOR is responsible for coordinating an acceptable knox box with the Local Fire Department Authority.
a. Knox Company, KnoxVault 4400 (Pending Fire Department Approval) b. Or Fire Department Approved Equal
PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION
A. General: All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications.

B. All work shall be coordinated with appropriate related subcontractor’s work to assure a proper installation.

Field conditions and dimensions shall be verified prior to fabrication.

Steel Doors and Frames
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 08110-4

3.2 FRAME INSTALLATION
A. Frames shall be set plumb and square in a true plane, and be securely anchored to the adjoining construction.

Steel shims shall be provided and shall be set tight and rigidly attached between frame anchors and structure.

All finished metal frames shall be strong and rigid; neat in appearance and square, true and free of defects, warp or buckle.

B. Molded members, trims and stops, shall be clean cut, straight and shall be of a uniform profile throughout their lengths.

C. Corner joints shall have all contact edges tightly closed with all trim faces mitered, welded and finished smooth. The use of gussets will not be permitted.

3.3 DOOR INSTALLATION
A. Doors shall be installed plumb, square and level. Doors shall operate freely, but not loosely. They shall be free from rattling while in a closed position.

B. The door clearances shall be plus 3/32-inch or minus 1/32-inch and shall not exceed the limits specified in the manufacturers printed recommendations.

C. Any door that becomes warped more than 3/16-inch out-of-plane shall be replaced.

D. Doors and door's finish hardware shall have hardware protected prior to painting as specified in Section 08710 - Finish Hardware.

3.4 FINISH HARDWARE
A. Finish hardware shall be installed in accordance with hardware manufacturer's standard templates and printed instructions. Operable parts shall be adjusted for correct function and operation.

3.5 EXISTING CONSTRUCTION
A. Frames that are dimpled for fasteners required for installation into previously placed (existing) concrete, masonry or steel structures shall have the fasteners and fastener frame dimples filled with auto putty or an equal filler material. The fasteners and fillers at dimple holes shall be ground smooth (non-visible) before painting. Fastener locations shall not be visible after the painting work is finished. - END OF SECTION -
Finish Hardware
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 08710-1 SECTION 08710

FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish and install all finish hardware and appurtenant work, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. The work hereunder shall include all fabrication and mounting templates as needed for fabricators and for control of application of metal items.

C. In addition, provide and install all trim, attachments and fastenings specified or required for proper and complete installation. The work of this section shall include all hardware that is not specified in other sections.

D. Protect the finish hardware from damage during construction, painting and clean-up.

1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Codes: All codes, as referenced herein, are specified in Section 01090 - Reference Standards.

B. Commercial Standards:

Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Requirements and Approvals Hardware Institute (DHI) "Recommended Procedure for Processing Hardware Schedules and Templates" and "Architectural Hardware Scheduling and Format" BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
C. Manufacturers Standards: In addition to the standards listed above, the finish hardware and its installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

B. Samples: The samples of all items requested shall be furnished by the hardware supplier no later than 10 days after said request is received.

1.4 PROPRIETARY DESIGNATIONS
A. Manufacturer's product names, numbers and models are given herein for the purpose of indicating the requirements for the type, general construction, material and operation of the specific item, not with the intention of limiting the item to the manufacturer's listed product. Substitution of another manufacturer's product that is fully equivalent in all respects may be made subject to the approval of the ENGINEER.

Detailed and complete data shall be supplied as required to facilitate appropriate evaluation of all proposed substitute items.

1.5 PACKING, MARKING AND DELIVERY
A. All locks, exit devices, door closers, overhead door holders, hinges, kick plates, pulls and push plates, thresholds, and other similar items shall be individually packed in separate, suitable, original, containers as furnished by the hardware manufacturers. Each container shall be clearly marked with item numbers, article numbers.

Finish Hardware
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 08710-2 B. Small miscellaneous items that would not require specific location identifications, such as door stops, coat and hat hooks and door silencers may be quantity packed if properly labeled with item numbers and other identification.

C. Hardware shall be checked upon delivery with the aid of a representative of the hardware supplier's firm.

Proper storage of all hardware will be required until ready for application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Finish hardware shall be coordinated with all other work requiring builder's hardware or attaching to it.

Copies of schedules, templates, etc., shall be furnished in ample time to avoid fabrication and construction delays. All hardware shall be made to template.

B. All hardware furnished in connection with doors bearing Underwriters' Labels or where necessary to meet special requirements shall be in strict accordance with conditions established by the authority having jurisdiction and shall be subject to approval of that authority.

C. Hand of lock shall be as shown. If door hand is changed during construction, necessary changes shall be made at no extra cost.

D. Exit doors shall be operable at all times from the inside without the use of key or any special knowledge or effort.

E. Approved shop drawings from those trades with which hardware must be coordinated shall be provided to the hardware supplier. After checking these shop drawings, necessary template information shall promptly be supplied to all concerned as may be required to facilitate the progress of the job. All procedures for template information shall be in accordance with the handbook, "Recommended Procedure for Processing Hardware Schedules and Templates."
F. Finish of all hardware shall be 630-brush stainless steel unless otherwise specified.

G. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Locks: To be provided by CITY

2. Exit Devices: Precision, Sargent, Von Dupfrin

3. Closers: LCN, Sargent, Norton
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. All required items of hardware, including cylinders for locks, and all fitting, adjusting, and securing of each item neatly and firmly in place, shall be in perfect working order. Any work less than this shall form a basis for corrective measures.

B. All finish hardware shall be provided with paint protection prior to painting work. The paint protection shall be removed after completion of the painting work and the finish hardware cleaned and polished.

3.2 HARDWARE GENERAL
A. Hardware is specified for convenience of locating hardware and does not preclude in any way the requirements that all necessary hardware shall be furnished and properly installed. Hardware not specifically called out shall be similar to that required for similar uses.

Finish Hardware
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 08710-3

3.3 LATCHES AND BOLTS
A. Latches and bolts shall be installed, to automatically engage in keepers, whether activated by closers or by manual push. In no case should additional manual pressure be required to engage latch or bolt in keepers.

3.4 CLOSERS AND HINGES
A. Closers and hinges shall be carefully adjusted to operate the doors noiselessly and evenly, and hinges shall be installed so as not to bind. Closers, closer arms and hold-open arms shall be attached with sex bolts.

B. Except at exterior doors, closers shall not be mounted on corridor or vestibule side of door.

3.5 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS
A. All doors shall be provided with weather-stripping or seals unless mutes, product weather-stripping or other special seals are specified.

3.6 PROTECTIVE TAPE AND COATINGS
A. Strippable coating, removable tape protection or other approved means shall be provided to prevent any damage or staining of hardware during construction. Such protective measures shall be removed prior to final cleaning and the hardware polished before the acceptance of the project. - END OF SECTION -
DIVISION 09

FINISHES
Special Coatings
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 09800-1 SECTION 09800

SPECIAL COATINGS
PART 1 -- GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required for accomplishing special coatings on equipment, tanks or piping in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.2 SPECIAL NOTICE
A. Because there exists in this project corrosive agents in the liquids and, in certain areas, in the atmosphere, special coatings for protecting the select equipment and appurtenances are required. The service requirements of the coatings are harsh and only products with an extended history of successful application will be acceptable.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 – General Requirements

2. Division 05 – Metals

3. Section 09900 – Painting

4. Division 11 – Equipment
C. Wherever detailed coating/painting requirements are covered under an equipment or product specification, the Specifications herein, shall govern over those coating requirements, with respect to surface preparation, coat materials, coats, thickness and coverage with the exception of manufacturer’s supplied coatings and protection. Determine if the manufacturer’s supplied coatings are adequate.

1.3 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
A. Unless otherwise noted, the coating products shall be manufactured by the Tnemec Company, the ICI Paints Company, the Wisconsin Protective Coatings Corporation, or as approved by Engineer. Coating products must be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.4 ITEMS REQUIRING SPECIAL COATING
A. See Coating Schedule as listed in PART 2 – PRODUCTS.

1.5 ITEMS NOT REQUIRING SPECIAL COATING
A. The metal surfaces of stainless steel, chromium plate, galvanized and aluminum that are not now coated will not require field coating. Do not apply coating over any code-required labels, glass items, gauges and name plates. It is also important not to coat any moving parts or operating units, valves or stems, or any mechanical and electrical parts such as valve and damper operators, linkages. It is the contactor’s responsibility to protect any surface that is not to receive a coating.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of Coaters: All coating shall be done by qualified, skilled and experienced craftsmen. In the acceptance or rejection of completed coating, no allowance will be made for lack of skills on the part of the craftsmen.

Special Coatings
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 09800-2 B. Coating Labels: Labels on coating containers shall include the following:

1. Manufacturer’s name.

2. Generic type of coat.

3. Manufacturer’s stock number.

4. Color.

5. Instructions for thinning where applicable.

C. Field Quality Control: Coating film thickness shall be subject to measurement with electrometer, wet film gauge, low or high voltage meter and/or applicable measuring instruments acceptable to the ENGINEER. If dry film thickness is found to be less than specified, or coverage is not uniform, an additional coating to correct thickness or appearance at no additional cost shall be applied.

D. Compatibility:

1. Compatibility of all coatings used shall be required. A compatible coating will be considered a coat, which precludes adverse effects related to bonding, drying delamination, scaling, lifting and bleeding.

2. In cases where shop-applied primers and coatings on materials and equipment furnished by suppliers are products different from those described in the Specifications, compatibility with the specified fieldapplied coating system shall be verified.

3. Where thinning is necessary, only the products of the manufacturer furnishing the coating, and products for thinning purposes only, will be allowed.

E. Thickness and Spreading Rates:

1. Minimum dry mil thickness per coat (MDMTPC) and/or spreading rates in square feet per gallon shall be governed by the manufacturer’s current data sheets or literature containing recommendations or instructions regarding these values. These recommended dry mil thickness and/or spreading rate values will be considered requirements to be met same as if set out herein these Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended coverage rates.

2. The number of coats to be applied are specified herein and shall govern. Where the total dry film thickness is specified, this thickness shall govern over the MDMTPC.

1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Delivery: All materials shall be brought to the job site in the original sealed and labeled containers of the coating manufacturer. All labels shall be legible and intact at time of use.

B. Manufacturer’s Instruction: Coating manufacturer’s written instructions for proper surface preparation, mixing, thinning, application and drying shall be furnished with the coating and strictly followed.

C. Storage of Materials:

1. Store only acceptable materials on project site.

2. Store only in a suitable and designated area restricted to the storage of coating materials and related equipment.

3. Comply with all applicable health and fire regulations regarding the storage of coating materials.

4. Storage of material shall comply with the manufacturer’s specifications; however, storage shall be at a minimum temperature of 50 degrees F.

Special Coatings
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 09800-3 D. Protection of Materials:

1. Take all necessary precautions to ensure the safe storage and use of coating materials and the prompt and safe disposal of waste.

2. Coating wastes shall be properly deposited in containers made for this purpose.

3. Take all necessary precautions to protect coating materials before, during and after application and to protect the finished work.

E. Replacement: In the event of damage to coating materials, immediately make all replacements necessary to the approval of the ENGINEER and at no additional cost.

F. Product delivery, handling and storage shall be in accordance with Part 1 of this Section and the manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.8 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be applied.

2. Do not apply finish in areas where dust and/or mist is being generated.

B. Climatic Conditions: Coating shall not be applied if:

1. The ambient temperature or temperature of the surface to be coated is below 50 degrees F or below the temperature recommended by the coating manufacturer.

2. The relative humidity is above 85 percent.

3. The relative humidity is such that the coating will not dry properly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Protection:

1. Protect with drop cloths, masking or other acceptable means all surfaces which could be damaged in function or appearance by coating, including surfaces not being coated concurrently and surfaces not to be coated.

2. Hardware, accessories, fixtures and similar items shall be removed and replaced after completion of coating.

3. Spray coating will not be permitted when it will cause damage to adjacent or otherwise located surfaces.

4. All coating splatters on glass shall be wiped off immediately.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS

2.1 COATING SYSTEMS FOR STEEL - STRUCTURAL, TANKS, PIPE AND EQUIPMENT A. Exterior Exposed:

1. System Type: Epoxy/Polyurethane.

2. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 6.

3. Primer: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.

4. Intermediate Coat: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

5. Finish Coat: Series 1075 Endura-Shield II; 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT.

6. Total DFT: 9.5 to 14.5 mils.

Special Coatings
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 09800-4 B. Interior Exposed:

1. System Type: Epoxy.

2. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 6.

3. Primer: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.

4. Finish Coat: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

5. Total DFT: 7.0 to 11.0 mils.

C. Immersion:

1. System Type: Epoxy.

2. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 10.

3. Primer: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.

4. Intermediate Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

5. Finish Coat: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

6. Total DFT: 11.0 to 16.0 mils.

D. Interior/Immersion, Severe Exposure to H2S:

1. System Type: Modified Epoxy.

2. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 5 with minimum 3.0-mil profile.

3. Primer/Finish (One or More Coats): Series 435 Perma-Glaze; 30.0 to 36.0 mils DFT.

4. Total DFT: 30.0 to 36.0 mils.

E. Marginally Prepared Surfaces (Maintenance, Non-Immersion, Interior):

1. System Type: Epoxy.

2. Surface Preparation: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Primer: Series 135 Chembuild; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

4. Finish Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

6. Total DFT: 8.0 to 12.0 mils.

F. Marginally Prepared Surfaces (Maintenance, Non-Immersion, Exterior):

1. System Type: Epoxy/Polyurethane.

2. Surface Preparation: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Primer: Series 135 Chembuild; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

4. Finish Coat (Exterior): Series 1075 Endura-Shield II; 2.5 to 3.5 mils. DFT

5. Total DFT: 6.5 to 9.5 mils.

2.2 COATING SYSTEMS FOR FACTORY PRIMED STEEL - DOORS, FRAMES, AND

MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
A. Interior Exposed:

1. System Type: Epoxy

2. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry.

3. Primer: Factory primed.

4. Field Primer: Series 135 Chembuild; 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.

Special Coatings
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 09800-5

5. Finish Coat: Series 1075 Endura-Shield II; 2.5 to 3.5 mils. DFT

6. Total DFT: 5.5 to 8.5 mils (on top of shop primer).

B. Exterior Exposed:

1. System Type: Epoxy/Polyurethane

2. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry.

3. Primer: Factory primed.

4. Field Primer: Series 135 Chembuild; 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.

5. Finish Coat: Series 1075 Endura-Shield II; 2.5 to 3.5 mils. DFT

6. Total DFT: 5.5 to 8.5 mils (on top of shop primer).

2.3 COATING SYSTEMS FOR GALVANIZED STEEL AND NONFERROUS METAL - PIPE AND

MISCELLANEOUS FABRICATIONS
A. Interior Exposure:

1. System Type: Epoxy.

2. Surface Preparation: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Primer: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

4. Finish Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

6. Total DFT: 8.0 to 12.0 mils.

B. Exterior Exposure:

1. System Type: Epoxy/Polyurethane.

2. Surface Preparation: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Primer: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

4. Finish Coat: Series 1075 Endura-Shield II; 2.5 to 3.5 mils. DFT

5. Total DFT: 6.5 to 9.5 mils

2.4 COATING SYSTEMS FOR DUCTILE OR CAST IRON - PIPE, PUMPS, AND VALVES A. Interior/Exterior Exposure:

1. System Type: Epoxy/Polyurethane

2. Surface Preparation: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions

3. Primer: Factory Primed

4. Field Primer: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.L69 for Low VOC

5. Finish Coat: Series 1075 Endura-Shield II; 2.5 to 3.5 mils. DFT 1095 for Low VOC

6. Total DFT: 5.5 to 8.5 mils (on top of shop primer).

C. Below Ground:

1. System Type: Coal Tar Epoxy.

2. Surface Preparation: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Prime/Finish Coat:
a. Sherwin-Williams Targuard Coal Tar Epoxy; 16-32 mils DFT. 100 for Low VOC b. Series 46H-413 Hi-Build Tneme-Tar; 14.0 to 20.0 mils DFT. Series 27 WB Typoxy for Low VOC Special Coatings
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 09800-6

4. Total DFT: 14.0 to 20.0 mils
D. Immersion:

1. System Type: Epoxy.

2. Surface Preparation: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Primer: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

4. Finish Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

5. Total DFT: 8.0 to 12.0 mils

2.5 COATING SYSTEMS FOR PVC
A. Interior Exposure:

1. System Type: Epoxy.

2. Surface Preparation: Scarify

3. Primer: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

4. Finish Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

5. Total DFT: 8.0 to 12.0 mils.

B. Exterior Exposure:

1. System Type: Epoxy/Polyurethane.

2. Surface Preparation: Scarify.

3. Primer: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

4. Finish Coat: Series 1075 Endura-Shield II; 2.5 to 3.5 mils. DFT.

5. Coating provided shall contain UV inhibitor.

2.6 COATING SYSTEMS FOR PRECAST CONCRETE AND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (REQUIRE WHERE INDICATED IN PLANS)
A. Exterior Exposed:

1. System Type: Acrylic.

2. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 13/NACE 6. Clean and dry.

3. Primer: Series 180 W.B. Tneme-Crete; 4.0 to 8.0 mils DFT.

4. Finish Coat: Series 180 W.B. Tneme-Crete; 4.0 to 8.0 mils DFT.

5. Total DFT: 8.0 to 16.0 mils.

B. Below Grade:

1. System Type: Coal tar.

2. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 13/NACE 6. Clean and dry.

3. Primer: 46-465 H.B. Tnemecol. DFT 8.0 to 12.0 mils.

4. Finish Coat: 46-465 H.B. Tnemecol. DFT 8.0 to 12.0 mils.

5. Total DFT: 16.0 to 24.0 mils.

Special Coatings
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 09800-7 C. Interior Exposed:

1. System Type: Epoxy.

2. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 13/NACE 6. Abrasive Blast Cleaning.

3. Patching: Series 218 MortarClad (as needed)

4. Primer: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

5. Finish Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

6. Total DFT: 8.0 to 12.0 mils.

D. Severe Service – Immersion, H2S Exposure:

1. System I (H2S less than 50 ppm, Light Abrasion)
a. System Type: Modified Epoxy.
b. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 13/NACE 6. Abrasive blast clean to texture of 50 to 60 grit sandpaper.
c. Surfacing and Patching: Series 218 MortarClad; 1/16 inch DFT (nominal 62.5 mils) d. Primer/Finish (One or More Coats): Series 435 Perma-Glaze; 20.0 to 30.0 mils DFT

2. System II (H2S less than 100 ppm, Moderate to Heavy Abrasion) a. System Type: Modified Epoxy Mortar.
b. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 13/NACE 6. Abrasive blast clean to texture of 50 to 60 grit sandpaper.
c. Patching: Series 218 MortarClad; As Needed
d. Series 434 Perma-Shield H2S; 1/8 inch DFT (nominal 125 mils)

3. System III (H2S more than 100 ppm, Moderate to Heavy Abrasion) a. System Type: Modified Epoxy Mortar.
b. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 13/NACE 6. Abrasive blast clean to texture of 50 to 60 grit sandpaper.
c. Patching: Series 218 MortarClad; As Needed
d. Series 434 Perma-Shield H2S; 1/8 inch DFT (nominal 125 mils) e. Finish (One or More Coats): Series 435 Perma-Glaze; 20.0 to 30.0 mils DFT

2.7 COATING SYSTEMS FOR POROUS CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
(REQUIRE WHERE INDICATED IN PLANS)
A. Exterior Exposed:

1. System Type: Acrylic.

2. Surface Preparation: Porous Concrete Masonry Units: SSPC-SP 13/NACE 6. Clean and dry

3. Water Repellent: (Tnemec /Chemprobe) Series 617 Prime A Pell H20

4. Primer: Series 180 W.B. Tneme-Crete; 4.0 to 8.0 mils DFT.

5. Finish Coat: Series 180 W.B. Tneme-Crete; 4.0 to 8.0 mils DFT.

6. Total DFT: 8.0 to 16.0 mils.

B. Interior Exposed:

1. System Type: Epoxy.

2. Primer: Series 54-660 Masonry Filler. Spreading rate 75 to 100 sq ft/gal.

3. Primer: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

4. Finish Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

5. Total DFT: 8.0 to 12.0 mils (on top of block filler).

Special Coatings
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 09800-8

2.8 COATING SYSTEMS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD
A. Interior Exposed:

1. System Type: Vinyl-acrylic/Epoxy.

2. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry.

3. Primer: Series 151-1051 Elasto-Grip FC; 1.0 to 2.0 mils DFT.

4. Primer: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

5. Finish Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.

6. Total DFT: 8.0 to 12.0 mils
PART 3 -- EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive coating for conditions that will adversely affect application, permanence or quality of work and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through surface preparation.

B. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating application until conditions are suitable.

3.2 ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACES
A. The commencement of coating work in any area or space will be construed as acceptance of the surface as being satisfactory.

3.3 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION
A. Preparation and application shall be in accordance with coating systems (Article 2.1).

3.4 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Protect all coated surfaces against damage until the date of final acceptance.

B. Conduct a final inspection of all coating work and recoat or retouch any areas or surfaces found deficient in complying with these Specifications.

3.5 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. All visible piping ¾-inch and greater which is accessible for maintenance and operations shall be color-coded and identified with appropriate identification markers. Direction of flow arrows are to be included with each identification mark unless otherwise specified.

B. Each marker shall be black lettering on a yellow or white background and have a clearly printed legend to identify the contents of the pipe.

C. Locations for pipe markers to be as follows:

1. Adjacent to each valve (except as plumbing fixtures and equipment).

2. At each branch and riser take-off.

3. At each pipe passage through wall, floor and ceiling construction.

4. At each pipe passage to underground

5. On all horizontal pipe runs, marked every 30 feet.

Special Coatings
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 09800-9

3.6 PIPE COLOR CODE
Process or Fluid Description Color Tnemec Color #
Potable Water Dark Blue 11SF
Raw Sewage Dark Gray 33GR
Secondary/ Centrate Light Grey 31GR
Tertiary/Reclaimed Purple (Pantone) 14SF
Sludge Dark Brown 84BR
Backwash Waste Light Brown 68BR
Compressed Air Dark Green 91GN
Fire Protection Red 06SF
Foul Air White 11WH
Chlorine (Gas or Solution) Yellow 02SF
Polymer or Coagulant Aid Orange 04SF
- END OF SECTION -
Painting
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 09900-1 SECTION 09900

PAINTING
PART 1 -- GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required to do all painting (excluding items listed in Section 09800 - Special Coatings), including preparation, priming and protection of finished surfaces. An extensive and comprehensive painting job will be required and shall include all surfaces which normally are painted.

B. The intent of these Specifications is to obtain the material and workmanship necessary to produce an adequate and acceptable job, and is intended to describe the requirements for both shop and field painting.

C. The intent of this Specification Section is to include all items which are to receive painting and have not been included in Section 09800 – Special Coatings.

D. The intent of this Specification Section and Section 09800 – Special Coatings shall be to paint all exposed structural steel, miscellaneous ferrous metal, lintels, equipment, piping, all exterior masonry walls and all other work obviously required or noted to be painted unless otherwise specified (see also Article 2.01). The omission of minor items in the schedule of work shall not relieve the obligation to include such items where they come within the general intent of the Specifications as stated herein. All interior surfaces and equipment which have been previously painted shall be repainted or recoated following the proper surface preparation as shown on the Drawings.

E. Review and examine all Divisions and Sections of these Specifications for any additional painting requirements and/or additional surfaces or items to be painted.

F. Apply specified finish coats of paint to all pre-primed work and complete finishing system for unprimed work required to be painted.

G. Backprime, with specified interior first coat material all surfaces of finish trim which will be concealed after installation.

H. Apply specified finish coats of paint to all prepainted surfaces which require only a finish coat. Otherwise, the complete system (as given in Article 2.01) shall be administered.

1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 – General Requirements

2. Division 05 – Metals

3. Section 07920 – Caulking and Sealants
B. Wherever detailed painting requirements are covered under an equipment or product specification, the Specifications herein and Section 09800 – Special Coatings govern with respect to surface preparation, paint materials, coats, thicknesses and coverage.

1.3 ITEMS NOT REQUIRING FIELD PAINTING
A. All new galvanized and stainless steel surfaces (except where noted on Drawings).

B. Exposed PVC plastic piping (except as required for color coding).

Painting
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 09900-2 C. Valves, fittings and appurtenances in small diameter plastic piping (less than 3 inches).

D. Prefinished items.

E. Plain copper (except as required for color coding) and stainless steel.

F. Aluminum except where otherwise designated and required to prevent corrosion at contact with dissimilar materials.

G. Concrete floors except where noted.

H. Exterior concrete surfaces except where noted.

I. Finish hardware.

J. Concealed from view items (except where required for color coding) and surfaces, except as specified herein or where previously painted.

K. Packing glands and other adjustable parts and nameplates of mechanical equipment.

L. Mechanical equipment (i.e. pumps, blowers, actuators, etc.)

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. The term “paint” as used herein includes enamels, epoxy, paints, sealers, fillers, emulsions and other coatings.

B. MDMTPC = Minimum dry mil thickness per coat.

C. MDFT = Minimum dry film thickness.

D. SSPC = Steel Structures Painting Council.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of Painters: All painting shall be done by qualified, skilled, experienced craftsmen. In the acceptance or rejection of completed painting, no allowance will be made for lack of skills on the part of the craftsmen.

B. Paint Labels: Labels on paint containers shall include the following:

1. Manufacturer's name

2. Generic type of paint

3. Manufacturer's stock number

4. Color

5. Instructions for thinning where applicable
C. Field Quality Control: Paint film thickness shall be subject to measurement by electrometer, wet film gauge, low or high voltage meter, and/or ENGINEER approved measuring instruments. If dry film thickness is found to be less than specified, or coverage is not uniform, apply additional paint to correct the thickness or appearance at no additional.

D. Compatibility:

1. Compatibility of all paints used is required. A compatible paint will be considered a paint which precludes adverse effects related to bonding, drying delamination, scaling, lifting and bleeding.

Painting
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 09900-3

2. In cases where shop-applied primers and coatings on materials and equipment furnished by suppliers are products different from those described in the Specifications, compatibility shall verified with the specified field-applied coating system.

3. Where thinning is necessary, only the products of the manufacturer furnishing the paint, and products for thinning purposes only, will be allowed.

E. Thickness and Spreading Rates:

1. Minimum dry mil thicknesses per coat (MDMTPC) and/or spreading rates in square feet per gallon shall be governed by the manufacturer's current data sheets or literature containing recommendations or instructions regarding these values. These recommended dry mil thickness and/or spreading rate values will be considered requirements to be met same as if set out herein these Specifications and Contract Documents. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended coverage rates.

2. The number of coats to be applied are specified herein and shall govern. Where the total dry film thickness is specified, this thickness shall govern over the MDMTPC.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Delivery: All materials shall be brought to the project site in the original sealed and labeled containers of the paint manufacturer. All labels shall be legible and intact at time of use.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Paint manufacturer's written instructions for proper surface preparation, mixing, thinning, application and drying shall be furnished with the paint, and strictly followed.

C. Storage of Materials:

1. Store only acceptable materials on project site.

2. Store only in a suitable and designated area restricted to the storage of paint materials and related equipment.

3. Comply with all applicable health and fire regulations regarding the storage of paint materials.

4. Storage of material shall comply with the manufacturer's specifications; however, storage shall be at a minimum temperature of 50 degrees F.

D. Protection of Materials:

1. Take all necessary precautions to ensure the safe storage and use of paint materials and the prompt and safe disposal of waste.

2. Painting wastes shall be properly deposited in containers made for this purpose. Do not use plumbing fixtures for disposing of paints wastes.

3. Take all necessary precautions to protect paint materials before, during and after application and to protect the finished work.

E. Replacement: In the event of damage to paint materials, immediately make all replacements necessary at no additional cost.

F. Product delivery, handling and storage shall be in accordance with Part 1 of this Specification.

1.7 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to the environmental conditions under which painting systems can be applied.

2. Do not apply finish in areas where dust and/or mist is being generated.

Painting
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 09900-4 B. Climatic Conditions: Paint shall not be applied if:

1. The ambient temperature or temperature of the surface to be painted is below 50 degrees F or below the temperature recommended by the paint manufacturer.

2. The relative humidity is above 85 percent.

3. The relative humidity is such that the paint will not dry properly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

C. Projection:

1. Protect with drop cloths, masking or other acceptable means all surfaces which could be damaged in function or appearance by paint, including surfaces not being painted concurrently and surfaces not to be painted.

2. Hardware, accessories, fixtures and similar items shall be removed and replaced after completion of painting.

3. Spray painting will not be permitted when it will cause damage to adjacent of otherwise located surfaces.

4. All paint splatters on glass shall be wiped off immediately.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT SYSTEMS
A. General:

1. All paints of a system shall be by one (1) manufacturer.

2. "Lift" tests may be requested on various surfaces to be painted to assure bonding compatibility.

3. Paints containing lead, or other "dangerous" materials, that surpass federal maximum levels shall not be allowed. Oil shall be pure boiled linseed oil.

2.2 COLORS
A. The manufacturer shall be able to furnish all paints for exposed surfaces in a wide range of colors including lighter and darker shades of these colors which may be selected on various surfaces, if not included in the following codes (also note, the below listed may be included in the requirements of Section 09800 – Special Coatings):

1. Safety Color Codes: Comply with Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards, as applicable, regarding safety color codes.

2. Piping Color Codes: Colors for process pipe coding shall be as specified in Section 09800 – Special Coatings.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and/or coating finishes for conditions that will adversely affect application, permanence or quality of work and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through surface preparation.

B. Do not proceed with surface preparation or painting application until conditions are suitable.

Painting
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 09900-5 C. If surfaces are not thoroughly dry or if they cannot be put in proper conditions to receive paint by customary cleaning methods, the painting applicators shall notify the ENGINEER in writing, requesting necessary corrections.

D. Review the specified or approved painting systems and bring any questions or doubts as to the proper performance to the ENGINEER. Otherwise, assume the responsibility for providing the desired results.

3.2 ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACES
A. The commencement of painting work in any area or space will be construed as acceptance of the surface as being satisfactory.

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General:

1. All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and free of dust, rust, mill scale, loose paint or oily materials.

2. References to SSPC refer to Steel Structures Painting Council specifications.

3. Surfaces shall be primed and/or treated, as specified, as soon after completion of surface preparation as practical, but in any event before any visible or detrimental corrosion or contamination can occur. A prepared surface, which becomes corroded or contaminated, shall be re-prepared before treating and/or priming.

B. Non-submerged Non-Galvanized Structural Steel: All new non-galvanized structural steel for nonsubmerged service shall have their surfaces prepared according to SSPC-SP6-63, Commercial Blast Cleaning.

C. Submerged Non-Galvanized Structural Steel: All new non-galvanized structural steel and fabricated metals for submerged service of high temperature service shall have their surfaces prepared according to SSPCSP10-63T Near White Metal Blast Cleaning.

D. Unprimed Metal Surfaces: All unprimed metal surfaces and miscellaneous fabricated metals (exclusive of structural steel and galvanized metal) to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned according to SSPC-SP2-63 Hand Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP3-63 Power Tool Cleaning, unless specifically required elsewhere in these Specifications.

E. Non-Ferrous Metals: Non-ferrous metals surface preparation shall be not less than that required by the paint manufacturer.

F. Concrete and Masonry:

1. All concrete and masonry surfaces shall be cleaned and free from loose particles.

2. Concrete floors to be painted shall be etched with a 10 percent solution of muriatic acid. If the concrete surface is exceedingly dense, a greater strength acid or a second etching will be required. After etching for a minimum of 30 minutes, wash thoroughly with water to remove all traces of acid. Allow to thoroughly dry at least 72 hours.

3. Submerged concrete to be coated shall have their surfaces prepared by a light sandblast (Brush Blast), to remove loose coating and provide a textured surface to enhance adherence of the new coating. No sandblasting shall be done on the job in areas containing pumps, motors or other equipment that could be damaged by infiltration of sand particles.

G. Wood Surfaces: Wood surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all extraneous matter and all cracks, nail holes, and other defects properly filled and smoothes. Wood trim shall be sanded to fine finish and wiped clean of dust.

Painting
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 09900-6

3.4 SHOP PRIMING
A. The requirements Specification Section 09800 will govern over this Specification Section requirements.

B. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the equipment manufacturer to be compatible with the finish paints to be used.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate all paint materials supplied in the shop and field.

3.5 APPLICATION
A. On metal surfaces apply each coat of paint at the rate specified by the manufacturer to achieve the minimum dry mill thickness required. One gallon of paint as originally furnished by the manufacturer shall not cover a greater area when applied by spry gun than when applied unthinned by brush. Deficiencies of film thickness shall be corrected.

B. On masonry, the application rates will vary according to surface texture; however, in no case shall the manufacturer's stated coverage rate be exceeded.

C. On porous surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility to achieve a protective and decorative finish either by decreasing the coverage rate of by applying additional coats of paint.

D. Evenly brush out each finish coat and permit to dry per manufacturer's recommendation before applying any subsequent coats.

E. All paints and catalogs shall be maintained at a minimum manufacturer's application temperature before applying.

F. Successive coats of paint shall be tinted so as to make each coat easily distinguishable from each other with the final undercoat tinted to a darker shade than the finish coat.

G. Finish surfaces shall not show brush marks or other irregularities. Undercoats shall be thoroughly and uniformly sanded with No. 00 sandpaper or equal to remove defects and provide a smooth even surface.

H. Painting shall be continuous and shall be accomplished in an orderly manner so as to facilitate inspection.

Materials subject to weathering shall be prime coated as quickly as possible. Surfaces of exposed members that will be inaccessible after erection shall be cleaned and painted before erection.

I. All surfaces to be painted as well as the atmosphere in which painting is to be done shall be maintained at the conditions recommended by manufacturer by heating and ventilating, if necessary, until each coat of paint has hardened. Any defective paint shall be removed and the surface repainted.

J. Perform all required back priming work before items are installed.

3.6 REINSTALLATION OF REMOVED ITEMS
A. Following completion of painting in each space, promptly reinstall all items removed for painting, using only workmen skilled in the particular trade.

3.7 CLEANING
A. During the progress of Work, do not allow the accumulation of empty containers or other excess items except in areas specifically reserved for that purpose.

B. Take all precautions to prevent accidental spillage of paint materials. In the event of spilling, immediately remove all spilled materials and the waste and other equipment used to clean up the spill, and wash surfaces to their original undamaged condition.

Painting
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 09900-7 C. Touch-up and restore finish where damaged.

D. Remove all trash and accumulated materials of a painting nature from premises at the completion of the Work.

E. Paint spots, oil or stains upon adjacent surfaces shall be removed. Any damage to Work of other trades or equipment caused from painting shall be made good at no additional expense.

F. Do not mar surface finish of items being cleaned.

G. Leave entire job clean (including paint storage space).

3.8 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Protect all painted surfaces against damage until the date of final acceptance of the Work.

B. Conduct a final inspection of all painting work and repaint or retouch any areas or surfaces found deficient in complying with these Specifications.
- END OF SECTION -

SPECIALTIES
DIVISION 10
Louvers
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 10200-1 SECTION 10200

LOUVERS
PART 1 -- GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing wall louvers as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 05120 – Miscellaneous Metals, Fasteners, and Special Finishes

2. Section 07920 – Caulking and Sealants

3. Division 09 – Finishes

4. Section 15500 – Ventilating, Heating, and Air Conditioning

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

B. Indicate all dimension, including rough-in dimensions, and type, gauge or thickness, and shape of all components.

C. Describe type and method of all finishes.

D. Indicate type, size, location and spacing of all fasteners and anchorage.

1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All Work specified herein shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the referenced portions of the following publications to the extent that the provisions thereof are not in conflict with other provisions of these Specifications.

B. Comply with the applicable editions of the following codes, regulations and standards.

1. Industry Standards:

ASTM B 85 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
ASTM B 241 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube
ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
C. Comply with the applicable reference Specifications as directed in the General Requirements.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS

2.1 FIXED WALL LOUVERS
A. 6-inch drainable fixed blade high performance louver with a front lip gutter and a recessed second gutter designed to catch both airborne droplets and cascading water.

Louvers
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 10200-2 B. Heads, sills, jambs and mullions to be one-piece structural members of 6063-T52 alloy 0.125-inch thick, with integral caulking slot and retaining beads.

C. Mullions shall be sliding interlock type with integral internal drains.

D. Drainable blade to be minimum 0.125-inch thick.

E. Closed cell PVC compression gaskets to be provided between bottom of mullion or jab and top of sill to insure leak tight connections.

F. Structure supports to be designed by louver manufacturer to carry a wind load of not less than 20 pounds per square foot.

G. All fasteners to be stainless steel or aluminum.

H. All exterior louvers shall be furnished with insect screens. Insect screens shall be removable 18 x 14 aluminum mesh, 0.0123-inch diameter, 5056 clad, rolled or extruded aluminum with mitered corners and secured with clips to provide a strong neat frame.

I. All louvers to be free of scratches and shall be finished in two-coast fluorocarbon polymeric system, Kynar 500, or equal, color as selected by CITY.

J. All louvers shall be installed with disposable or reusable filter panels/ material per 3M, Permatron, or equal.

Filter materials shall allow for ease in removal and replacement and be placed on the interior side of a building.

K. The static pressure drop, in inches water gage, across the louver as a function of face velocity, in feet per minute, shall not exceed the values tabulated below:

1. Static Pressure Drop-Inches Water Gage
a. Not to Exceed 0.20

2. Face Velocity-Feet per Minute
a. Not to Exceed 525
L. Louvers shall be Ruskin, Greenheck, or approved equal.

2.2 ADJUSTABLE OR STATIONARY LOUVER
A. Fabrication: Sightproof/Mullion style.

1. Manufacturer: Ruskin Company or approved equal.

2. Frame:
a. Frame Depth: 6 inches (152 mm).
b. Material: Aluminum
c. Wall Thickness: 16 gage (1.6 mm), nominal.

3. Blades:
a. Style: Horizontal drainable.
b. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653, HDG G60 CS.
c. Wall Thickness: 18 gage (1.3 mm), nominal.
d. Angle: 37-1/2 degrees.
e. Centers: 4-5/16 inches (110 mm), nominal.
f. Linkage: Concealed in frame.
g. Bearings: Stainless steel sleeve pressed into frame. h. Axles: 1/2 inch (13 mm) plated steel hex.

Louvers
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 10200-3

4. Actuator (where applicable):
a. Manual, locking louver quadrant.
b. Electric, 120 V, 60 Hz, two-position, spring-return.

5. Gutters: Drain gutter in head frame and each blade.

6. Downspouts: Downspouts in jambs to drain water from louver for minimum water cascade from blade to blade.

7. Assembly:
a. Factory assembled louver components. Mechanically fastened construction.

B. Performance Data:

1. Performance Ratings: AMCA licensed.
a. Based on testing 48 inch by 48 inch (1219 mm by 1219 mm) size unit in accordance with AMCA 500.

2. Free Area: 52 percent, nominal.

3. Maximum Recommended Air Flow through Free Area: 1026 feet per minute (313 m/min).

4. Air Flow: Per Plans

5. Maximum Pressure Drop: .10 inches w.g. (24.89 Pa).

6. Water Penetration: Maximum of 0.01 ounces per square foot (3.1 g/sm) of free area at an air flow of 1026 feet per minute (313 m/min) free area velocity when tested for 15 minutes.

2.3 STATIONARY ACOUSTICAL LOUVER
A. Acoustic louvers shall be used on the East and South buildings. Acoustic Louvers shall be per Ruskin, Greenheck, or equal.

B. Design: Louver blades shall be non-drainable type and contained within 6 inches frame. Acoustical blades shall be solid on exterior and perforated material on interior for noise absorption. Blades shall have acoustical insulation fill.

C. Extruded Aluminum Fabrication:

1. Frame:
a. Frame Depth: 6 inches.
b. Wall Thickness: 0.125 inch, nominal.
c. Material: Extruded aluminum Alloy 6063 T6.

2. Blades:
a. Style: Insulated.
b. Interior Wall Thickness: 0.040 inch, nominal.
c. Interior Material: Perforated aluminum, covers insulation. d. Exterior Wall Thickness: 0.081 inch, nominal.
e. Exterior Material: Extruded aluminum Alloy 6063 T6.
f. Blades positioned at 45⁰ angle and spaced approximately 4 5/8 center to center. g. Linkage: Concealed in frame.
h. Bearings: Stainless steel sleeve pressed into frame. i. Axles: ½ inch plated steel hex.

3. Mullion Style – Design incorporates visible mullions or frames at the perimeter of the louver and also at certain intervals within the louver perimeter to support the louver blades. Louver blade sightlines are interrupted at the mullion locations. No rear-mounted blade supports are utilized.

Louvers
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 10200-4 D. Performance Data:

1. Based on testing 48 inch x 48 inch size unit in accordance with AMCA 500.

2. Free Area: 35-42 percent, nominal.

3. Maximum Recommended Air Flow through Free Area: 1019 feet per minute

4. Maximum Pressure Drop (Intake): 0.10 inches w.g.

5. Water Penetration: Maximum of 0.01 ounces per square foot of free area at an air flow of 1019 feet per minute free area velocity when tested for 15 minutes.

E. Sound Data: Tested in accordance with ASTM E 90.

Octave Band
Frequency (Hz)
Free Field Noise
Reduction (db)
1” Fiberglass Insulation
1/63 9
2/125 7
3/250 8
4/500 9
5/1000 10
6/2000 16
7/4000 16
8/8000 19
F. Design Windload: Incorporate structural supports required to withstand wind load as noted on the structural GSN sheets.

G. Louvers shall be factory engineered to withstand the specified seismic loads.

H. Minimum design loads shall be calculated to comply with ASCE – 7, or local requirements of Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Aluminum Filter Racks: Formed channel racks to accept standard thick filters (rigid and reusable polyester filter material – PermaFlo per Permatron). Unused bottom portion blanked off with 0.040 inch aluminum sheet.

B. Filter: 1 inch thick.

C. Bird Screen: Aluminum, 1/2 inches by 0.063 inch, intercrimp. Frame: Removable. Rewireable.

D. Extended Sills:

1. Extruded aluminum, Alloy 6063-T6. Minimum nominal thickness 0.060 inch.

2. Visible Mullions: Manufacturer's standard horizontal or vertical visible mullions for architectural accent as indicated on drawings.

2.5 FINISHES
A. Finish: Epoxy-Based Painted Finish.

B. Color: Color for PVDF Coating: Custom. Refer to Drawings.

Louvers
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 10200-5 PART 3 -- EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Delivered materials shall be in manufacturer’s original unopened and undamaged packages with labels legible and intact. Store materials in unopened packages in a manner to prevent damage from environment and construction operations. Handle in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Louvers shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s approved shop drawings and as detailed on the drawings. All necessary fastenings shall be provided to make a complete installation.

C. Louvers shall be fastened to the supporting member of materials on all four sides, non-removable from outside, with stainless steel fasteners.

D. Observe all necessary precautions to prevent damage to finish. Use stainless steel washers under all fasteners.

E. Upon completion of the louver installation, all louvers shall be cleaned of all dirt and other foreign material.

Louvers shall be touched up as required using the manufacturer’s recommended materials and instructions.

F. Louvers shall be protected from damage from subsequent building operations. - END OF SECTION -
Signage
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 10440-1 SECTION 10440

SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Includes all labor, materials, and equipment required to install room signage as noted on drawings and specified herein. It is the intention of the signage requirement to have one sign at each interior door or room.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and samples in accordance with Section 01300 for all work under this Section.

CONTRACTOR shall submit layouts and schedules of each type of signage.

B. Submit color samples for CITY approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR SIGNAGE
A. Wall Mounted Room Names and Numbers

1. Signage shall be one piece photo etched raised letter borderless glass plaques with radius corners, 4" x 8", laminated to an opaque acrylic 1/8" thick backing.

2. All signs shall have characters on contrasting background (color selected by CITY) and shall meet ADA and ANSI A117.1 Standards for raised letter and braille characters and pictorial symbol signs.

3. Braille to comply with specification #800 National Library Service, National Library of Congress specifications for standard literary braille.

4. Signage shall utilize upper case Palatino style of lettering, black in color.

5. Finish materials shall be durable and stain resistant.

B. Mounting system shall utilize a silastic adhesive mounting system with vinyl foam adhesive tape supplied to hold the sign in place until silastic is fully cured.

C. Room name signage shall be mounted at the exterior side of each door.

1. Refer to Room finish schedule, door schedule, and floor plan for complete listing of rooms.

2. Prior to fabrication, verify room name schedule with CITY.

D. Toilet Room signage shall include pictorial symbol sign for men and women handicap use and be door mounted to comply with ADA requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Install room sign units 4" from the latch side of the door, 5'-0" above finish floor to bottom of sign. Securely mount with adhesive. Attach signs to substrates in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install all signage level, plumb, and at proper heights. Cooperate with other trades for installation of sign units to finish surfaces. Repair or replace damaged units as directed by the CITY. - END OF SECTION -

EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 11
Equipment General Provisions
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11000-1 SECTION 11000

EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. All equipment and appurtenant work, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be provided.

B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all equipment except where otherwise indicated.

C. Equipment Arrangement: Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the arrangement of equipment shown on the Drawings is based upon information available at the time of design and is not intended to show exact dimensions particular to a specific manufacturer in all cases. Some aspects of the Drawings are diagrammatic and some features of the illustrated equipment arrangement may require revision to meet the actual equipment requirements. Structural supports, foundations, piping and valve connections, and electrical and instrumentation connections indicated may have to be altered to accommodate the equipment provided.

1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Equipment shall be in accordance with the following standards, as applicable and as indicated in each equipment specification:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

3. American Society of Mechanical Owners (ASME).

4. American Water Works Association (AWWA).

5. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Owners (ASHRAE).

6. American Welding Society (AWS).

7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

8. Federal Specifications (FS).

9. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

10. Manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications.

11. General Industry Safety Orders (OSHA).

B. The following standards are referenced in this Section:

ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800 ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Steel, Nickel Alloy and other Special Alloys ANSI B46.1 Surface Texture
ANSI S12.6 Method for the Measurement of the Real-Ear Attenuation of Hearing Protectors ASME B1.20.1 General Purpose Pipe Threads (Inch)
ASME B31.1 Power Piping
AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe
AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 in. through 144 in. (100 mm through 3,600 mm)
Equipment General Provisions
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11000-2 ASTM A 48 Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A 108 Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Furnish complete drawings and technical information for equipment, piping, valves and controls. Where indicated or required by the ENGINEER, Shop Drawings shall include clear, concise calculations showing equipment anchorage forces and the capacities of the anchorage elements.

C. Spare Parts List: A list of spare parts for each piece of equipment shall be obtained from the manufacturer and submitted at the same time as Shop Drawings. The name, address and telephone number of the nearest distributor for each piece of equipment shall be furnished. This list shall contain all data necessary to allow the CITY to purchase spare parts as necessary.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection: The local authorities shall be informed to witness all required tests for piping, plumbing, fire protection systems, pressure vessels, safety systems, and related items.

B. Quality and Tolerances: Tolerances and clearances shall be as shown on the Shop Drawings and shall be closely adhered to.

1. Machine work shall in all cases be of high-grade workmanship and finish, with due consideration to the special nature or function of the parts. Members without milled ends and which are to be framed to other steel parts of the structure may have a variation in the detailed length of not greater than 1/16-inch for members 30-feet or less in length, and not greater than 1/8-inch for members over 30-feet in length.

2. Castings shall be homogeneous and free from non-metallic inclusions and defects. Surfaces of castings which are not machined shall be cleaned to remove foundry irregularities. Casting defects not exceeding 12.5 percent of the total thickness and where defects will not affect the strength and serviceability of the casting may be repaired by approved welding procedures. If the removal of metal for repair reduces the stress-resisting cross-section of the casting by more than 25 percent or to such an extent that the computed stress in the remaining metal exceeds the allowable stress by more than 25 percent, then the casting may be rejected.

3. All materials shall meet the physical and mechanical properties in accordance with the reference standards.

C. Machine Finish: The type of finish shall be the most suitable for the application and shall be shown in microinches in accordance with ANSI B46.1. The following finishes shall be used:

1. Surface roughness not greater than 63 micro-inches shall be required for all surfaces in sliding contact.

2. Surface roughness not greater than 250 micro-inches shall be required for surfaces in contact where a tight joint is not required.

3. Rough finish not greater than 500 micro-inches shall be required for other machined surfaces.

4. Contact surfaces of shafts and stems which pass through stuffing boxes and contact surfaces of bearings shall be finished to not greater than 32 micro-inches.

1.5 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS
A. Spare parts shall be furnished as indicated in the individual equipment sections. All spare parts shall be suitably packaged in the original manufacturer's box and labeled clearly with equipment numbers and name tags attached to the box.

B. Special tools shall be suitably packaged and clearly labeled and directions shall be provided for intended use.

Equipment General Provisions
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11000-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Noise Level: When in operation, no single piece of equipment shall exceed the OSHA noise level requirement of 105 dBA for one-hour exposure per day without sound enclosure or sound dampening devices.

B. High Noise Level Location: One personal hearing protection station at each high noise level location shall be provided. Locations are defined as follows:

1. Outdoor Location: Any single equipment item or any group of equipment items that produce noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for a 2-hour exposure. Where such equipment is separated by a distance of more than 20 feet, measured between edges of footings, each group of equipment shall be provided with a separate hearing protection station.

2. Indoor Location
a. Any single equipment item or any group of equipment items located within a single room not normally occupied, that produces noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for a 2-hour exposure.
b. Any single equipment item or any group of equipment items located within a single room normally occupied by workers, that produces noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for an 8-hour exposure.

C. Personal Hearing Protection: Three pairs of high attenuation hearing protectors in the original unopened packaging shall be provided. The ear protectors shall be capable of meeting the requirements of ANSI S12.6 and shall produce a noise level reduction of 25 dBA at a frequency of 500 Hz. The hearing protectors shall have ear cushions and a variable, padded headband.

D. Drive Trains and Service Factors: Service factors shall be applied in the selection or design of mechanical power transmission components. All components of drive train assemblies between the prime mover and the driven equipment shall be designed and rated to deliver the maximum peak or starting torque, speed, and horsepower. All of the applicable service factors shall be considered, such as mechanical (type of prime mover), load class, start frequency, ventilation, ambient temperature and fan factors. Drive train components include couplings, shafts, gears and gear drives, drive chains, sprockets and V-belt drives. Unless otherwise indicated, the following load classifications shall apply in determining service factors:

Type of Equipment Service Factor Load Classification
Reciprocating Air Compressors:

Multi-Cylinder
Single-Cylinder

2.0 2.0
Heavy Shock
Heavy Shock
Pumps:

Centrifugal or Rotary
Reciprocating

1.0 1.8
Uniform
Moderate Shock
Cranes or Hoists 1.25 Moderate Shock
E. Mechanical Service Factors:

Electric Motor Internal Combustion Engine
Uniform 1.25 1.50
Moderate Shock 1.50 1.75
Heavy Shock 2.00 2.25
Equipment General Provisions
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11000-4 F. For thermal rating adjustments such as start frequency, ambient temperature, and hourly duty cycle factor, ventilation factor, and fan factor, refer to gear manufacturer sizing information.

G. For service factors of electric motors, see Section 16150 – Induction Motors.

H. Where load classifications are not indicated, service factors based on AGMA 514.02 shall be used for standard load classifications and service factors for flexible couplings, I. Welding: Unless otherwise indicated, welding shall conform to the following:

1. Latest revision of AWWA D100.

2. Latest revision of AWWA C206.

3. Composite fabricated steel assemblies that are to be erected or installed inside a hydraulic structure, including any fixed or movable structural components of mechanical equipment, shall have continuous seal welds to prevent entrance of air or moisture.

4. Welding shall be by the metal-arc method or gas-shielded arc method as described in the American Welding Society's "Welding Handbook" as supplemented by other pertinent standards of the AWS.

Qualification of welders shall be in accordance with the AWS Standards.

5. In assembly and during welding, the component parts shall be adequately clamped, supported, and restrained to minimize distortion and for control of dimensions. Weld reinforcement shall be as specified by the AWS code. Upon completion of welding, weld splatter, flux, slag and burrs left by attachments shall be removed. Welds shall be repaired to produce a workmanlike appearance, with uniform weld contours and dimensions. Sharp corners of material that is to be painted or coated shall be ground to a minimum of 1/32-inch on the flat.

J. Protective Coating: Equipment shall be painted or coated in accordance with Section 09800 - Special Coatings and Section 09900 - Painting, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Identification of Equipment Items: Each item of equipment shipped shall have a legible identifying mark corresponding to the equipment number for the particular item.

L. Vibration Isolators: Air compressors, blowers, engines, inline fans shall be provided with restrained springtype vibration isolators or pads per manufacturer's written recommendations.

M. Shop Fabrication: Shop fabrication shall be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the Shop Drawings.

N. Controls: Equipment and system controls shall be in accordance with Division 17 - Instrumentation.

2.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND FOUNDATIONS
A. Equipment Supports: Unless otherwise indicated, equipment supports, anchors, and restrainers shall be adequately designed for static, dynamic, wind, and seismic loads. The design horizontal seismic force shall be the greater of: that noted in the general structural notes or as required by the governing building code, or 10 percent of gravity. Submitted design calculations for equipment supports shall bear the signature and seal of an engineer registered in the State wherein the project is to be built, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Equipment Foundations: Mechanical equipment, tanks, control cabinets, enclosures, and related equipment shall be mounted on minimum 3.5-inch high concrete bases, where indicated. Equipment foundations are indicated on Drawings. The size and weight of equipment foundation to insure compatibility with equipment shall be verified through the equipment manufacturer.

Equipment General Provisions
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11000-5

2.3 COUPLINGS
A. Mechanical couplings shall be provided between the driver and the driven equipment. Flexible couplings shall be provided between the driver and the driven equipment to accommodate slight angular misalignment, parallel misalignment, end float, and to cushion shock loads. Unless otherwise indicated or recommended by the equipment manufacturer, coupling type shall be furnished with the respective equipment as follows:

Equipment Type Coupling Type
Air Compressors / Air Blowers Belt, gear or flexible disc pack B. Each coupling size shall be determined based on the rated horsepower of the motor, speed of the shaft, and the load classification service factor. The equipment manufacturer shall select or recommend the size and type of coupling required to suit each specific application.

C. Differential Settlement: Where differential settlement between the driver and the driven equipment may occur, 2 sets of universal type couplings shall be provided.

D. Taper-Lock or equal bushings may be used to provide for easy installation and removal of shafts of various diameters.

2.4 SHAFTING
A. General: Shafting shall be continuous between bearings and shall be sized to transmit the power required.

Keyways shall be accurately cut in line. Shafting shall not be turned down at the ends to accommodate bearings or sprockets whose bore is less than the diameter of the shaft. Shafts shall rotate in the end bearings and shall be turned and polished, straight, and true.

B. Design Criteria: All shafts shall be designed to carry the steady state and transient loads suitable for unlimited number of load applications, in accordance with ASME B106.1M, - Design of Transmission Shafting.

Where shafts are subjected to fatigue stresses, such as frequent start and stop cycles, the mean stress shall be determined by using the modified Goodman Diagram. The maximum torsional stress shall not exceed the endurance limit of the shaft after application of the factor of safety of 2 in the endurance limit and the stress concentration factor of the fillets in the shaft and keyway. Stress concentration factor shall be in accordance with ASME Standard B17.1 - Keys and Keyseats.

C. Materials: Shafting materials shall be appropriate for the type of service and torque transmitted.

Environmental elements such as corrosive gases, moisture and fluids shall be taken into consideration.

Materials shall be as indicated unless furnished as part of an equipment assembly.

1. Low carbon cold-rolled steel shafting shall conform to ASTM A 108, Grade 1018.

2. Medium carbon cold-rolled shafting shall conform to ASTM A 108, Grade 1045.

3. Other grades of carbon steel alloys shall be suitable for service and load.

4. Corrosion-resistant shafting shall be stainless steel or Monel, whichever is most suitable for the intended service.

D. Differential Settlement: Where differential settlement between the driver and the driven equipment may occur, a shaft of sufficient length with 2 sets of universal type couplings shall be provided.

2.5 V-BELT DRIVES
A. V-belts and sheaves shall be of the best commercial grade and shall conform to ANSI, MPTA, and RMA Standards.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, sheaves shall be machined from the finest quality gray cast iron.

Equipment General Provisions
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11000-6 C. Sheaves shall be statically balanced. In some applications where vibration is a problem, sheaves shall be dynamically balanced. Sheaves operating at belt speeds exceeding 6,500 fpm may be required to be of special materials and construction.

D. Finish bored sheaves shall be complete with keyseat and setscrews.

E. Sliding motor bases or auto-tension, spring suspension shall be provided to adjust the tension of V-belts.

2.6 DRIVE GUARDS
A. Power transmission trains, prime movers, machines, shaft extensions, and moving machine parts shall be guarded to conform with the Division of Industrial Safety General Industrial Safety Orders latest edition. The guards shall be constructed of minimum 10 gage expanded, flattened steel with smooth edges and corners, galvanized after fabrication, and securely fastened. Where required for lubrication or maintenance, guards shall have hinged and latched access doors.

2.7 BEARINGS
A. General: Bearings shall conform to the standards of the Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (AFBMA).

B. To assure satisfactory bearing application, fitting practice, mounting, lubrication, sealing, static rating, housing strength, and lubrication shall be considered in bearing selection.

C. Re-lubricatable type bearings shall be equipped with a hydraulic grease fitting in an accessible location and shall have sufficient grease capacity in the bearing chamber.

D. Lubricated-for-life bearings shall be factory-lubricated with the manufacturer's recommended grease to insure maximum bearing life and best performance.

E. Anti-Friction Type Bearing Life: Except where otherwise indicated, bearings shall have a minimum L-10 life expectancy of 5 years or 20,000 hours, whichever occurs first. Where so indicated, bearings shall have a minimum rated L-10 life expectancy corresponding to the type of service, as follows:

Type of Service Design Life
(years)
L-10 Design Life
(hours)
(whichever comes first)
8-hour shift 10 20,000
16-hour shift 10 40,000
Continuous 10 60,000
F. Bearing housings shall be of cast iron or steel and bearing mounting arrangement shall be as indicated or as recommended in the published standards of the manufacturer. Split-type housings may be used to facilitate installation, inspection, and disassembly.

G. Sleeve Type Bearings: Sleeve-type bearings shall have a cast iron or ductile iron housing and Babbitt or bronze liner. Bearing housing shall be bolted and doweled to the lower casing half. These housings shall be provided with cast iron caps bolted in place and the bearing end caps shall be bored to receive the bearing shells. Sleeve bearings shall be designed on the basis of the maximum allowable load permitted by the bearing manufacturer. If the sleeve bearing is connected to an equipment shaft with a coupling, the coupling transmitted thrust will be assumed to be the maximum motor or equipment thrust. Lubricant, lubrication system, and cooling system shall be as recommended by the bearing manufacturer.

Equipment General Provisions
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11000-7 H. Plate Thrust Bearings: Thrust bearings shall be the Kingsbury Type, designed and manufactured to maintain the shaft in the fixed axial position without undue heating or the necessity of adjustment or attention. Bearings shall be oil lubricated to suit the manufacturer's standard method of lubrication for the specific bearing. If bearing cooling is required, manufacturer shall provide necessary piping, filters, and valves.

2.8 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Guides: Pipe connections to equipment shall be supported, anchored, and guided to avoid stresses and loads on equipment flanges and equipment. Supports and hangers shall be in accordance with Section 15006 - Pipe Supports.

B. Flanges and Pipe Threads: Flanges on equipment and appurtenances shall conform to ANSI B16.1, Class 125, or B16.5, Class 150, unless otherwise indicated. Pipe threads shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 and Section 15000 - Piping, General.

C. Flexible Connectors: Flexible connectors shall be installed in all piping connections to engines, blowers, compressors, and other vibrating equipment and in piping systems in accordance with the requirements of Section 15000 – Piping, General. Flexible connectors shall be harnessed or otherwise anchored to prevent separation of the pipe where required by the installation.

D. Insulating Connections: Insulating bushings, unions, couplings, or flanges, as appropriate, shall be used in accordance with the requirements of the Section 15000.

2.9 GASKETS AND PACKINGS
A. Gaskets shall be in accordance with Section 15000 – Piping, General.

B. Packing around valve stems and reciprocating shafts shall be of compressible material, compatible with the fluid being used. Chevron-type "V" packing shall be Garlock No. 432, John Crane "Everseal," or equal.

C. Packing around rotating shafts (other than valve stems) shall be "O"-rings, stuffing boxes, or mechanical seals, as recommended by the manufacturer, in accordance with Section 11100 - Pumps, General.

2.10 NAMEPLATES
A. Equipment nameplates of stainless steel shall be engraved or stamped and fastened to the equipment in an accessible location with No. 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins. Nameplates shall contain the manufacturer's name, model, serial number, size, characteristics, and appropriate data describing the machine performance ratings.

2.11 EQUIPMENT LUBRICANTS
A. Lubricants for all equipment during storage and prior to initial testing of the equipment shall be installed.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER
A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: Where required by individual sections, an authorized, experienced, and competent service representative of the manufacturer shall visit the Site to witness or perform the following in accordance with Section 01450 – Services of Manufacturer’s Representative and to certify in writing that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, lubricated, adjusted, and readied for operation.

1. Inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment and approving its installation.

2. Startup and field testing for proper operation, efficiency, and capacity.

Equipment General Provisions
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11000-8

3. Performing field adjustments during the test period to ensure that the equipment installation and operation comply with requirements.

4. Instruct plant operating personnel on proper operations, maintenance and care.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations.

B. Alignment: Equipment shall be field tested to verify proper alignment.

3.3 PRE-PACKAGED EQUIPMENT
A. Coordination of all necessary space and structural requirements, clearances, utility connections, signals, and outputs shall be required to avoid later change orders, when any system is furnished as pre-packaged equipment.

3.4 WELDING
A. Welds shall be cleaned of weld-slag, splatter, etc. to provide a smooth surface. Metal brushes shall be the same material as the metal welded. Stainless steel brushes shall be used for cleaning stainless steel welds.

3.5 FIELD TESTS
A. Where indicated by the individual equipment sections, equipment shall be field tested after installation to demonstrate satisfactory operation without excessive noise, vibration, or overheating of bearings or motor.

B. The following field testing shall be conducted:

1. Start equipment, check, and operate the equipment over its entire operating range. Vibration level shall be within the amplitude limits as indicated or as recommended by the reference applicable Standards.

2. Obtain concurrent readings of motor voltage, amperage, capacity, vibration and bearing temperatures.

C. In the event that any equipment fails to meet the test requirements, the equipment shall be modified and retested until it satisfies the requirement.
- END OF SECTION -
Pumps, General
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11100-1 SECTION 11100

PUMPS, GENERAL
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. All pumps and pumping appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be provided.

B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all pumps and pumping equipment except where otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.

C. The requirements of Section 11000 – Equipment General Provisions apply to this Section.

D. Unit Responsibility: The pump manufacturer shall be made responsible for furnishing the equipment and for coordination of design, assembly, testing, and installation of each pump system.

E. Single Manufacturer: Where two or more pump systems of the same type or size are required, the pumps shall all be produced by the same manufacturer.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall contain the following information:

1. Pump name, identification number, and specification Section number.

2. Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, NPSH required, and pump efficiency over the entire operating range of the pump. The equipment manufacturer shall indicate separately the head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and minimum submergence required at the design flow conditions and the maximum and minimum flow conditions. Performance curves at intervals of 5 Hz from minimum speed to maximum speed shall be furnished for each centrifugal pump equipped with a variable speed drive.

3. The manufacturer shall be required to indicate the limits on the performance curves recommended for stable operation without surge, cavitation or excessive vibration. The stable operating range shall be as wide as possible based on actual hydraulic and mechanical tests.

4. Assembly and installation drawings including shaft size, seal, coupling, bearings, anchor bolt plan, part nomenclature, material list, outline dimensions, and shipping weights.

5. Data, in accordance with Section 16150 - Induction Motors, for the electric motor proposed for each pump.

6. Wiring diagram of field connections with identification of terminations between Local Control Panels, junction terminal boxes, and equipment items.

7. Complete electrical schematic diagram.

8. Factory certification indicating the pump make and model has been tested satisfactorily to meet the specified performance criteria.

C. Spare Parts List: A list of spare parts for each piece of equipment shall be obtained from the manufacturer and submitted at the same time as Shop Drawings. The name, address and telephone number of the nearest distributor for each piece of equipment shall be furnished. This list shall contain all data necessary to allow the CITY to purchase spare parts as necessary.

Pumps, General
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11100-2 D. Factory Test Data: Signed, dated, and certified factory test data for each pump system which requires factory testing.

E. Certifications:

1. Manufacturer's certification of proper installation.

2. ENGINEER'S certification of satisfactory field testing.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Compliance with the requirements of the individual pump Sections may necessitate modifications to the Manufacturer's standard equipment.

B. Performance Curves: All centrifugal pumps shall have a continuously rising curve or the system operating range shall not cross the pump curve at two different capacities or “dip region.” Unless indicated otherwise, the required pump shaft horsepower at any intended operational point on the performance curve shall not exceed the rated horsepower of the motor or engine or encroach on the service factor.

C. All components of each pump system provided under the pump Sections shall be entirely compatible. Each unit of pumping equipment shall incorporate all basic mechanisms, couplings, electric motors or engine drives, variable speed controls, necessary mountings, and appurtenances.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be suitable for the intended application; materials not indicated shall be high-grade, standard commercial quality, free from all defects and imperfections that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended, and shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Cast iron pump casings and bowls shall be of close-grained gray cast iron, conforming to ASTM A 48 - Gray Iron Castings, Class 30 or equal.

2. Bronze pump impellers shall conform to ASTM B 62 - Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings, or B 584 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications, where dezincification does not exist.

3. Stainless steel pump shafts shall be Type 416 or 316. Miscellaneous stainless steel parts shall be of Type 304 or 316, except in a septic environment.

4. Anchor bolts, washers, and nuts in Standard Service (Non-Corrosive Application) shall be galvanized steel in accordance with the requirements of Section 05500 – Misc. Metals, Fasteners and Special Finishes. Anchor bolts, washers and nuts in Corrosive Service as defined in Section 05500 – Misc.

Metals, Fasteners and Special Finishes shall be stainless steel in accordance with that Section.

2.3 PUMP COMPONENTS – GENERAL
A. Flanges and Bolts: Suction and discharge flanges shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800 or B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings dimensions.

Bolts shall be in accordance with Section 05500 – Misc. Metals, Fasteners and Special Finishes.

B. Lubrication: Vertical pump shafts of clean water pumps shall be product water-lubricated, unless otherwise indicated. Deep-well pumps and pumps with dry barrels shall have water- or oil-lubricated bearings and seals and enclosed line shafts.

C. Handholes: Handholes on pump casings shall be shaped to follow the contours of the casing to avoid any obstructions in the water passage.

Pumps, General
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11100-3 D. Drains: All gland seals, air valves, cooling water drains, and drains from variable speed drive equipment shall be piped to the nearest floor sink, or drain, with galvanized steel pipe or copper tube, properly supported with brackets.

2.4 PUMP APPURTENANCES
A. Nameplates: Each pump shall be equipped with a stainless steel nameplate indicating serial numbers, rated head and flow, impeller size, pump speed, induction motor Full Load Current (FLA), Voltage, Frequency and manufacturer's name and model number.

B. Gauges:

1. Gauges shall be located in a representative location, where not subject to shock or vibrations, in order to achieve true and accurate readings.

2. Where subject to shock or vibrations, the gauges shall be wall-mounted or attached to galvanized channel floor stands and connected by means of flexible connectors.

3. Pressure and compound gauges shall be provided in accordance with Division 17 - Instrumentation.

2.5 FACTORY TESTING
A. If specified in individual specification sections, the following tests shall be conducted on each indicated pump system:

1. Motors: Electric motors shall be tested in accordance with Section 16150 – Induction Motors.

2. Pump Systems: All centrifugal pump systems with drives 10 hp up to and including 125 hp shall have a prototype tested at the pump factory in accordance with the American National Standard for Centrifugal Pump Tests (ANSI/HI 1.6) acceptance Level "A" or the American National Standard for Vertical Pump Tests (ANSI/HI 2.6) as approved by ANSI and published by the Hydraulic Institute. The following minimum test results shall be submitted:
a. Hydrostatic test results
b. At maximum speed, a minimum of five hydraulic test readings between shutoff head and 25 percent beyond the maximum indicated capacity, recorded on data sheets as defined by the Hydraulic Institute. For variable speed driven pumps, each pump shall be tested between maximum and minimum speed at 5 Hz increments.
c. Pump curves showing head, flow, bhp/ electrical current, and efficiency requirements. d. NPSH required test curve if required by the pump specification. Otherwise, a calculated NPSH required curve may be submitted.

3. Acceptance: In the event of failure of any pump to meet any of the requirements, all necessary modifications, repairs, or replacements shall be made to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and the pump shall be re-tested until found satisfactory.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER
A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: Where required by the individual pump Sections, an authorized service representative of the manufacturer shall visit the Site to witness the following and to certify in writing that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, lubricated, adjusted, and readied for operation.

1. Inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment.

2. Startup and field testing for proper operation.

3. Performing field adjustments to ensure that the equipment installation and operation comply with requirements.

4. Instruct plant operating personnel on proper operation, maintenance and care.

Pumps, General
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11100-4

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Pumping equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Alignment: All equipment shall be field tested to verify proper alignment and freedom from binding, scraping, shaft runout, or other defects. Pump drive shafts shall be measured just prior to assembly to ensure correct alignment without forcing. Equipment shall be secure in position and neat in appearance.

C. Lubricants: The necessary oil and grease for initial operation shall be provided.

3.3 PROTECTIVE COATING
A. Materials and equipment shall be coated as required in Section 09800 - Special Coatings and Section 09900 - Painting.

3.4 FIELD TESTS
A. Where indicated by the individual pump sections, each pump system shall be field tested after installation to demonstrate:

1. Satisfactory operation without excessive noise and vibration.

2. No material loss caused by cavitation.

3. No overheating of bearings.

4. Indicated head, flow, and efficiency at design point.

The following field testing shall be conducted:

5. Startup, check, and operate the pump system over its entire speed range. If the pump is driven by a variable speed drive, the pump and motor shall be tested at 5 Hz increments. If the pump is driven at constant speed, the pump and motor shall be tested at max RPM. Unless otherwise indicated, vibration shall be within the amplitude limits recommended by the Hydraulic Institute Standards at a minimum of four pumping conditions.

6. Obtain concurrent readings of motor voltage, amperage, pump suction head, and pump discharge head for at least three pumping conditions at each pump rotational speed if variable speed at 5 Hz increment or at max RPM if constant speed. Check each power lead to the motor for proper current balance.

7. Determine bearing temperatures by contact type thermometer. A run time until bearing temperatures have stabilized shall precede this test, unless insufficient liquid volume is available.

8. Electrical and instrumentation tests shall conform to the requirements of the sections under which that equipment is specified.

B. In the event any pumping system fails to meet the indicated requirements, the pump shall be modified or replaced and retested as above until it satisfies the requirements.

C. After each pumping system has satisfied the requirements, the ENGINEER shall certify in writing that it has been satisfactorily tested and that all final adjustments have been made. Certification shall include the date of the field tests, a listing of all persons present during the tests, and the test data.

D. This work shall include all costs of field tests, including related services of the manufacturer's representative, except for power and water.
- END OF SECTION -
Chemical Feed System
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11110 - 01 SECTION 11108

CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Furnish and install the chemical feed system with associated skid, anchoring, piping and appurtenances, complete and operable in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. The requirements of Section 11000 – Equipment General Provisions apply to this Section

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Sections 01300 – Submittals.

1.3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Provide hard copies plus electronic version in PDF format.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01730 – Operating and Maintenance Data.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equipment manufacturer shall meet the description requirements indicated on the Drawings.

B. The manufacturer shall provide a minimum of a 1 year equipment warranty.

C. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten years’ experience in manufacturing Chemical Feed Systems.

D. All equipment provided under this section shall be obtained from a single supplier or manufacturer who shall assume full responsibility for the completeness and proper installation of the Chemical Feed System.

E. To insure quality and unit responsibility, the Chemical Feed System must be assembled and tested by the manufacturer at its facility and be a standard regularly marketed product of that manufacturer. The manufacturer must have physical plant, technical and design staff and fabricating personnel to complete the work specified. Skids assembled by a second party fabricator, integrator or contractor shall not be acceptable.

F. Prior to shipment the Chemical Feed System shall be inspected for quality of construction verifying all fasteners and fittings are tight, all wires are secure and connection whisker-free. The Chemical Feed System shall be tested under pressure for a minimum of one hour at 100 psi. If leaks are found they shall be fixed and a new test shall be conducted for an additional hour at 100 psi until the Chemical Feed System is verified to be leak free.

1.5 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS
A. Provide all spare parts anticipated to be required for the first 2 years of operation. Manufacturer shall clearly define quantity, description of part and associated part numbers as part of manufacturer’s scope of supply.

B. Spare parts shall be placed in separate container clearly marked as “Spare Parts.” All parts shall be identified and clearly labeled with applicable part numbers.

C. In addition to spare parts required for the first 2 years of operation, supply 2 rebuild kits with all parts necessary to completely rebuild the pump’s wet end.

Chemical Feed System
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11110 - 02

1.6 MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall warrant all pumps and controllers of its manufacture to be free of defects in material or workmanship for a minimum of 24 months from date of shipment from the factory.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Chemical Feed System shall be the standard equipment of the supplier involved in the manufacture of similar type equipment and shall be as manufactured by PulsaFeeder, or Engineer approved equal.

B. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. The feed system shall be specially designed, constructed and installed for the service intended and shall comply with the conditions listed in the schedule below. The VENDOR shall submit compatibility data from the manufacturer being supplied to confirm the materials of construction.

D. Chemical Metering Pumps shall be positive displacement pumps of the electronic solenoid or motor driven mechanical diaphragm type. This specification addresses skid mounted chemical metering pump systems complete with the skid assembly containing chemical metering pumps, all necessary piping, valves, fittings, supports, electrical controls, and accessories as specified herein.

1. The metering pump skid shall contain the following items:
a. Skid mount and associated appurtenances
b. Metering pumps with adjustable stroke length adjustment c. Calibration column
d. Pressure gauges with diaphragm seals
e. Ball valves
f. Pressure relief valves
g. Backpressure valves
h. All piping, valves, gaskets, supports, hardware, wiring, and accessories necessary for a fully functioning skid.

2. All wetted surfaces of feed pumps and all sealing gaskets shall be suitable for continuous exposure to chemical service shown on the pump schedule.

3. All wetted surfaces shall be of materials suitable for contact with potable water and shall not leach out any organic or inorganic constituent that is not permitted by local or federal regulations.

4. The chlorine pump shall have the option to choose between manual control and 4-20mA external pace inputs for automatic control based on well pump flow rate, with an Auto-Off-Manual switch.

Chemical Feed System
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11110 - 03 Sodium Hypochlorite Pump Min. Design Parameters
Service (Chemical) Sodium Hypochlorite
Chemical Conc. 12.5%
Specific Gravity 1.2 at 60 deg F
Ambient Temperature 40-105°F
Feed Rate 4-42 GPD
Pressure, MAX, PSI/BAR
at GPD/GPH/LPD
300/20
3/.13/11
Capacity, MAX, GPD/GPH/LPD
At PSI/BAR
500/20.8/1890
20/1.4
Reproducibility, % MAX Capacity 2
Controls 6-Station Membrane Switch
Stroke Frequency, MAX, SPM 125
External Stroke Frequency Control
(Automatic) 4-20 mA DC
Stroke Frequency Turn Down
Ration 100:1
Stroke Length Turn Down Ration 10:1
Pressure at Injection Point 100 psig Max,
65 psig Normal
Drive Type Motor
Connections – Tubing (Suction and
Discharge) .25” ID x 0.38” OD
Electrical Requirement 120VAC/1Ø/60Hz
E. The skid mounting of the metering pumps shall conform the following requirements.

1. Each chemical feed system shall be completely assembled, mounted, calibrated, tested, and delivered to the site on a single skid. Components to be mounted on the skid are as indicated on the drawings and shall include the metering pumps, calibration column, piping, valves, piping accessories (pulsation dampeners, strainers, etc.), and wiring integral to the skid. The chemical feed system supplier shall be responsible for providing all equipment, valves and piping within the skid boundary.

2. The skid shall be constructed of polypropylene and designed to hold all equipment and be wall or base mounted.

3. All components of the skid-mounted system (pumps, piping and controls) shall be tested prior to shipment as described in Part 1.4.

F. Calibration Chamber

1. Provide one, clear plastic calibration chamber with vent for use in calibrating the metering pumps.

2. The chamber shall be sized to give adequate capacity for a minimum 60 second draw down test.

3. The scale shall give direct readings in GPH without the need for calculations.

4. The calibration chamber shall be piped and valved so that each pump shall be able to utilize the calibration chamber without interfering with the operation of the other pumps.

5. The top of the chamber shall have a fitting to allow for piping to a common vent.

G. Piping, Valves and Appurtenances

1. All pipe, molded fittings, valve end connectors and fabricated piping components shall be made of CPVC.

2. The skid mounted piping network(s) shall be solvent weld type, or as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

3. Accessories shall be CPVC bodied components.

Chemical Feed System
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11110 - 04

4. Isolation valves shall be Asahi Type 21 ball valves, or Engineer approved equal.

5. The piping system shall be SDR rated to 150 psig at 68°F for chemical service.

H. Back Pressure and Pressure Relief Valves

1. Provide one type of each valve for each metering pump.

2. Valves shall be spring-loaded, diaphragm-type, with materials of construction compatible with chemical service.

I. Metering Pumps

1. General
a. Pump construction and features vary as a function of the pump flow output range. See the design parameters table above for pump flow range requirements, and see paragraphs below for pump specific design features.
b. The pump shall be designed for leak-proof operation and trouble-free performance. c. Metering Pump Capacity up to 10 gph (5 gph, normal):
1) The chemical metering pump(s) shall be microprocessor-controlled, simplex, solenoid or motor-driven, reciprocating, mechanically-actuated diaphragm type. All pumping functions shall be set by membrane-switch keypad and status shall be displayed on an illuminated LCD, which is readable at an offset angle of 45 degrees. Keypad will allow for simple scrolling and display of programmed parameters. The housing shall be rated IP65. 2) The power supply shall be 120VAC, 60 Hz, single-phase. The microprocessor is to automatically compensate for supply voltage variations within 15% of the rated voltage such that the frequency of the pump remains constant.
3) The liquid end shall be physically separated from the drive unit by a backplate with weep hole creating an air gap. An elastomer shaft wiper seal shall prevent contamination of the solenoid if the primary diaphragm fails. The diaphragm shall be constructed of a steel core, vulcanized into nylon reinforced EPDM, with PTFE-faced fluid contact surface. 4) Liquid End Materials of Construction: Acrylic / PVC with PTFE seals and auto degas function.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SERVICE OF MANUFACTURER
A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: The service representative of the Manufacturer shall be present at the Site to furnish the field services required by Section 11100 – Pumps, General.

B. Services of manufacturer shall be in accordance with Section 01450 – Services of Manufacturer’s Representative.

C. Manufacturer shall define quantity of trips and days on site necessary to perform the specified services as a part of the manufacturer’s scope of supply. Scope of supply shall be inclusive of travel and living expenses.

D. Site Tests: The skid shall be tested at startup. Chemical Pump Skid design parameters shall be measured and recorded. The manufacturer shall provide a formal test procedure and forms for recording data.

E. Upon completion of field services, representative of manufacturer shall prepare and submit a report in accordance with the requirements of Section 01450 – Services of Manufacturer’s Representative.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. CONTRACTOR shall install the equipment in accordance with installation requirements of Section 11100 – Pumps, General.
- END OF SECTION -
Vertical Turbine Well Pump
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11150 - 01 SECTION 11150

VERTICAL TURBINE WELL PUMP
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY
A. This section includes specifications for a water flush line shaft, vertical turbine deep well pumps.

The vertical turbine deep well pump shall be provided complete with multistage bowl, column, impeller, discharge head, motor and all required accessories. The pump installer shall be responsible for the complete engineered pump product and warranty for a period of 24 months.

The pump supplier's facility must be located within a 100-mile radius of the Vernon Well 22 jobsite. Product examples are to be available for inspection, and at the Engineer's request, the supplier will utilize a CNC to machine a water flush bearing to be evaluated.

1.2. MANDATORY BID SUBMITTAL
A. Bidders are to submit five (5) references of similar water flush pumps, which have been supplied and installed in the past five years in Southern California. Failure to include these references with your bid will cause the bid to be considered non-responsive.

1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards:

1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI):

2. American National Standard Institute (ANSI):
a. B16.1, Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800.

3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. A48, Gray Iron Castings (Class 35 Minimum).
b. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated Welded and Seamless.
c. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality.
d. Al20, Pipe, Steel. Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless for Ordinary Uses.
e. A276, Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes. f. B505, Standard Specification for Copper-Base Alloy Continuous Castings. g. B584, Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications.

4. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. El 01, Vertical Turbine Pumps -Line Shaft and Submersible Types,

5. Hydraulic Institute Standards (HI).

6. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE).

1.4. SUBMITTALS
B. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Sections 01300 – Submittals.

Vertical Turbine Well Pump
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11150 - 02 C. Product technical data including:

1. Acknowledgement that products submitted meets requirements of standards referenced.

2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

3. Maintenance instructions.

4. CAD drawing showing dimensions of discharge head, column, shaft, bowl assembly, cone strainer, and motor.

D. After the above equipment submittals have been approved, the additional submittals shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

1. Certified pump performance curves for the supplied pumps as determined in the specified shop test

2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

3. Equipment shall not be shipped until these shop test submittals have been submitted and approved
Name Well 22
DHS Status (active/standby/inactive) Active Company Status (on/offline) On-line Rated Capacity (gpm) 2100 Year Drilled 2020
Diameter (in) 18 Depth (ft) 1,140
Perforations 625’ – 730’,780’ – 830’, 900’ – 970’, 1,000’ – 1,100’ Sanitary seal (ft) 500’ Column setting (ft, bgs) 400’
Gravel Port (yes/no) Yes Air Line Depth (ft) 400’
Pump (make) Flowserve Motor (make) US
Pump Lubrication Water Flush Motor HP 350

1.5. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. General

1. Pump shall be designed and constructed to satisfactorily meet the conditions and requirements specified below and for the installations as shown on the Drawings. The pump shall have a head-capacity characteristic that is constantly rising to shutoff head without any sags. The pumping unit shall have a non-overloading horsepower characteristic.

Pump Design Point 1 2 3
Flow (gpm) 2100 2400 2010
TDH (feet) 500 400 520
Minimum Efficiency per Stage 81.0% 77.0% 82.0%
Maximum Stages (No.) 11
Maximum Speed (RPM) 1780
Motor Horsepower (HP) 325
Specific Speed (Ns)) 2578
Anticipated Pump Bowl Setting: 400’ Below the Top of the Base Vertical Turbine Well Pump
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11150 - 03 Bowl Manufacturer and Model: Flowserve 12EBM 11 Stage NSF Bowl Assembly or Engineer Approved Equal
PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. The pump installer shall be fully responsible for the entire pump and motor assembly. In addition, the CONTRACTOR shall modify the bowl assembly for water flush and shall be responsible for the design of the line shaft bearings. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the bowl assembly shall be manufactured by Flowserve Corporation or Engineer Approved Equal.

B. The pump and motor shall be rated for continuous duty and shall be capable of pumping the specified flow range without surging, cavitation, or vibration. The pump shall not overload the motor for any point on the speed pump performance characteristic curve within the limits of stable pump operation as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent surging, cavitation, and vibration, as well as throughout the entire pump operating range. The service factor for the motor shall not be applied when sizing the motor. To ensure vibration-free operation, all rotating components of the pumping unit shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Excessive vibration shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the equipment. The mass of the unit and its distribution shall be such that resonance at normal operating speeds is avoided. In any case, the amplitude of vibration as measured at any point on the pumping unit shall not exceed the limits set forth in the latest edition of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. All parts of the pump shall be designed to withstand the stresses that will be imposed upon them during their handling, shipping, erection, and operation. The completed unit, when assembled and operating, shall be free of cavitation, vibration, noise, and oil or water leaks over the range of operation. The unit shall be so constructed that dismantling and repairing can be accomplished without difficulty.

2.2 LINE SHAFT PUMP COMPONENTS
A. General:

1. Furnish unit consisting of a vertical shaft turbine pump connected to a vertical hollow shaft motor. Design unit with non-reversing ratchets.

2. Weight of revolving parts of pump including unbalanced hydraulic thrust of impeller is carried by thrust bearing in driver.

3. Hollow shaft motor construction shall provide for adjusting impeller clearance in relation to the bowl assembly.

B. Column Assembly: Construct discharge column pipe of Schedule 40 ASTM A53 Grade B steel with threaded ends and threaded steel sleeve type couplings. The column pipe shall be furnished in interchangeable sections not exceeding a nominal length of 20 ft.

C. Tube and Shaft Assembly:

1. Enclosing tubes shall be schedule 80 ASTM A120 tube in interchangeable sections not exceeding a nominal length of 5 ft. The faces of the tubes shall be machined parallel and concentric and shall butt to ensure accurate alignment. Enclosing tubes shall be lined (ID) with NSF Scotchkote 6233 fusion bonded epoxy applied per the manufacturer’s specifications. The tubes shall be stabilized in the column pipe by rubber centering spiders spaced 20 feet from the top and bottom, and at 40 ft intervals throughout the balance of the column length. The line shaft screw bearings shall be spaced to maintain proper alignment of the pump shafting and prevent excessive vibration, not to exceed 5 feet. The bearings shall be of bronze material and machined, threaded and grooved with sufficient radial grooves to allow adequate flow at 60 PSI for proper lubrication within a water flush Vertical Turbine Well Pump
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11150 - 04 system. A complete line shaft lubrication system shall be provided to allow for a minimum flow of 5 gpm.

2. Line shaft shall be turned, ground, and polished AISI 416 stainless steel, of ample size (1.6875” minimum) to operate the pump without distortion or vibration and shall be tested for straightness. Shaft shall be straight in accordance with ANSI 858.1. The shafts shall be furnished in interchangeable sections not over 20 feet in length that shall be field replaceable. Shaft couplings shall be extra strong threaded stainless steel couplings and shall be designed to transmit the full load torque and thrust and maintain alignment between adjacent shaft sections.

D. Airline and PVC Access:

3. A ¼” rubber jacketed stainless steel tubing shall be installed to the top of the bowl assembly and connected to a direct reading gauge to be subsequently utilized for water level measurements. The tubing shall be banded to the column pipe with stainless steel banding.

4. A minimum 2” schedule 80 flush thread PVC access line shall be installed to the bottom of the bowl assembly and shall pass through the discharge head base plate for continuous access. The PVC shall be banded to the column pipe with stainless steel banding.

E. Pump Bowl Assembly: The pump bowls shall be of ASTM-A48 Class 30 cast iron, free of blow holes, sand holes, and other detrimental defects. They shall be accurately machined with register fit circles. All bowls shall be flanged type construction. The bowl wetted passage shall be coated with an abrasion-resistant baked enamel, phenolic or epoxy. The coating shall be NSF approved for potable water service. The bowl assembly shall be designed to ensure easy removal of bearings and impellers. The impellers shall be enclosed-type C903 bronze. All impellers shall be dynamically balanced and shall be securely fastened to the bowl shaft with stainless steel taper lock collets or double keys. The impellers shall be adjustable vertically by external means at the driver location. The pump shaft shall be 17-4 pH condition H-1150 stainless steel PSQ turned and ground. The shaft shall be sized to handle the worst case down thrust condition and maximum loads of the motor and bowl assembly. It shall be supported by bronze bearings above and below each impeller. The suction case bearing shall be extra long and grease packed and sealed with a bronze sand collar. The discharge case shall also contain an extra-long support bearing. The suction case shall be equipped with a minimum 5 ft suction pipe of same diameter and material as the pump column with a welded, heavy duty 316 stainless steel cone strainer. The strainer shall have a minimum inlet open area of not less than four times the suction pipe size. The bowl assembly shall be modified for water flush operation by the CONTRACTOR. All hardware shall be stainless steel.

F. Discharge Head Assembly: CONTRACTOR shall furnish need fabricated steel discharge head complete with a 150# ANSI flange to adapt to the discharge pipeline. The discharge head shall be of sufficient strength, weight and thickness to provide accurate alignment, prevent excessive deflection and support the drive motor. The discharge head shall be offset for adequate, unhindered PVC access. The discharge head shall be equipped with hinged safety screens. The discharge head shall be sandblasted and wetted passages shall be coated with Scotchkote 134 NSF fusion bonded epoxy per the manufacturer’s specifications. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install a complete water flush head assembly machined from solid bronze with a tube tension plate. The water flush head assembly shall accept a minimum six (6) rings of packing and have dual injection ports and shall be supplied by the CONTRACTOR. The assembly shall include a drain connection and lubricating product water connection and piping. A chlorinated ¾” water line with valves and meter will be supplied by others to connect to the water flush injection port.

The water flush assembly shall be designed to allow for sufficient lubrication at 60 PSI.

Vertical Turbine Well Pump
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 11150 - 05 G. Motor: The motor shall be a 350 HP Nidec US Motor VHS, WPI premium efficient, inverter duty rated 4-pole hollow shaft motor equipped with a non-reverse ratchet and 115 volt space heaters.

The motor thrust bearing shall be designed to handle the worst case down thrust condition and maximum loads of the motor and bowl assembly and shall meet, at a minimum, the published standard rules and regulations of NEMA, ANSI, and IEEE with respect to application, manufacture and test.

H. Testing: Provide a factory non-witness pump performance test and submit test curve to the Engineer for approval prior to shipping.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION AND STARTUP
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in full compliance with Section 11100. Arrange for the pump manufacturer or supplier of the equipment furnished to provide the services of a degreed engineer with a minimum of ten (10) years of experience working with water flush pumps to supervise the installation and initial operation. Include this cost in the price of the equipment.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Following completion of the installation and satisfactory start-up of the equipment, the experienced pump engineer shall conduct field testing for the operation, over the entire specified range. The pump shall be free of vibration, noise, or cavitation. The injection system shall be inspected and approved by the engineer to include all of the necessary components and protective devices.

B. Vibration shall be checked and recorded. Full speed vibration of pumps shall be equal to or less than the amplitude limits recommended in the Hydraulic Institute Standards.

C. Each pump performance shall be documented by obtaining concurrent readings showing motor voltage and amperage, pump discharge head, water surface elevation in the well, and pump capacity. Readings shall be documented for at least five pumping conditions to define the actual pumping curve. One test shall be at shutoff head. Each power lead to the motor shall be checked for proper current balance at the motor terminals and the MCC.

D. In the event any of the pumping equipment fails to meet the above test requirements, modify and retest.

3.3 INSTRUCTION OF CITY PERSONNEL
A. After the equipment been installed, tested, adjusted, and placed in satisfactory operating condition, provide a minimum of two (2) hours of training by an experience engineer to instruct the CITY's operating personnel in the use and maintenance of the equipment. Schedule the dates, duration, and content of instruction in consultation with the CITY. Include the cost of this service in the price of the equipment.
- END OF SECTION -
DIVISION 12 (Not Used)

FURNISHINGS
DIVISION 13

SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Fiber Reinforced Polymer (FRP) Buildings
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 13000-1 SECTION 13000

FIBER REINFORCED POLYMER (FRP) BUILDINGS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.0 DESCRIPTION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all FRP buildings, equipment, components and accessories as specified herein. All said buildings, equipment, components and accessories shall be provided by a single supplier or manufacturer to assure compatibility and proper performance.

1.1 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All buildings, equipment, components and accessories shall be designed, manufactured, inspected and delivered in accordance with the latest edition of the following specifications, codes and standards:

ASTM D 790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
ASTM D2563 Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass-Reinforced Plastic Laminate Parts
ASTM D 2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor
B. Related Sections:

1. Division 16: Electrical

1.2 WARRANTY
A. The FRP building shall be provided with a minimum ten (10) year manufacturer’s warranty against defects in material and workmanship. All equipment, components and accessories shall be provided with a minimum two (2) year CONTRACTOR warranty against defects in material and workmanship unless otherwise stated in the project bid documents.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The supplier or manufacturer shall submit the following documents for acceptance prior to manufacturing, assembling and/or shipping the specified buildings, equipment, components or accessories:

1. Complete fabrication drawings showing all materials and dimensions of the FRP building and associated appurtenances.

2. Complete assembly drawings showing the locations of all equipment, components and accessories to be provided by the manufacturer or supplier in accordance with this specification.

3. Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) product data sheets for all equipment, components and accessories being provided by the manufacturer or supplier in accordance with this specification.

4. If required per section 2.02, submit complete design calculations for all design loads including: dead loads, live loads, wind loads, and seismic loads prepared and signed by Registered Civil Engineer licensed in the State of which the project will be completed.

5. Detailed information and/or drawings showing standard options for building anchorage. All material, equipment, labor and provisions associated with the FRP building foundation and anchorage design and construction shall not be made part of this specification section and shall not be provided by the FRP building supplier or manufacturer.

6. Instructions and recommendations for unloading, handling, storage, and installation.

Fiber Reinforced Polymer (FRP) Buildings
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 13000-2

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. The manufacturer or supplier shall take reasonable precautions to protect all products covered within this specification section from damage during shipment.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall take the proper precautions to protect all products covered within this specification section from damage following receipt of shipment. Damage incurred while loading, unloading, moving, storing, assembling or installing the products covered within this specification section shall be the sole liability of the CONTRACTOR.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS
A. Orenco Composites, a Division of Orenco Systems, Inc. – Roseburg, OR – (541) 459-6970 B. Or Engineer Approved Equal

2.2 FRP BUILDING DESIGN AND MANUFACTURING REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide a FRP building (s) meeting the following requirements:

1. Structure Name: City of Vernon Well No. 22
a. Chemical Room (Building):
1) Exterior Width: 10’
2) Side Wall Height: 10’
b. Electrical Room (Building)
1) Exterior Width: 12’
2) Side Wall Height: 10’

2. The total exterior length of the two buildings side by side shall NOT exceed 27’.

3. FRP Floor Required: No

4. PE Stamped Structural/Seismic Calculations Required: Yes

5. Exposure: C

6. Category: III

7. Design Velocity (Wind): 115 mph

8. Minimum Design Thermal Resistance: R-24

9. Exterior Color: Per City Standard

10. Interior Color: White
B. The FRP building shall be a seamless, molded, one-piece building manufactured using a closed-molded RTM or vacuum-infusion process. Open-molded and/or panel assembled buildings shall not be acceptable. To ensure a seamless, strong and weather-proof design, a building shall be determined panel assembled (and therefore not allowed) if any portion of the walls and/or roof are molded or manufactured individually.

C. To reduce the risk of delamination due to rotting, swelling and/or rusting, the FRP building shall be manufactured of 100% composite materials. Embedded wood and or ferrous metals shall not be allowed.

D. The ability to move existing equipment and/or install new equipment within the structure is critical for future use. To ensure full and unimpeded equipment mounting access to all interior and exterior wall locations all structural laminates shall be of sufficient strength to handle direct mounting of heavy equipment using standard, readily available mounting hardware. Specifically, each piece of mounting hardware shall be rated to an ultimate pull-out strength of 1,750lbs (minimum) when properly anchored within the structural laminate.

Fiber Reinforced Polymer (FRP) Buildings
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 13000-3 Equipment mounting boards of any type or material shall not be allowed as they restrict mounting access for future equipment and introduce degradable materials into the structure.

E. The FRP building shall be manufactured from fiberglass reinforced polyester resin, using grades of resin and fiberglass considered acceptable for use in water and wastewater environments. All FRP laminate shall obtain a minimum glass reinforcement content of 50%. Insulation foam with a minimum density of 2 lb/ft3 shall be polyurethane or polyisocyanurate and shall be integrally molded within the structure walls, roof and floor. The FRP building walls, roof and floor shall be manufactured to include integrally molded FRP columns, spaced at a minimum of 8” on-center, to increase structural integrity and prevent delamination.

F. All interior surfaces shall be protected with a polyester gelcoat. All exterior surfaces shall be protected with a high performance, UV resistant, polyaspartic urethane coating rated for continuous outdoor exposure.

G. The FRP building shall be manufactured with in-wall, embedded anchor pockets. To ensure equipment may be located directly against all interior walls, internally protruding mounting flanges shall not be acceptable.

Exterior mounting flanges shall not be acceptable for security reasons. A manufacturer provided gasket or butyl sealant shall be installed between the FRP building and concrete foundation at the time of installation.

H. The FRP building shall include a roof and/or floor of identical construction to that of the walls. The roof shall be sloped to allow drainage.

I. The FRP building shall be equipped with lifting brackets or eyebolts installed on the roof exterior to facilitate lifting and installation of the structure.

2.3 DOORS, FRAMES AND HARDWARE
A. The FRP structure shall be supplied with the type, size and quantity of doors and hardware as specified below or as shown on the project drawings.

B. All single/double doors shall be of FRP construction with a 2” minimum polyurethane or polyisocyanurate foam core (minimum density of 2 lb/ft3).

C. Each single/double door shall be hung on 4-inch × 4-inch stainless steel ball bearing hinges with nonremovable pins. The hinges shall be bolted through the door jamb with 304 stainless steel fasteners.

Single/double doors are supplied with commercial-grade 1, outdoor lever- type handles with interior panic bar.

D. Door frames shall be composed entirely of FRP material and shall be mounted separately to the structure after the molding process is complete. To permit use of standard, industrial doors and hardware, submarine style door systems (or similar systems in which the frame is molded into the wall of the unit) shall not be allowed.

E. To eliminate tripping hazards and facilitate entry and exit from the building, the area below the door shall be free of any and all building material, framing and/or extensions of the structure. Raised or integral door sills shall not be acceptable.

F. The FRP structure shall be provided with an FRP drip cover above the entire length of the door.

2.4 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING
A. Provide (1) exhaust fan rated to a minimum of 200 CFM. Exhaust fan shall be Greenheck or approved equal.

Exhaust fan shall be provided with all necessary controls equipment to provide a complete and operable system as required by the manufacturer and as shown in the Contract Documents.

B. Provide (1) air conditioning unit rated to 48,000 BtuH with integrated thermostat. Air conditioning unit shall be Daikin or approved equal.

C. Provide (1) door mounted intake louver with adjustable damper and insect screen. The intake louver shall be capable of passing the specified amount of air required in the Contract Documents. Intake louver shall be Dayton or approved equal.

Fiber Reinforced Polymer (FRP) Buildings
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 13000-4

2.5 ELECTRICAL
A. All components, equipment, wiring and ancillary items shall be provided and installed in conformance with the National Electric Code as well as all applicable state and local codes.

B. The CONTRACTOR and FRP building manufacturer shall coordinate conduit runs to the load center. This item includes all breakers and components required to provide power to the equipment that is to be provided by the building manufacturer.

C. Provide 20 amp, duplex, feed-through, outdoor rated GFCI receptacles housed within weatherproof enclosures as shown in the Contract Documents. Receptacles shall be Leviton 1221-2W or approved equal.

D. All components shall be wired to the load center using standard 12 AWG THHN wiring within rigid, UL listed, schedule 40, PVC electrical conduit.

E. Provide an adequate quantity of 20 amp toggle switch(s) to control all equipment. Toggle switches call be housed within weatherproof enclosures and shall be Leviton 1221-2W or approved equal.

F. Provide an adequate quantity of 4-foot, damp location rated, vapor-proof, florescent, duel light fixtures such to provide a minimum output of 35 lumens per square foot of interior structure space. Interior light fixtures shall be RAB, Lithonia or approved equal.

G. Provide (1) compact florescent exterior light fixture above or adjacent to each door. Exterior light fixtures shall include an integrated photocell and shall be Lithonia TWS LED 1 50K 120PE or approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. All buildings, equipment, components and accessories shall be stored, fabricated, assembled, erected, moved and tested in accordance with the bid documents and the manufacturers, suppliers and original equipment manufacturers (OEM’s) written recommendations and instructions.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All buildings, equipment, components and accessories shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations. Appropriately sized lifting equipment shall be used to off-load the building using the manufacturer supplied lifting lugs.

B. All buildings shall be installed on level and flat concrete slabs or foundations free of cracks and vertical projections. The CONTRACTOR shall install a manufacturer supplied neoprene gasket in between the FRP building and concrete foundation at the time of placement.

C. All pipe and conduit penetrations through concrete foundation, FRP roof, and FRP walls shall be completely sealed to provide an air and weather tight structure.

D. All building equipment and accessories shall be mounted directly to the FRP wall using either walldog screws (60 lb design pull-out strength, 406 lb ultimate) and/or rivet nuts (200lb design pull-out strength, 1,781 lb ultimate) depending on the equipment loading requirements. The CONTRACTOR shall consult with the manufacturer or supplier should equipment loadings exceed the aforementioned mounting hardware capabilities.
- END OF SECTION-
Double Wall HDPE Polyethylene Storage Tanks
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 13200-1 SECTION 13200

DOUBLE WALL TANKS

HIGH DENSITY CROSSLINKED POLYETHYLENE STORAGE TANKS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a double wall, high density crosslinked polyethylene tank and accessories, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. Unit Responsibility: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for furnishing the double wall tank(s) and its accessories as indicated.

1.2 REFERENCES, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM).

1. D638 Tensile Properties of Plastics

2. D883 Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Plastics

3. D1505 Density of Plastics by the Density-Gradient Technique

4. D1525 Test Method for Vicat Softening Temperature of Plastics

5. D1693 ESCR Specification Thickness 0.125" F50-10% Igepal

6. F412 Standard Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems B. ANSI Standards: B-16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings C. Building Code: California Building Code, [Latest Edition] D. ARM: Low Temperature Impact Resistance (Falling Dart Test Procedure).

E. Section 01610 – Seismic Design Criteria

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be approved by the engineer or CONTRACTOR prior to the manufacturing of the double wall tank(s). Submit the following as a single complete initial submittal.

Sufficient data shall be included to show that the product conforms to Specification requirements. Where indicated or required by the ENGINEER, Shop Drawings shall include clear, concise calculations showing equipment anchorage forces and the capacities of the anchorage elements (including seismic and structural anchoring calculations and support devices). Provide the following additional information:

1. Double wall tank and Fitting Material
a. Resin Manufacturer Data Sheet
b. Fitting Material
c. Gasket style and material
d. Bolt material

2. Dimensioned Tank Drawings
a. Location and orientation of openings, fittings, accessories, restraints and supports. b. Details of manways, flexible connections, and vents.

3. Calculations shall be stamped and signed by a registered, third party engineer where required. a. Wall thickness. Hoop stress shall be calculated using 600 psi @ 100 degrees F. b. Tank restraint system. Show seismic and wind criteria (where exposed - for wind).

Double Wall HDPE Polyethylene Storage Tanks
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 13200-2

4. Insulation data if required.

B. Manufacturer’s warranty
C. Manufacturer's unloading procedure
D. Manufacturer's installation instructions
E. Supporting information of Quality Management System.

F. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Submit to engineer a list of 5 installations in the same service as proof of manufacturer's qualifications.

G. Factory Test Report

1. Material, specific gravity rating at 600 psi @ 100 degrees F. design hoop stress.

2. Wall thickness verification.

3. Fitting placement verification.

4. Visual inspection

5. Impact test

6. Gel test

7. Hydrostatic test

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The double wall tanks of the same material furnished under this Section shall be supplied by Poly Processing Company, or approved equal who has been regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of chemical storage tanks for over 10 years.

B. Tanks shall be manufactured from virgin materials.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For equipment and accessories to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. The warranty shall be provided upon request for the specific service application. For most chemical applications, a 5 year full replacement warranty shall be provided.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Tanks shall be rotationally-molded, high density crosslinked polyethylene, double wall, flat bottom tanks.

The assembly consists of one cylindrical, closed top inner primary tank and one cylindrical, open top containment outer tank. Each tank is a rotationally molded one-piece seamless constructed tank. The tanks are designed for above-ground, vertical installation and are designed to store approved chemicals at atmospheric pressures. The assembly shall be designed to prevent rainwater and debris from entering the containment tank.

Tanks shall be adequately vented. Venting-Design for ACFM (air cubic feet per minute). Where indicated, tanks shall be provided with ancillary mechanical fittings and accessories. Tanks shall be marked to identify the manufacturer; date of manufacture and serial numbers must be permanently embossed into the tank.

Double Wall HDPE Polyethylene Storage Tanks
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 13200-3

2.3 MANUFACTURER
A. Tanks shall be manufactured by Poly Processing Company, or approved equal.

2.4 POLYETHYLENE STORAGE TANKS
A. Conical 30° sloped bottom, 1000 gallons, with seismic stand from Poly Processing, Core-Rosion Products, or Engineer Approved Equal.

B. Service: Chemical storage tanks shall be suited for the following operating conditions:

C. High Density Crosslinked Polyethylene resin used in the tank manufacture shall be by Exxon Mobil Chemicals or equal and shall contain ultraviolet stabilizer as recommended by resin manufacturer. Where black tanks are indicated, the resin shall have a carbon black compounded into it. The tank material shall be rotationally molded and meet or exceed the following properties:

Property Type I XLPE ASTM Test
Environmental Stress Cracking
Resistance, F50, hours, 10% Igepal >1,000 D1693
Tensile Strength, Ultimate psi, 2-
inch/minimum 2,830
D638
Type IV
Specimen
Elongation at Break, % ,2-inch
minimum 700
D638
Type IV
Specimen
Flexural Modulus, psi 86,780 D790
D. Wall thickness for a given hoop stress is to be calculated in accordance with ASTM D 1998. Tanks shall be designed using a hoop stress no greater than 600 psi. In NO case shall the tank thickness be less than design requirements per ASTM D 1998.

1. The wall thickness of any cylindrical portion at any fluid level shall be determined by the following equation:

T = P x OD/2SD or 0.433 x SG x H x OD/2SD
Where: T = wall thickness, in
P = pressure, psi
SG = specific gravity, gm/cc
H = fluid head, ft
OD = outside diameter, ft
SD = hydrostatic design stress, 600 psi
a. The minimum wall thickness shall be sufficient to support its own weight in an upright position without external support but shall not be less than 0.187” thick.

2. On closed top tanks the top head shall be integrally molded with the cylindrical wall. Its minimum thickness shall be equal to the thickness of the top of the straight sidewall. In most cases, flat areas shall be provided for attachment of large fittings on the dome of the tank.

3. The bottom head shall be integrally molded with the cylindrical wall. Knuckle radius shall be:

Tank Diameter, ft Min Knuckle Radius, in
less than or equal to 6 1
greater than 6 1-1/2
Double Wall HDPE Polyethylene Storage Tanks
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 13200-4

4. Tanks with 3000 gal capacity or larger shall have at least 3 lifting lugs. Lugs shall be designed for lifting the tank when empty.
a. Unless otherwise indicated, manways shall be 19-in diameter or greater and equipped with an emergency pressure relief device or Manway.
b. Unless otherwise indicated, bolted sealed top manway shall be 19- inches or greater and be in locations easily accessible from the nearest worker access position. The sealed manway shall be constructed of polyethylene material. The bolts shall be chemically compatible with the chemical being stored. Gaskets shall be closed cell, crosslinked polyethylene foam, Viton, or EPDM materials. NOTE: If pneumatically filling, venting must be in accordance with the following:

E. Tank colors shall be natural (unpigmented, or as specified by the CITY with written agreement by the tank manufacturer.

2.5 TANK ACCESSORIES
A. Mixer

1. Each tank shall include a chemical mixer, mounted to the tank. Mixers shall provide recirculation mixing for flocculent polymer in the bulk storage tanks for chemicals with viscosities of 300-3,000 cPs.

Viscosity shall also be confirmed within this range by selected polymer supplier prior to furnishing and installing the mixer.

2. Mixers shall be manufactured by Neptune, Series JG, or equal.

3. Motor will be 3/4 HP, 120-volt, 1 phase, 60 hz, TEFC. All motors will be UL rated and have a NEMA B temperature rise performance rating.

4. A supplier's written warranty shall be provided for the equipment specified in this section. The warranty shall be for a minimum period of one (1) year for start-up or 18 months from time of equipment shipment, whichever comes first.

1. Ladder:

1. Fiberglass access ladders shall be provided with the polyethylene chemical storage tanks at locations as shown. Use proper chemical resistant materials when anchoring to tank dome or sidewall. Safety cages shall be added to ladders as required. Ladders must be designed to OSHA standard 2206; 1910.27.

2. Ladders must be secured to the tank and secured to the concrete to allow for tank expansion / contraction due to temperature and loading changes. See Manufacturer’s Installation Manual.

3. All ladders shall be designed to meet applicable OSHA standards. Reference: OSHA 2206; 1910.27; fixed ladders.

Double Wall HDPE Polyethylene Storage Tanks
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 13200-5 B. Restraint System:

1. Metal components to be stainless steel, edge softeners, and tension ring with stainless steel or galvanized cables and clamps.

2. Seismic system to be designed to meet the proper seismic zone and specified wind load. PE stamped calculations and or drawings will be required based on individual project requirements. Reference Section 01610.

C. Hazard Identification Signage:

1. Visible hazard identification signs as specified in NFPA 704 for the specific material contained shall be placed on stationary containers and above-ground tanks and at entrances to locations where hazardous materials are stored, dispensed, used or handles in quantities requiring a permit and at specific entrances and locations designated by the local governing fire code official.

2.6 TANKS
A. Tank Schedule per the following specifications
Note 1: Approximate overall height is measured along the straight cylindrical portion of the tank and includes the dome top.

B. Fittings

1. Tank fittings shall be according to the fitting schedule below. Fitting, gasket and bolt material shall be per requirements in section A, or a material that is compatible with the product being stored and shall be a minimum of ¼-in thick. Threaded fittings shall use American Standard Pipe Threads. If tanks are insulated, fittings shall be installed at the factory prior to application of the insulation. All bottom discharge connection must maintain and meet the requirements to support 110% secondary containment requirements.

2. Double flange fittings shall be constructed of virgin polyethylene. Bolts will be welded to a common backing ring and encapsulated with polyethylene preventing fluid contact with the metal material.

Flange will have one full face gasket to provide a sealing surface against the flange and tank surface.

Bolt holes shall straddle the principal centerline of the tank

3. Bolted flange bulkhead fittings shall be constructed with one 150-lb flange installed inside the tank and one flange ring installed outside the tank. The flange will be socket or threaded according to specific connection requirements. The head of the bolts shall be encapsulated with polyethylene preventing fluid contact with the metal material. Encapsulated heads shall have a gasket to provide a sealing surface against the flange. Bolt holes shall straddle the principal centerline of the tank.

4. Down Pipes and Fill Pipes: Down pipes and fill pipes shall be supported at 6-ft max intervals. Down pipes and fill pipes shall be PVC or material compatible with the chemical stored.

5. U-Vents: Each tank must be vented for the material and flow and withdrawal rates expected. Vents should comply with OSHA 1910.106(F)(iii)(2)(IV)(9). U-vents shall be sized by the tank manufacturer and be furnished complete with insect screen if required (Insect screen lessens the tank capacity by 1/3) in accordance with the venting schedule listed above.

6. Flange Adapters: Adapters may be used to adapt threaded or socket fitting components to 150-lb flange connections. Adapters shall be of material compatible with the chemical stored.

2.7 LEVEL INDICATION
A. Float Indication: The level indicator shall be assembled to the tank and shall consist of PVC float, indicator, polypropylene rope, perforated interior pipe, PVC roller guides, clear PVC sight tube and necessary pipe supports. The level indicator shall act inversely to the tank contents and shall not allow entrance of tank contents into the sight tube at any time.

Double Wall HDPE Polyethylene Storage Tanks
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 13200-6 B. Ultrasonic Level Indicator (where indicated): The ultrasonic level indicator shall be per Specification Section 17510, and suitable for service in a non-hazardous/hazardous environment, as required for the measuring medium.

2.8 FACTORY TESTING
A. Material Testing

1. Perform gel and low temperature impact tests in accordance with ASTM D 1998 on condition samples cut from each polyethylene chemical storage tank.

2. Degree of Crosslinking. Use Method C of ASTM D 1998- Section11.4 to determine the ortho-xylene insoluble fraction of crosslinked polyethylene gel test. Samples shall test at no less than 60 percent.

B. Tank Testing

1. Dimensions: Take exterior dimensions with the tank empty, in the vertical position. Outside diameter tolerance, including out-of-roundness, shall be per ASTM D 1998. Fitting placement tolerance shall be +/- 1/2-in vertical and +/- 1 degree radial.

2. Visual: Inspect for foreign inclusions, air bubbles, pimples, crazing, cracking, and delamination.

3. Hydrostatic test: Following fabrication, the bottom tanks, including inlet and outlet fittings, shall be hydraulically tested with water by filling to the top sidewall for a minimum of 1/2 an hour and inspected for leaks. Following successful testing, the tank shall be emptied and cleaned prior to shipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The tank shall be shipped upright or lying down on their sides with blocks and slings to keep them from moving. AVOID sharp objects on trailers.

B. All fittings shall be installed and, if necessary, removed for shipping and shipped separately unless otherwise noted by the CONTRACTOR.

C. Upon arrival at the destination, inspect the tank(s) and accessories for damage in transit. If damage has occurred, the manufacturer/supplier shall be notified immediately.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install the tanks in strict accordance with Manufacturer’s Installation Manual and shop drawings.

3.3 FIELD TESTING
A. All tanks be hydro-tested for 24 hours prior to commissioning. - END OF SECTION -
DIVISION 14 (Not Used)

HOISTS AND CONVEYING SYSTEMS

MECHANICA
DIVISION 15
L
Piping General
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15000-1 SECTION 15000

PIPING, GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide all piping systems indicated, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all piping sections in Divisions 2 – Sitework and 15 - Mechanical.

C. The mechanical drawings define the general layout, configuration, routing, method of support, pipe size and pipe type. The mechanical drawings are not pipe construction or fabrication drawings. Details for construction shall be developed as necessary to construct all mechanical piping systems, to accommodate the specific equipment provided, and to provide all spools, spacers, adapters, and connectors for a complete and functional system.

D. ALL PIPING AND FITTINGS INSTALLED ON POTABLE WATER LINES SHALL BE NSF 61 CERTIFIED AND RATED FOR POTABLE WATER INSTALLATIONS.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 – Submittals.

B. Shop Drawings shall contain the following information:

1. Drawings: Layout drawings including all necessary dimensions, details, pipe joints, fittings, specials, bolts and nuts, gaskets, valves, appurtenances, anchors, guides, and material lists. Fabrication drawings shall indicate all spool pieces, spacers, adapters, connectors, fittings and supports to accommodate the equipment and valves in a complete and functional system.

C. Certifications: All necessary certificates, test reports and affidavits of compliance shall be obtained.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Extent of Work: Pipes, fittings and appurtenances shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Divisions 2 and 15 and as indicated.

B. Pipe Supports: Pipes shall be adequately supported, restrained and anchored in accordance with Section 15006 - Pipe Supports, and as indicated.

C. Lining: Application, thickness and curing of pipe lining shall be in accordance with the applicable Sections of Division 2, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Coating: Application, thickness and curing of pipe coating shall be in accordance with the applicable Sections of Division 2, unless otherwise indicated. Pipes above ground or in structures shall be field-coated in accordance with Section 09800 - Protective Coating.

E. Pressure Rating: Piping systems shall be designed for the maximum expected pressure as defined in Section 02643 - Pipeline Testing, or as indicated on the Piping Schedule.

F. Inspection: Pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture. During the manufacture of the pipe, the ENGINEER shall be given access to all areas where manufacturing is in progress and shall be permitted to make all inspections necessary to confirm compliance with requirements.

Piping General
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15000-2 G. Tests: Except where otherwise indicated, materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the applicable specifications and standards. Welds shall be tested as indicated.

H. Welding Requirements: Welding procedures used to fabricate pipe shall be prequalified under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. Welding procedures shall be reviewed for longitudinal and girth or spiral welds for pipe cylinders, spigot and bell ring attachments, reinforcing plates and ring flange welds, and plates for lug connections.

I. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be done by skilled welders and welding operators who have had adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 by an independent local, approved testing agency not more than 6 months prior to commencing work on the pipeline. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the WORK shall be used in qualification tests. Qualification testing of welders and materials used during testing are part of the WORK.

2.2 PIPE FLANGES
A. General: Flanges shall have flat faces and shall be attached with bolt holes straddling the vertical axis of the pipe unless otherwise indicated. Attachment of the flanges to the pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C207. Flange faces shall be perpendicular to the axis of the adjoining pipe.

Flanges for miscellaneous small pipes shall be in accordance with the standards indicated for these pipes.

B. Pressure Ratings:

1. 150 psi or less: Flanges shall conform to either ANSI/AWWA C207 - Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service--Sizes 4-inch. Through 144-inch, Class D, or ANSI/ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, 150-lb class.

2. 150 psi to 275 psi: Flanges shall conform to either ANSI/AWWA C207 Class E or Class F, or ANSI/ASME B16.5 150-lb class.

3. 275 psi to 700 psi: Flanges shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.5, 300-lb class.

4. Selection based on test pressure: AWWA flanges shall not be exposed to test pressures greater than 125 percent of rated capacity. For higher test pressures, the next higher rated AWWA flange or an ANSI-rated flange shall be selected.

C. Blind Flanges: Blind flanges shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C207, or as indicated for miscellaneous small pipes.

D. Flange Coating: Machined faces of metal blind flanges and pipe flanges shall be coated with a temporary rustinhibitive coating to protect the metal until the installation is completed.

E. Flange Bolts: Bolts and nuts shall conform to Section 05500 – Misc. Metals, Fasteners and Special Finishes.

Studs and bolts shall extend through the nuts a minimum of ¼-inch. All-thread studs shall be used on all valve flange connections, where space restrictions preclude the use of regular bolts.

F. Insulating Flanges: Insulated flanges shall have bolt holes ¼-inch diameter greater than the bolt diameter.

G. Insulating Flange Sets: Insulating flange sets shall be provided where indicated or as needed. Each insulating flange set shall consist of an insulating gasket, insulating sleeves and washers and a steel washer. Insulating sleeves and washers shall be one piece when flange bolt diameter is 1½-inch or smaller and shall be made of acetal resin. For bolt diameters larger than 1½-inch, insulating sleeves and washers shall be 2-piece and shall be made of polyethylene or phenolic material. Steel washers shall be in accordance with ASTM A 325 - Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. Insulating gaskets shall be fullface.

Piping General
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15000-3 H. Flange Gaskets:

1. Gaskets for flanged joints used in general water and wastewater service shall be full-faced type, with material and thickness in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C207. Blind flanges shall have gaskets covering the entire inside face of the blind flange and shall be cemented to the blind flange. Ring gaskets shall not be permitted, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Gaskets for flanged joints used in chemicals, air, solvents, hydrocarbons, steam, chlorine and other fluids shall be made of materials compatible with the service, pressure and temperature.

2.3 THREADED INSULATING CONNECTIONS
A. General: Threaded insulating bushings, unions, or couplings, as appropriate, shall be used for joining threaded pipes of dissimilar metals and for piping systems where corrosion control and cathodic protection are involved.

B. Materials: Threaded insulating connections shall be of nylon, Teflon, polycarbonate, polyethylene or other non-conductive materials, and shall have ratings and properties to suit the service and loading conditions.

2.4 MECHANICAL-TYPE COUPLINGS (GROOVED OR BANDED PIPE)
A. General: Cast mechanical-type couplings shall be provided where indicated. The couplings shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05500 – Misc. Metals, Fasteners and Special Finishes. Gaskets for mechanicaltype couplings shall be compatible with the piping service and fluid utilized, in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations. The wall thickness of grooved piping shall conform with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations to suit the highest expected pressure. To avoid stress on equipment, equipment connections with mechanical-type couplings shall have rigid-grooved couplings or flexible type coupling with harness in sizes where rigid couplings are not available, unless thrust restraint is provided by other means. Mechanical-type couplings shall be bonded. The Contractor shall have the coupling manufacturer's service representative verify the correct choice and application of couplings and gaskets, and the workmanship, to assure a correct installation. To assure uniform and compatible piping components, all grooved fittings, couplings and valves shall be from the same manufacturer.

2.5 SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS
A. Construction: Sleeve-type couplings shall be provided where indicated, in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C219 - Standard for Bolted Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe. Couplings shall be steel with steel bolts, without pipe stop. Couplings shall be of sizes to fit the pipe and fittings indicated. The middle ring shall be not less than ¼-inch thick or at least the same wall thickness as the pipe to which the coupling is connected.

If the strength of the middle ring material is less than the strength of the pipe material, the thickness of the middle ring shall be increased to have the same strength as the pipe. The coupling shall be either 5 or 7 inches long for sizes up to and including 30 inches and 10 inches long for sizes greater than 30 inches, for standard steel couplings, and 16 inches long for long-sleeve couplings. The followers shall be single-piece contoured mill sections welded and cold-expanded as required for the middle rings, and of sufficient strength to accommodate the number of bolts necessary to obtain adequate gasket pressures without excessive rolling.

The shape of the follower shall be of such design as to provide positive confinement of the gasket. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05500 – Misc. Metals, Fasteners and Special Finishes.

Buried sleeve-type couplings shall be epoxy-coated at the factory as indicated.

B. Pipe Preparation: Where indicated, the ends of the pipe shall be prepared for flexible steel couplings. Plain ends for use with couplings shall be smooth and round for a distance of 12 inches from the ends of the pipe, with outside diameter not more than 1/64-inch smaller than the nominal outside diameter of the pipe. The middle ring shall be tested by cold-expanding a minimum of one percent beyond the yield point, to proof-test the weld to the strength of the parent metal. The weld of the middle ring shall be subjected to air test for porosity.

Piping General
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15000-4 C. Gaskets

1. Gaskets for sleeve-type couplings shall be rubber-compound material that will not deteriorate from age or exposure to air under normal storage or use conditions. Gaskets for wastewater and sewerage applications shall be Buna "N," Grade 60, or equivalent suitable elastomer. The rubber in the gasket shall meet the following specifications:
a. Color - Jet Black
b. Surface - Non-blooming
c. Durometer Hardness - 74 plus and minus 5
d. Tensile Strength - 1000 psi Minimum
e. Elongation - 175 percent Minimum

2. The gaskets shall be immune to attack by impurities normally found in water or wastewater. All gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 2000 - Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications, AA709Z, meeting Suffix B13 Grade 3, except as noted above. Where sleeve couplings are used in water containing chloramine or other fluids, which attack rubber materials, gasket material shall be compatible with the piping service and fluid utilized.

D. Insulating Couplings: Where insulating couplings are required, both ends of the coupling shall have a wedgeshaped gasket which assembles over a rubber sleeve of an insulating compound in order to obtain insulation of all coupling metal parts from the pipe.

E. Restrained Joints: Sleeve-type couplings on pressure lines shall be harnessed unless thrust restraint is provided by other means. Harnesses shall be designed by the pipe manufacturer in accordance with Manual M11, or as indicated. Harness sets shall be designed for the maximum test pressure of the pipe in which they are installed. Where harness sets are installed near the suction and discharge of the pump, harness bolts shall have zero elongation to prevent misalignment of the pump imparted by the thrust within the piping system.

2.6 DISMANTLING JOINTS
A. General: Dismantling joints shall be provided where indicated, and provide up to 5” of longitudinal adjustment and up to 2 degrees of misalignment in flanged piping systems. The flange spool shall meet the requirements of AWWA Class D Ring Flange, compatible with ANSI Class 125 and 150 bolt circles. The end and body ring shall meet the requirements of ASTM A536 ductile iron meeting or exceeding Grade 65- 45-12 for 3” to 12” sizes and ASTM A36 Carbon Steel with AWWA C207 Class D flanges for 14” to 72” sizes. Dismantling joints shall be provided with gaskets compounded for water and sewer service in accordance with ASTM D 2000. Dismantling joints shall have a fusion bonded epoxy coating. Bolts and nuts (including tie-rods) shall conform to the requirements of Section 05500 – Misc. Metals, Fasteners and Special Finishes. Dismantling joints shall be per Romac Industries, or approved equal.

2.7 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Flexible expansion joints shall be installed in the locations indicated on the drawings and shall be manufactured of ductile iron conforming to the material requirements of ASTM A536 and ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53. Foundry certification of material shall be readily available upon request.

B. Each flexible expansion joint shall be pressure tested prior to shipment against its own restraint to a minimum of 350 psi (250 psi for flexible expansion joints 2 inch and 30 inches diameter and larger.) A minimum 2:1 safety factor, determined from the published pressure rating, shall apply. Factory Mutual Approval for the 3 inch through 12 inch sizes is required.

C. Each flexible expansion joint shall consist of an expansion joint designed and cast as an integral part of a ball and socket type flexible joint, having a minimum per ball deflection of: 20º, 2” - 12”; 15º, 14” - 36”; 12º, 42”- 48” and 4-inches minimum expansion. Additional expansion sleeves shall be available and easily added or removed at the factory or in the field. Both standardized mechanical joint and flange end connections shall be available.

Piping General
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15000-5 D. All internal surfaces (wetted parts) shall be lined with a minimum of 15 mils of fusion bonded epoxy conforming to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C213. Sealing gaskets shall be constructed of EPDM. The coating shall meet ANSI/NSF-61.

E. Exterior surfaces shall be coated with a minimum of 6 mils of fusion bonded epoxy conforming to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C116/A21.16.

F. Appropriately sized polyethylene sleeves, meeting ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5, shall be included for direct buried applications.

G. Manufacturer’s certification of compliance to the above standards and requirements shall be readily available upon request. The purchaser (or owner) shall reserve the right to inspect the manufacturer’s facility for compliance. All flexible expansion joints shall be FLEX-TEND as manufactured by EBAA Iron, INC.

Eastland, TX., U.S.A.

2.8 PIPE THREADS
A. Pipe threads shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (inch), and be made up with Teflon tape unless otherwise indicated

2.9 GENERAL
A. Pipes, fittings and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Divisions 2 - Sitework and 15 - Mechanical.

B. Lined Piping Systems: The lining manufacturer shall take full responsibility for the complete, final product and its application. Pipe ends and joints of lined pipes at screwed flanges shall be epoxy-coated to assure continuous protection.

C. Core Drilling: Where core drilling is required for pipes passing through existing concrete, core drilling locations shall be determined by radiograph of concrete construction to avoid damage to embedded raceways and reinforcing bars.

D. Cleanup: After completion of the WORK, cuttings, joining and wrapping materials, and other scattered debris shall be removed from the Site. The entire piping system shall be handed over in a clean and functional condition.

2.10 RESTRAINED FLANGE COUPLING ADAPTER
A. Restrained flanged coupling adapter (RFCA) shall be used where indicated on the project drawings and to connect plain end IPS sizes steel pipe or ductile iron pipe to a flanged pipe or fitting. Coupling shall be supplied with pipe restrained for the plan end pipe rated for the application.

B. If installed on potable water lines, all RFCAs shall be NSF 61 certified and rated to be installed on potable water systems.

C. Flange shall be compatible with ANSI class 125 and 150 bolt circles.

D. Each RFCA must have a minimum joint deflection of 3 degrees.

E. Manufacturer

1. Romac or Engineer Approved Equal.

Piping General
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15000-6

2.11 STAINLESS STEEL RESTRAINED FLEXIBLE/REPAIR COUPLING A. Stainless steel restrained flexible repair couplings shall be compatible with the specified pipe material indicated on the plans.

B. All SS restrained flexible repair couplings shall be constructed of 304 SS and be equipped with an internal EPDM gasket.

C. If installed on potable water lines, all couplings shall be NSF 61 certified and rated to be installed on potable water systems.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION

3.1 SERVICES OF SUPPLIER
A. Piping shall be installed in accordance with the respective piping material Sections within Division 02 and 15. - END OF SECTION -
Ductile Iron Pipe, Fittings, and Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15003-1 SECTION 15003

DUCTILE IRON PIPE, FITTINGS, AND VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Ductile iron pipe for water and other liquids shall be furnished in the sizes, classes, grades, or nominal thickness and joint types as specified herein or indicated on the Contract drawings.

B. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to furnish and install all ductile iron piping systems specified herein and as shown on the Contract drawings. Each system shall be installed complete with all applicable fittings, flanges, hangers, supports, anchors, expansion joints, flexible connections, valves, wall castings, sleeves, and accessories to provide a functional system as specified.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all insulation, lining and coating, piping identification, testing, cleaning, disinfecting, excavation, backfill and/or encasement specified herein or as shown on the Contract drawings.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all tools, equipment, materials, and supplies and shall perform all labor necessary to complete installation of ductile iron piping systems as shown on the Contract drawings and specified herein.

1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Comply with the reference specifications of the GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

B. Commercial Standards:

ANSI/ASME B16.1 Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250.

ANSI/ASME B18.22.1 Plain Washers
ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15 Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges.

ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water.

ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service ANSI/AWWA C500 Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service ANSI/AWWA C504 Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves
ANSI/AWWA C507 Ball Valves, 6 In. Through 48 In
ANSI/AWWA C508 Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2-in. Through 24 In ANSI/AWWA C509 Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service ANSI/AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances ANSI/AWWA C606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints.

ASTM A126 Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings ASTM A193 Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Ductile Iron Pipe, Fittings, and Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15003-2 Applications
ASTM A194 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both
ASTM A276 Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes ASTM A395 Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures
ASTM A536 Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM B62 Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings ASTM D698 Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort
ASTM D1557 Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort

1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit complete shop drawings for approval in accordance with SUBMITTALS of the GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and as specified herein.

B. Shop drawings shall include all ductile iron pipes, fittings, flanges, gaskets, couplers, hangers, supports, wall castings, sleeves, valves, and all required appurtenances indicated on the Contract drawings or as specified herein necessary to provide a complete, operable piping system as specified.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall submit for review and approval complete piping lay-out drawings showing piping, fittings, couplers, hangers, supports, wall castings, sleeves, and all required appurtenances indicated on the Contract drawings or as specified herein necessary to provide a complete, operable piping system as specified. Layout drawings shall indicate all interfaces with other systems being installed which may cause interference with the piping system being installed.

D. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to coordinate all work being performed and review all shop drawings to insure that no unnecessary interferences exist.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall submit as part of the shop drawings for ductile iron piping a statement from the pipe manufacturer certifying that all pipes is being fabricated per the requirements of these specifications.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection of ductile iron pipe manufacturing, grooving, lining and coating shall be at the discretion of the INSPECTOR.

B. All wall castings shall be shop inspected.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing access to manufacturing and/or fabricating facilities at all times when so requested by the INSPECTOR.

D. Manufacturer shall perform Notched Charpy impact tests on at least one sample machined from the pipe wall during each hour to assure the desired toughness of the pipe.

E. Manufacturer shall perform Hydrostatic testing on pipe in conformance with AWWA C151.

F. Each pipe shall have clearly marked on each piece the words "DUCTILE IRON", the weight, class (nominal thickness) and the casting date.

G. Each piece of grooved end pipe shall have the groove type (flexible or rigid) clearly marked on each end of the Ductile Iron Pipe, Fittings, and Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15003-3 pipe.

H. All valves shall be tested in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and applicable AWWA/ANSI specifications.

Ductile Iron Pipe, Fittings, and Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15003-4 PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All pipes, fittings, flanges, and valves shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects prior to shipment. All defective pipes, fittings, flanges, and valves shall be rejected and replaced.

B. Lining: All pipes and fittings shall be cement lined per ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4.

C. Coating: All pipes, fittings, flanges, and valves shall be provided with coating in accordance with Division 09 – Finishes.

D. Ductile iron piping systems shall have design temperature limit of 200 degree F, unless otherwise noted.

E. Fasteners: All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be made of Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted.

F. Insulating connections: Protection shall be provided at all dissimilar metal connections.

1. General: Insulating gaskets, sleeves, washers, bushings, unions, couplings, or flanges, as appropriate, shall be used for joining pipes of dissimilar metals, and for piping systems where corrosion control and cathodic protection are required regardless of whether or not shown on Contract drawings.

2. Material: Insulating connections shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 15000 – Piping, General.

2.2 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
A. General: Ductile iron pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 and Cement Lined per ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4.

B. Thickness: Ductile iron pipe shall be provided in accordance with the thickness class listed below:

PIPE SIZE MINIMUM THICKNESS CLASS
4" to 16" 53
18" 54
20" 55
24" and LARGER 56

1. Thickness complies with ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 for minimum pipe wall thickness for threaded flanges.

2.3 FITTINGS
A. Fasteners: All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be made of Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted.Grooved and Shouldered Fittings.

1. Sizes 4" - 36": Grooved Ductile Iron per ANSI/AWWA C606-06, Wall Thickness per ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 or C153/A21.53, Center-to-End dimensions per ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10, Cement Lined per ANSI/AWWA
C104/A21.4.

PIPE SIZE MAX WORKING PRESSURE PSI
4" 500
6" - 8" 400
10" - 12" 350
Ductile Iron Pipe, Fittings, and Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15003-5 14" - 18" 250
20" and LARGER 150

2. Couplings: Per ANSI/AWWA C606-06 with Buna-N Rubber Gasket.

B. Mechanical or Push-on Joint Fittings

1. Only when specified or shown on Contract drawings, all ductile iron rubber gasket, push-on, or mechanical joint fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10.

2. Joints: Per ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 with Buna-N Rubber Gasket.

2.4 PIPE FLANGES
A. Flanges

1. Sizes 4" - 48": Class 125 Flat Face, drilled per ANSI B16.1, Ductile Iron, Threaded, ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15.

B. Blind Flanges

1. Sizes 4" - 48": Class 125 Flat Face, drilled per ANSI B16.1, Ductile Iron.

C. Gaskets

1. Sizes 4" - 48": Buna-N Rubber, 1/8" Thick, Full Face.

D. Bolts

1. Studs: 316 Stainless Steel ASTM 193 Grade B8M.

2. Nuts: 316 Stainless steel ASTM 194 Grade 8M.

3. Washers: 316 Stainless Steel ANSI B18.22.1

4. Assemble with anti-seize compound.

2.5 VALVES
A. General:

1. Valves with pneumatic, hydraulic, and electric motor operators and controls shall be in accordance with Division 17 – Instrumentation and Control of these specifications.

2. Valves with manual operators shall be as specified herein.

B. Fasteners: All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be made of Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 HANDLING
A. Pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be handled in a manner that will insure installation in sound, undamaged condition.

B. Pipe and fittings with cement mortar or glass lining shall be handled with rubber covered hooks or other type of equipment to prevent damage to the cement lining.

C. Bare fork lift arms, hooks, or chains shall not be inserted into open ends.

D. Pipe and fittings in which the lining has been damaged shall be immediately removed from the job site and replaced.

3.2 STORAGE
Ductile Iron Pipe, Fittings, and Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15003-6 A. All pipe and fittings shall be stored off the ground.

B. Pipe ends shall be covered to prevent foreign matter from entering the pipe during storage.

C. Pipe shall be stacked using suitable lumber between rows to prevent damage to pipe.

D. Any pipe that becomes damaged or unidentifiable due to improper storage shall be rejected and immediately removed from the job site.

3.3 REPAIR OF CEMENT MORTAR LINING
A. When approved and witnessed by the INSPECTOR, small and readily accessible damaged areas of cement mortar lining may be repaired in conformance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 and the following:

1. Cut out the damaged lining to the metal, with square edges.

2. Thoroughly wet the cut out area and adjoining lining.

3. With the damaged area cleaned and the adjoining lining wet, spread the mortar evenly over the area to be patched.

4. After the lining patch has become firm and adheres well to the surface, finish it with a wet 3" or 4" paint brush or similar soft bristle brush.

5. The repaired lining shall be kept moist by tying canvas wet burlap over the ends of the pipe or fitting for 24 hours.

6. After the lining patch is dry and hard, the asphaltic coating shall be replaced using approved coating material.

B. Repair mortar shall be in conformance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 and the following formula:

1. Cement Mortar mix by volume:
3 parts Portland Cement
2 parts clean sand
Necessary clean water for 5" to 8" slump

2. Sand shall be clean, free of clay, and screened through a No. 20 screen.

3.4 CUTTING PIPE
A. Cutting of pipe shall be done in a neat manner, without damage to the pipe or the lining.

B. Cuts shall be smooth, straight, and at right angles to the pipe axis.

C. Pipe shall be cut using a portable guillotine saw, abrasive wheel "cut-off" saw, or milling cutter only. Use of gas torches for cutting pipe will not be permitted.

D. Field cut holes for saddles shall be with mechanical cutters. Gas torch cutting will not be permitted.

E. After cutting, the end of the pipe shall be dressed with a file or power grinder to remove all roughness and sharp edges.

F. All damaged or removed cement mortar lining shall be repaired in accordance with Section 03300 – Cast-InPlace Concrete of these specifications.

3.5 CLEANING
A. The interior of all pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter prior to installation, and shall be kept clean until the work has been accepted.

Ductile Iron Pipe, Fittings, and Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15003-7 B. Before jointing, all joint contact surfaces shall be wire brushed, wiped clean, and kept clean until jointing is completed.

C. Flange faces shall be wire brushed and cleaned to remove all oil, grease, loose primer, mill scale or any other foreign matter which could affect the proper seating of the gasket.

D. When pipe installation is stopped, precautions shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe.

E. Prior to testing, the entire pipeline shall be flushed until the flushing water runs clear and clean.

F. Cleaning for final acceptance shall be in conformance with Section 02515 – Pipeline Testing and Disinfection.

3.6 ALIGNMENT
A. Piping shall be installed to the lines and grades indicated on the Contract drawings.

B. Pipelines intended to be straight shall be laid straight Deflections from a straight line or grade shall not exceed the values stipulated in Table 5 of ANSI/AWWA C600, unless specially designed approved bells and spigots are provided.

C. Batter boards, laser beam equipment, or survey shall be used in all pipe installations to maintain alignment and grade.

D. Batter boards, if used, shall be erected at intervals not to exceed 25 feet.

E. All pipe subgrades shall be determined and checked by survey.

F. If laser equipment is used, periodic elevation measurements shall be made with survey equipment to verify accuracy of grade or elevation. If such measurements indicate thermal deflection of the laser due to differences between ground temperature and the air temperature within the pipe, steps shall be taken to prevent further thermal deflections.

3.7 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide surveyed "as-built" drawings for all piping installed.

B. "As-built" drawings shall be provided for buried pipe installations as well as pipe installed in tunnels, galleries, inside buildings, or above ground outside.

C. For buried pipe installations, surveyed "as-built" shall include the elevation and location of pipe, valves, and all other pertinent information on the installation, as well as all existing piping or structures in the immediate area.

D. For buried pipe installations, survey shall be taken of location and elevations of all piping installed prior to any encasement or backfill.

E. For buried, encased piping, survey shall be taken both prior to encasement and after the encasement is in place.

F. Drawings shall be forwarded to the ENGINEER for review and approval within five days after installation is completed.

G. Progress payment will be withheld for all pipe installations for which "as-built" drawings are not received as specified.

Ductile Iron Pipe, Fittings, and Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15003-8

3.8 LAYING PIPE
A. Buried pipe shall be protected from lateral displacement by use of the specified pipe embedment and/or encasement.

B. Under no circumstance shall pipe be laid in water.

C. All pipes will be laid on native material unless otherwise indicated on the Contract drawings.

D. All pipe subgrade shall be compacted to 95% of maximum density per ASTM D698, unless otherwise indicated on the Contract drawings.

E. All subgrade shall have compaction tests taken and be approved by the INSPECTOR prior to pipe installation.

F. When pipe laying is interrupted, or stopped at the end of the work shift, the open ends of pipe shall be sealed with a watertight plug, or other means acceptable to the INSPECTOR, to prevent water from entering the pipe.

G. All fresh potable/Industrial water piping shall be completely encased in blue concrete. No pipe will be encased prior to testing and without approval of the INSPECTOR.

3.9 FIELD JOINTS
A. All joints in buried locations shall be grooved-end type "flexible" joints unless otherwise indicated in these specifications or on the Contract drawings.

B. All joints of piping above ground outside, in tunnels, galleries, or inside buildings shall be grooved-end type "rigid" joints unless otherwise indicated in these specifications or on the Contract drawings.

C. All buried ductile iron pipe joints shall be field coated with a minimum 12 mils of an approved thixotropic coal tar coating. The coating shall cover the entire joint, including fasteners.

D. When specified or indicated on the Contract drawings, bells on flush mounted wall castings and wall sleeves shall be mechanical joint type with tapped holes for tie rods or stud bolts.

E. When specified or indicated on the Contract drawings, all wall castings other than flush mounted castings and wall sleeves shall be standard mechanical joint flanged joints as indicated.

F. Insulating Connections: All insulating connections shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Care shall be exercised to prevent damage to insulating fittings, while making up the joints.

3.10 GROOVED END JOINTS
A. When specified or indicated on the Contract drawings, grooved end couplings shall be installed in accordance with AWWA C606 and the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

B. Completed joints in piping above grade or within tunnels, galleries or buildings shall be rigid and shall not allow angular deflection or longitudinal movement.

C. Completed joints in buried piping shall be flexible and shall allow limited angular deflection and longitudinal movement, in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recommended tolerances.

D. Except for closure pieces approved by the INSPECTOR, field grooving of pipe will not be permitted.

1. All field grooving allowed will be in strict accordance with AWWA C606.

Ductile Iron Pipe, Fittings, and Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15003-9

2. Only grooving tools designed for cut-grooving of ductile iron pipe will be allowed for field grooving.

Roll-grooving of field grooved pipe will not be allowed.

3. Cut-grooving tools shall be designed to be driven around a stationary pipe, shall have integral pipe stop to provide proper groove depth, and stops in the tool to provide proper dimension from the pipe end to the groove ("A" dimension).

4. Prior to beginning field grooving operations, the CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval the grooving tools intended for use.

5. All field grooving will be done in the presence of and approved by the INSPECTOR.

E. The outside surface of the pipe between the groove and the pipe end shall be smooth and free from deep pits or swells.

F. All rust, loose scale, oil, grease, and dirt shall be removed prior to installation of the coupler.

G. Following installation and before backfill or encasement, all joints in buried piping shall be thoroughly coated with a minimum of 12 mils of approved coal tar coating.

1. Joints may be wrapped with a minimum of 40 mils of approved pipe tape wrap.

Ductile Iron Pipe, Fittings, and Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15003-10

3.11 MECHANICAL JOINTS
A. When specified or indicated on the Contract drawings, mechanical joints shall be carefully assembled in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 and ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 and the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. If effective seating is not obtained, the joint shall be disassembled, thoroughly cleaned, and reassembled.

C. Bolts shall be uniformly tightened to the torque values listed in Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11.

D. Over tightening of bolts to compensate for poor installation will not be permitted.

E. Holes in mechanical joints with tie rods shall be carefully aligned to permit installation of the tie rods.

F. In flange and mechanical joint pieces, holes in the mechanical joint bells and the flanges shall straddle the top (or side for vertical piping) centerline. The top centerline shall be marked on each flange and mechanical joint piece at the foundry.

G. Minimum Number of Tie Rods:

PIPE SIZE OPERATING PRESSURE (PSI)
50 75 100 125 150 200
3", 4", 6" 2 2 2 2 2 2
8" 2 2 2 2 4 4
10" 2 4 4 4 4 6
12" 2 4 4 6 6 6
14" 4 6 6 8 8 10
16" 6 6 6 8 8 12
18" 6 6 8 10 10
20" 8 10 10 10 12
24" 10 10 12 16
30" 6 8 10 12 14 18
36" 8 10 14 16 20
42" 6 8 12 14 16 22
48" 8 10 14 18 20 28

3.12 PUSH-ON JOINTS
A. When specified or indicated on the Contract drawings, joints shall be installed in conformance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 and the pipe manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for proper jointing operations.

B. All joint surfaces shall be properly lubricated with approved heavy vegetable soap solution immediately before the joint is completed.

C. Lubricant shall be suitable for use in potable water, shall be stored in closed containers, and shall be kept clean at all times.

D. Each spigot end of the pipe shall be suitably beveled to facilitate assembly.

Ductile Iron Pipe, Fittings, and Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15003-11

3.13 FLANGED JOINTS
A. When specified or indicated on the Contract drawings, flanges shall conform to ANSI B16.1, B16.2, and B21.10.

B. Bolts shall be tightened gradually and at a uniform rate to facilitate uniform gasket compression.

C. Care shall be taken when connecting to pumping equipment to insure that pipe stresses are not transmitted to the pump flanges.

D. All flanged piping connecting to pumping equipment shall be permanently supported so that accurate matching of bolt holes and uniform contact over the entire surface of abutting pump and piping flanges are obtained before the installation of any bolts in these flanges.

E. Pump connection piping shall be free to move parallel to its longitudinal centerline while the bolts are being tightened.

F. Each pump shall be leveled, aligned, and placed into position, but shall not be grouted until the initial fit-up and alignment of the pipe is completed.

G. Each pump shall be grouted before final bolting of the connecting piping.

3.14 FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS
A. When specified or indicated on the Contract drawings, flanged coupling adapters shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

3.15 MECHANICAL COUPLINGS
A. When specified or indicated on the Contract drawings, mechanical couplings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

B. A space of at least 1/4", and not more than 1", shall be left between the pipe ends.

C. All assembly bolts shall be uniformly tightened so that the coupling is free from leaks and all parts of the coupling are square and symmetrical with the pipe.

D. Following installation of the coupling, damaged areas of shop coatings of the pipe and coupling shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the INSPECTOR.

3.16 WALL CASTINGS
A. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Contract drawings, wall castings shall be provided where ductile iron pipe passes through concrete walls.

B. Where a flange and mechanical joint piece is to connect to a mechanical joint wall casting, the bolt holes in the bell of the wall casting shall straddle the top (or side for vertical piping) center line of the casting and shall align with the bolt holes in the flange and mechanical joint piece. The top center line shall be marked on the wall casting at the foundry.

3.17 WALL SLEEVES
A. Wall sleeves are to be provided where ductile iron pipe passes through concrete floors and where otherwise specified or indicated on the Contract drawings.

B. Wall sleeves are to be sealed using modular casing seals ("link seals") and approved caulking on both sides of the floor penetration.

Ductile Iron Pipe, Fittings, and Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15003-12

3.18 REDUCERS
A. Reducers, adjacent to flow meters and pumps or in other locations as specified or indicated on the Contract drawings, shall be eccentric pattern, installed with the straight side on top so that air traps are not formed. All other reducers shall be concentric pattern.

3.19 OUTLETS
A. Where a 12" or smaller branch outlet is specified or indicated on the Contract drawings, and the diameter of the line pipe is at least twice the diameter of the branch, either a tee or factory welded-on boss shall be used.

B. Connections of gauges to 6" and smaller pipe shall be made using a tee complete with blind flange drilled and tapped to accept the gauge piping specified.

C. Connections of gauges to 8" and larger piping shall be made by means of a factory welded-on boss.

D. Tapping saddles shall be used for "hot taps" in specified instances or as shown on the Contract drawings.

1. Use of tapping saddles must be approved in writing by the ENGINEER prior to use in every instance.

3.20 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING PIPING
A. Connections between new work and existing piping shall be made using fittings submitted and approved by the ENGINEER for each separate condition encountered.

B. Each connection to existing pipe shall be made at a time and under conditions which will least impact normal plant operations, and as authorized in writing by the ENGINEER.

C. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for making provisions for cutting of existing pipe when necessary, using approved mechanical means. Flame cutting of pipe will not be allowed.

D. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for making provisions for dewatering existing lines and for disposal of water from the dewatering operation.

E. Prior to construction, the CONTRACTOR shall submit for review and approval detailed procedures for pressure testing and the making of final connections to existing lines.

F. When connecting to existing fresh (Potable/Industrial) water lines, all new piping and fittings shall be cleaned and disinfected prior to making the connection.

1. Provisions shall be made to prevent any cross-connection and contamination of existing lines.

2. Trench water, mud, or other contaminants shall not be allowed to enter the lines.

G. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for disinfection and chlorination of all fresh (Potable/Industrial) water lines after connections are made in conformance with these specifications.

3.21 CONCRETE ENCASEMENT
A. All fresh (Potable/Industrial) water piping shall be encased in blue concrete, per the detail in the Contract drawings.

B. All other pipe encasement shall be installed where indicated on the Contract drawings, per the detail in the Contract drawings.

C. Concrete and reinforcement for encasement shall be as specified in the Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

D. All pipes to be encased shall be suitably supported and blocked in proper position.

Ductile Iron Pipe, Fittings, and Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15003-13 E. All pipes to be encased shall be anchored to prevent floating.

F. All pipes to be encased shall be tested as specified and the INSPECTOR will approve the pipe installation prior to encasement.

Ductile Iron Pipe, Fittings, and Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15003-14

3.22 REACTION ANCHORAGE
A. All buried piping shall have thrust blocks placed at all changes of direction, tees, y-branches, valves, and at ends of pipe runs.

B. All piping with mechanical couplings or mechanical joints subject to internal pressure shall be anchored to prevent separation of joints.

C. All mechanical joint tees, y-branches, bends deflecting 22-1/2 degrees or more, and plugs which are installed in piping shall be provided with approved retainer glands.

D. When placing thrust blocks, the concrete shall extend from the pipe to solid, undisturbed earth, and all joints shall remain accessible for repair.

E. The dimensions of all concrete blocking shall be as indicated on the Contract drawings, or as directed by the INSPECTOR to accommodate field conditions.

F. If adequate support against undisturbed earth cannot be obtained, metal harness anchorages shall be provided.

1. Metal harness anchorages shall consist of steel rods extending across the joint and securely anchored to the pipe.

G. All reaction anchorage and/or seismic anchorage shall be installed prior to pressure testing of any pipe.

H. Seismic anchorage for piping installed above ground outside, inside tunnels, galleries, or buildings shall be in conformance with the California Building Code.

3.23 PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING
A. All pipe installations shall be hydrostatically tested for a period of two hours at pressure specified.

B. All pressure testing shall be done in the presence of, and approved by, the INSPECTOR.

C. All pipe supports and reaction anchorage/seismic anchorage must be installed prior to pressure testing.

1. Buried pipe may be center-loaded to preclude movement prior to testing.

D. The high point of all pipe installed shall be vented.

E. All leaking piping must be completely retested following repairs of leaks.

F. Acceptable leakage is zero.

G. If changes are made to piping installation after initial testing, such as addition of valves, routing changes, branches, etc., the entire line must be retested.

H. Testing against valves will not be permitted. All sections of pipe to be tested must be blind-flanged.

I. All pipelines tested shall be approved by the INSPECTOR, and a Pipeline Test Report completed for each test.

3.24 DISINFECTION
A. Disinfection of ductile iron pipe shall be performed in conformance with Section 02515 – Pipeline Testing and Disinfection.

3.25 VALVE INSTALLATION AND TESTING
A. Installation and field testing of valves shall be performed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, AWWA Standards, and the applicable provisions of Section 15200 – Valves, General.

Ductile Iron Pipe, Fittings, and Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15003-15 B. All field testing shall be witnessed and approved by the INSPECTOR. - END OF SECTION -
Piping Identification and Signage Systems
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15005-1 SECTION 15005

PIPING IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNAGE SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide safety signs and identification devices for all exposed piping and valves using color bands, lettering, flow direction arrows, and related permanent identification devices, and all appurtenant works, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Commercial Standards: ANSI A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit samples of all types of identification devices and signs to be used in the work.

B. All submittals shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 –Submittals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer and model shall be described on the Drawings or Engineer approved equal.

B. The manufacturer shall provide a 2-year equipment warranty.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING
A. Identification of all exposed pipe shall be accomplished by color-coding with bands or painting of the pipe and by lettering as specified in Part 3, herein. Color bands shall either be painted directly upon the pipe or shall be pressure-sensitive adhesive-backed vinyl cloth or plastic tape.

B. Each pipe identification shall consist of two color-coded bands, a printed label identifying the name of the pipe, and a flow arrow to indicate direction of flow in the pipe. All labels shall be preprinted on pressuresensitive adhesive-backed vinyl cloth or plastic tape. Arrows shall be die-cut of the same type of material as the labels. Arrows and labels may be stenciled on the pipes at the discretion of the Engineer.

C. Letter sizes and colors for lettering, arrows and background shall conform to ANSI A13.1.

2.2 IDENTIFICATION OF VALVES AND SHORT PIPE LENGTHS
A. Identifying devices for valves and the sections of pipe that are too short to be identified with color bands, lettered labels, and arrows shall be identified with metal or plastic tags as specified herein.

B. Metal tags shall be supplied with embossed lettering. Plastic tags shall be of solid black phenolic with white letters. All tags shall be designed to be attached, by chain, to the valves or short pipes.

2.3 SAFETY SIGNS
A. Color, legend and layout shall conform to OSHA 1910.145 requirements.

B. “DANGER” Signs: Two-inch high white letters “Danger” in red oval surrounded by a rectangular black field.

Text wording 1½-inch high black capital letters on white field.

Piping Identification and Signage Systems
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15005-2 C. “CAUTION” Signs: Two-inch high yellow letters on black field. Text wording 1½-inch high black capital letters on yellow field.

D. Chemical precaution signs:

1. In accordance with ANSI Z129.1

2. 12-inch x 14-inch

3. Made to withstand most chemicals. Special ink for printing to be absorbed into sign surface.

Ultraviolet inhibitors and clear face coating for resisting fading and scratching. Semi-rigid linear polyethylene.

PART 3 –EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. All labels and identification tags shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, and shall be neat and uniform in appearance. All such tags or labels shall be readily visible from all normal working locations.

3.2 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve tags shall be attached to the valve or structure by means of a chain.

3.3 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Each pipe shall be identified at intervals of 30-feet, and at least one time in each room. Piping shall also be identified at a point approximately within 2-feet of all turns, elbows, valves and on the upstream side of all distribution fittings or branches.

B. Pipe identification shall consist of 2 elements, i.e., a lettered label, and a directional label.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Application of identifying devices shall conform to the following color codes in Table in Section 09800 – Special Coatings, Part 3.6 of these specifications.
- END OF SECTION -
Pipe Supports
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15006-1 SECTION 15006

PIPE SUPPORTS
PART 1 – GENERAL

2.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide pipe supports, hangers, guides, and anchors, complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 – Submittals.

B. Shop Drawings shall include the following information:

1. Drawings of pipe supports, hangers, anchors and guides

2. Calculations for special supports and anchors.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Compliance: All piping systems and pipe connections to equipment shall be properly anchored and supported to prevent undue deflection, vibration, dislocation due to line pressures, and stresses on piping, equipment and structures. All supports and parts thereof shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping, except as supplemented or modified below. Supports for plumbing piping shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the applicable plumbing code or local administration requirements.

B. Structural Members: Wherever possible, pipes shall be supported from structural members. Where it is necessary to frame structural members between existing members, such supplementary members shall be provided. All supplementary members shall be in accordance with the requirements of the building code and the American Institute of Steel Construction.

C. Pipe Hangers: Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in all conditions of operation, allowing free expansion and contraction of the piping, and preventing excessive stress on equipment. All hangers shall have a means of vertical adjustment after erection. Hangers shall be designed to prevent becoming disengaged by any movement of the supported pipe. Hangers subject to shock or thrust imposed by the actuation of safety valves, shall include hydraulic shock suppressors. All hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only.

D. Hangers Subject to Horizontal Movements: At hanger locations where lateral or axial movement is anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit such movement. Where horizontal pipe movement is greater than 1/2-inch, or where the hanger rod deflection from the vertical is greater than 4 degrees from the cold to the hot position of the pipe, the hanger rod and structural attachment shall be offset in such a manner that the rod is vertical in the hot position.

E. Spring-Type Hangers: Spring-type pipe hangers shall be provided for piping subject to vibration or vertical expansion and contraction, such as engine exhausts and similar piping. All spring-type hangers shall be sized to the manufacturer's printed recommendations and the loading conditions encountered. Variable spring supports shall be provided with means to limit misalignment, buckling, eccentric loading, or to prevent overstressing of the spring, and with means to indicate at all times the compression of the spring. Supports shall be capable of accommodating at least 4 times the maximum travel due to thermal expansion.

Pipe Supports
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15006-2 F. Thermal Expansion: Wherever expansion and contraction of piping is expected, a sufficient number of expansion loops or joints shall be provided, together with the necessary rolling or sliding supports, anchors, guides, pivots, and restraints permitting the piping to expand and contract freely in directions away from the anchored points. All components shall be structurally suitable to withstand all loads imposed.

G. Heat Transmission: Supports, hangers, anchors, and guides shall be so designed and insulated, that excessive heat will not be transmitted to the structure or to other equipment.

H. Riser Supports: Where practical, risers shall be supported on each floor with riser clamps and lugs, independent of the connected horizontal piping.

I. Freestanding Piping: Free-standing pipe connections to equipment such as chemical feeders and pumps shall be firmly attached to steel frames fabricated from angles, channels, or I-beams anchored to the structure.

Exterior, free-standing overhead piping shall be supported on fabricated pipe stands consisting of pipe columns anchored to concrete footings, with horizontal, welded steel angles and U-bolts or clamps securing the pipes.

J. Materials of Construction:

1. General: All pipe support assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors, shall be steel construction, galvanized after fabrication, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Submerged Supports: All submerged piping, as well as piping, conduits, and equipment in hydraulic structures within 24 inches of the water level, shall be supported with support, assemblies, including framing, hardware, constructed of Type 304 stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. All bolts and nuts shall be 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade B8M, for bolts and ASTM A 194, Grade 8M, for nuts.

K. Point Loads: Any meters, valves, heavy equipment, and other point loads on PVC, FRP, and other plastic pipes, shall be supported on both sides, according to manufacturer's recommendations to avoid undue pipe stresses and failures. To avoid point loads, all supports on PVC, FRP, and other plastic piping shall be equipped with extra wide pipe saddles or galvanized steel shields.

L. Noise Reduction: To reduce transmission of noise in piping systems, all copper tubes in buildings and structures shall be wrapped with a 2-inch wide strip of rubber fabric or similar, suitable material at each pipe support, bracket, clip, or hanger.

2.2 SUPPORT SPACING
A. Supports for piping with the longitudinal axis in approximately a horizontal position shall be spaced to prevent excessive sag, bending, and shear stresses in the piping, with special consideration given where components such as flanges and valves impose concentrated loads. Pipe support spacing shall not exceed the maximum spans in the tables below. For temperatures other than ambient temperatures, or those listed, and for other piping materials or wall thicknesses, the pipe support spacing shall be modified in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Vertical supports shall be provided to prevent the pipe from being overstressed from the combination of all loading effects.

Pipe Supports
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15006-3

1. Support Spacing for Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 Steel Pipe:

Nominal Pipe Diameter
(inches)
Maximum Span
(feet)
½ 6
¾ and 1 8
1¼ to 2 10
3 12
4 14
6 17
8 and 10 19
12 and 14 23
16 and 18 25
20 and greater 30

2. Support Spacing for Welded Fabricated Steel Pipe:

The support spacing shall be designed so that the stress on the pipe does not exceed 5,000 psi.

Maximum deflection of pipe shall be limited to 1/360th of the span and shall be calculated by using the formula:

L = (7500tD/ (32t+D)) 1/2
Where: t = Thickness (inches)
D = Diameter (inches)
L = Maximum span (feet)

3. Support Spacing for Ductile-Iron Pipe:

Nominal Pipe Diameter
(inches)
Maximum Span
(feet)
All Diameters Two supports per pipe length or 10 feet (one of the 2 supports located at joint)

4. Support Spacing for Copper Tubing:

Nominal Pipe Diameter
(inches)
Maximum Span
(feet)
½ to 1½ 6
2 to 4 10
6 and greater 12

5. Support Spacing for Schedule 40 or 80 PVC Pipe:

Nominal Pipe Diameter
(inches)
Maximum Span
(at 100 degrees F)
(feet)
½ 4
3/4 4
1 5
1¼ 5
Pipe Supports
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15006-4 Nominal Pipe Diameter
(inches)
Maximum Span
(at 100 degrees F)
(feet)
1½ 5
2 6
3 7
4 8
6 10
8 11
10 12
12 13

2.3 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTS
A. Stock Parts: Where not specifically indicated, designs which are generally accepted as exemplifying good engineering practice and use stock or production parts, shall be utilized wherever possible. Such parts shall be locally available, new, of best commercial quality, designed and rated for the intended purpose.

B. Manufacturers or Equal:

1. TOLCO Inc.

2. Bergen-Paterson Pipe Support Corp., Woburn, MA;

3. Grinnell Corp. (Supply Sales Company), Cranston, RI;

4. NPS Products, Inc., Westborough, MA;

5. Power Piping Company, Pittsburgh, PA.

6. ZSI

7. Engineer approved equal.

2.4 COATING
A. Galvanizing: Unless otherwise indicated, all fabricated pipe supports other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports shall be blast-cleaned after fabrication and hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123 - Specifications for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

B. Other Coatings: Other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports, all supports shall receive protective coatings in accordance with the requirements of Section 09800 - Protective Coating.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: All pipe supports, hangers, brackets, anchors, guides and inserts shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. All concrete inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be coordinated with the formwork.

B. Appearance: Pipe supports and hangers shall be positioned to produce an orderly, neat piping system. All hanger rods shall be vertical, without offsets, unless noted otherwise. Hangers shall be adjusted to line up groups of pipes at the proper grade for drainage and venting, as close to ceilings or roofs as possible, without interference with other work.

Pipe Supports
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15006-5

3.2 FABRICATION
A. Quality Control: Pipe hangers and supports shall be fabricated and installed by experienced welders and fitters, using the best welding procedures available. Fabricated supports shall be neat in appearance without sharp corners, burrs, and edges.
- END OF SECTION -
Steel Pipe, Mortar Lined and Coated
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15026-1 SECTION 15026

STEEL PIPE, MORTAR LINED AND COATED
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORKED INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION
A. The work of this Section includes providing mortar-lined and mortar-coated steel pipe, including fittings and specials, complete in place.

1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, the current editions of the following apply to the WORK of this Section.

AWWA C200 Steel Water Pipe 6 Inch and Larger
AWWA C205 Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe-4 Inch and Larger-Shop Applied
AWWA C206 Field Welding for Steel Water Pipe Fittings
AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges
AWWA C208 Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings AWWA C602 Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines 4-inch and Larger-In Place AWWA M11 Steel Water Pipe - A Guide for Design and Installation

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The following shall be submitted in compliance with Section 01300.

1. Shop Drawings
a. Shop drawings showing dimensions and details of pipe, joint fittings, fitting specials, valves and appurtenances.
b. Joint and fitting wall construction details which indicate the type and thickness of cylinder; the position, type, size, and area of reinforcement; manufacturing tolerances; and all other pertinent information required for the manufacture of the product. c. Joint details shall be submitted where deep bell or butt strap joints are required for control of temperature stresses.
d. Fittings and specials details such as elbows, reducers, wyes, tees, crosses, outlets, connections and test bulkheads, and nozzles or other specials where shown which indicate amount and position of all reinforcement. All fittings and specials shall be properly reinforced to withstand the internal pressure, both circumferential and longitudinal, and the external loading conditions as indicated in the Contract Documents.
e. Material lists and steel reinforcement schedules which include and describe all materials to be utilized.
f. Full and complete information regarding location, type, size, and extent of all welds shall be shown on the shop drawings. The shop drawings shall distinguish between shop and field welds.
g. Shop drawings shall indicate by welding symbols or sketches the details of the welded joints, and the preparation of parent metal required to make them.

2. Design Calculations
a. Calculations supporting selected wall thickness.
b. Calculations supporting welded joint design.

Steel Pipe, Mortar Lined and Coated
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15026-2 B. Certificates

1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a certification stating that all pipe, special fittings, and other products or materials furnished under this Section of the Specifications comply with AWWA C200 and C205.

C. Test Reports

2. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish certified reports of the following tests:
a. Physical and chemical properties of all steel.
b. Hydrostatic test reports.
c. Results of production weld tests.
d. Upon request by the CITY, mill test reports on each sheet from which steel is rolled will be submitted.

1.4 INSPECTION
A. Factory Inspection
B. All pipes shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacturer in accordance with the provisions of AWWA C200 and C205, respectively, as supplemented by the requirements herein.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the CITY in writing of the manufacturing starting date not less than 14 calendar days prior to the start of any phase of the pipe manufacture.

1.5 WELDING
A. All welding procedures used to fabricate pipe shall be prequalified under the provisions of AWS D1.1.

B. Welding procedures shall be required for, but not necessarily limited to, longitudinal and girth or spiral welds for pipe cylinders, spigot and bell ring attachments, reinforcing plates and ring flange welds, and plates for lug connections.

C. All welding shall be done by skilled welders, welding operators, and tackers who have had adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used.

D. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of AWS D1.1 by an independent local, approved testing agency not more than 6 months prior to commencing work on the pipeline. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the WORK shall be used in qualification tests.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all material and bear the expense of qualifying welders.

1.6 TESTING
A. Except as modified herein, all materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C200 and C205, as applicable.

1. Shop Testing of Steel Pipe
a. After the joint configuration is completed and prior to lining with cement mortar, each length of pipe of each diameter and pressure class shall be shop tested and certified to a pressure of at least 80 percent of the yield strength of the pipe steel.
b. Production weld tests shall be conducted in compliance with AWWA C200. In addition to the frequency of tests required in AWWA C200, weld tests shall be conducted on each 2,000 feet of production welds and at any other times there is a change in the welding procedure or welding equipment.

Steel Pipe, Mortar Lined and Coated
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15026-3

2. Shop Testing of Steel Plate Special
a. Upon completion of welding, but before lining and coating, each special shall be bulkheaded and tested under a hydro-static pressure of not less than 1-1/2 times the design pressure; provided, that if straight pipe used in fabricating the specials has been previously tested and meets the requirements of the applicable piping Section, no further hydrostatic testing will be required; or provided, that all other welded seams are tested by the liquid penetrant inspection procedure conforming to ASTM E165, under Method “B” and “Leakage Testing” or where applicable by the soap and compressed air method at an air pressure of 25 psi. Any pin holes or porous welds which may be revealed by the test shall be chipped out and rewelded and the special retested.
b. No outside coating shall be applied over a seam prior to testing; however, mortar lining may be applied over a seam prior to hydrostatic testing, but under such conditions said pressure test shall be held on the pipe or fitting for a period of not less than 30 minutes.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall perform said material tests at no additional cost to the CITY. The CITY shall have the right to witness all testing conducted by the CONTRACTOR; provided, that the CONTRACTOR’s schedule is not delayed for the convenience of the CITY.

C. In addition to those tests specifically required, the CITY may request additional samples of any material including mixed concrete and lining and coating samples for testing by the CITY. The additional samples shall be furnished at no additional cost to the CITY.

D. All expenses incurred in making samples for certification of tests shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Mortar lined and coated steel pipe shall conform to AWWA C200 and C205, subject to the following supplemental requirements. The pipe shall be of the diameter and class shown, shall be furnished complete with rubber gaskets or welded joints, as indicated in the Contract Documents, and all specials and bends shall be provided as required for a complete piping system.

B. Specials are defined as fittings, closure pieces, bends, reducers, wyes, tees, crosses, outlets, manifolds, and other steel plate specials, wherever located, and all piping above ground or in structures.

C. Dimensions of fabricated steel pipe fittings shall comply with AWWA C208.

D. Pipe 14 inches in diameter and larger, the inside diameter after lining shall not be less than the nominal diameter specified or shown.

E. Pipe smaller than 14 inches in diameter may be furnished in standard outside diameters.

F. The pipe lining shall have smooth dense interior surfaces and shall be free from fractures, excessive interior surface crazing and roughness.

G. Closures and correction pieces shall be provided as required so that closures may be made due to different headings in the pipe laying operation and so that correction may be made to adjust the pipe laying to conform to pipe stationing shown on the Drawings.

H. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully liable for the cost of replacement or repair of pipe and specials which are damaged.

Steel Pipe, Mortar Lined and Coated
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15026-4 I. The CONTRACTOR shall legibly mark all pipes and specials in accordance with the laying schedule and marking diagram. Each pipe shall be numbered in sequence and said number shall appear on the laying schedule and marking diagram in its proper location for installation.

J. All special pipe sections and fittings shall be marked at each end indicating the top. The word “top” shall be painted or marked on the outside top spigot end of each pipe section.

2.2 STRUTTING
A. Adequate strutting shall be provided on all specials, fittings, and straight pipe so as to avoid damage to the pipe and fittings during handling, storage, hauling, and installation. In addition, the following requirements shall apply:

1. The strutting shall be placed as soon as practicable after the mortar lining has been applied and shall remain in place while the pipe is loaded, transported, unloaded, installed and backfilled at the jobsite.

2. The strutting materials, size, and spacing shall be adequate to support the earth backfill plus any greater loads which may be imposed by the backfilling and compaction equipment.

3. Any pipe damaged during handling, hauling, storage, or installation due to improper strutting shall be repaired or replaced.

4. The details of the strutting assembly shall be submitted for review by the CONTRACTOR prior to the start of pipe manufacture.

2.3 PIPE DESING CRITERIA
A. General design

1. The pipe shall be steel pipe, mortar-lined and mortar-coated, with rubber gasket or field welded joints as shown. The pipe shall consist of steel cylinder, either shop-lined or lined-in-place with portland cement-mortar with an exterior coating of cement mortar.

2. The pipe shall be designed, manufactured, tested, inspected, and marked according to applicable requirements of AWWA C200 except as hereinafter modified.

3. The pipe shall be of the diameter and indicated pressure class. The minimum steel cylinder thickness for each pipe size shall be as indicated.

4. Maximum pipe lengths for laying shall be 40 feet with shorter lengths provided as required.

B. Cylinder Thickness for Internal Pressure

1. For resistance to internal pressure, the thickness of the steel cylinder shall not be less than the greater of that determined by the following formulas:
a. T = P w D/2 b. T= P, D/2
Y/St Y/S w
Where: T = Steel cylinder thickness, inches
D = Outside diameter of steel cylinder, inches
Pw = Design working pressure, psi
Pt = Design transient pressure, psi
Y = Specified minimum yield point of steel, psi
Sw = Safety factor of 2.0 at design working pressure
St = Safety factor of 1.5 at design transient pressure
Steel Pipe, Mortar Lined and Coated
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15026-5

2. Unless otherwise indicated, Pw shall be assumed to equal the indicated pipe pressure class and Pt shall be assumed to equal 1.33 Pw. In no case shall the design stress (Y/Sw) exceed 16,500 psi at design working pressure, Pw, nor shall the design stress (Y/St) exceed 22,000 psi at design ransient pressure, Pt, nor shall the steel shell thickness be less than No. 10 gauge (0.135 in,) or the nominal pipe diameter divided by 240, whichever is greater, as show in the following table:

Nominal Pipe Minimum Cylinder
Diameter (in.) Thickness (in.)
6 – 30 0.135
36 0.150
42 0.175
48 0.200
54 0.225
C. Upon determination of cylinder thickness, for internal pressure, deflection of the pipe shall be checked by the following formula:

Defl x = DKWr3
EI+0.0614E’r3
Where: Defl x = Vertical deflection of pipe in inches, not to exceed 0.015 times the nominal diameter.

D = Deflection lag factor (1.0-1.5)
K = Bedding constant (0.1)
W = Vertical load on pipe, lb/in (see Notes 1 and 2)
R = Mean radius of pipe shell, inches
EI = Pipe wall stiffness, lb-in (see Note 3)
E’ = Modulus of soil reaction, lb/in 2 (1100 for 90 percent Standard Proctor; 1500 for 95 percent Standard Proctor; 2500 for 100 percent Standard Proctor; i.e., cement crushed rock)
Note 1 In the determination of the vertical load on the pipe, W, the trench condition shall normally apply unless an actual embankment condition exists or the trench width exceeds the transition width, in which case the embankment condition shall apply. Yard piping shall always be designed for an embankment condition. The CONTRACTOR is cautioned that depth of covers less than 3 feet, if permitted, shall be investigated for concentrated wheel loads.

Note 2 For depths of cover of 10 feet or greater, the earth load shall be computed assuming the trench/embankment condition as applicable. For depths of cover of less than 10 feet, HS-20 live load shall be included. For depths of cover of 3 feet or less, HS-20 live load plus impact shall be included.

The determination of live load and impact factors shall be as recommended by AASHTO in “Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.”
Note 3 Value of IE is based on the sum of the pipe wall stiffness, mortar lining and coating, and steel cylinder, assuming that it acts as a three-part laminar ring which considers no bond between the steel cylinder and the applied lining and coating. The term “pipe wall stiffness” as used herein is defined as EI, where “E” is the modulus of elasticity (E=30,000,000 psi for steel and E=4,000,000 psi for mortar) and “I” is the transverse moment of inertia per unit length of pipe wall, the factors in the forgoing expression to be dimensionally compatible.

Steel Pipe, Mortar Lined and Coated
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15026-6 Trench Condition:

Wd = CdwBd2
Where: Wd = Earth load, lb/ft
Cd = Load coefficient
Ku’ = 0.13
W = Unit weight of full, lb/cu ft 120 lb/ft3
Bd = Trench width at top of pipe, feet
Positive Projecting Embankment Condition:
` Wc = CcBc
2 Where: Wc = Earth load, lb/ft
Cc = Load coefficient
Ku = 0.13
W = Unit weight of full, lbs/cf 120 lb/ft3
Bc = Trench width at top of pipe, feet
rsd = Settlement ratio
P = Projection Ratio
C. If the calculated deflection, Deflx, exceeds 0.015 times the nominal diameter, the composite pipe section shall be thickened or the quality of pipe zone backfill shall be improved to achieve a higher soil modulus.

2.4 DESIGN SPECIALS
A. Except as otherwise provided herein, materials, fabrication and shop testing of straight pipe shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C200. Dimensions for fittings shall conform to AWWA C208. The minimum thickness of plate for pipe from which specials are to be fabricated shall be the greater of that determined by the following two formulas:
a. T=Pw D/2 b. T= P,D/2
Y/Sw Y/St
Where: T = Steel cylinder thickness, inches
D = Outside diameter of steel cylinder, inches
Pw = Design working pressure, psi
Pt = Design transient pressure, pst
Y = Specified minimum yield point of steel, psi
Sw = Safety factor of 2.0 at design working pressure
St = Safety factor of 1.5 at design transient pressure
B. In no case shall the design stress at design working pressure (Y/Sw) for mortar-coated steel pipe exceed 16,500 psi or 22,000 psi at design transient pressure (Y/St), nor shall plate thickness be less than the thickness of adjacent mainline pipe or the following:

Pipe Manifolds Elbows
Nominal Pipe Piping Above Ground Bends
Diameter (in.) Piping in Structures Reducers
24 and under 3/16 - inch 10 - ga.
25 to 48 1/4 - inch 1/4 - inch
over 48 5/16 - inch 5/16 - inch
C. Pipe installed on saddle supports shall be designed to limit the longitudinal bending stress to a maximum of 10,000 psi. Design shall be in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 7 of AWWA M-11.

Steel Pipe, Mortar Lined and Coated
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15026-7

2.5 MATERIALS
A. Pipe manufactured under AWWA C200 shall be fabricated from sheet conforming to the requirements of Table 1 in Section 2. All longitudinal and girth seams, whether straight or spiral, shall be butt welded using an approved electric-fusion-weld process.

B. All steel used for the fabrication of pipe shall have a maximum carbon content of 0.25 percent, a maximum sulfur content of 0.015 percent, and shall have a minimum elongation of 22 percent in a 2-inch gauge length.

C. All steel used in fabricating pipe which exceeds 1/2-inch in thickness shall be tested for notch toughness using the Charpy V-Notch test in accordance with ASTM A370. The steel shall withstand a minimum impact of 25 ft. lb. at a temperature of 30 degrees F.

D. Steel shall be fine-grained, fully kilned and manufactured by the continuous casting process.

E. Cement for mortar shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C205; provided that cement for mortar lining shall be Type II and mortar lining shall be Type II. Fly ash or pozzolan shall not be used as a cement replacement.

F. Joint Design

1. The standard field joint for steel pipe shall be either a single-welded lap joint or a rubber-gasketed joint for all pipe sizes up to and including 54-inch diameter and shall be single-welded lap joint for pipe sizes above 60-inch diameter. Double welded joints with air taps for air pressure testing shall be provided where shown.

2. Mechanically coupled or flanged joints shall be required where shown.

3. Butt-strap joints shall be used only where required for closures or where shown, or approved by the CITY.

4. The joints furnished shall have the same or higher pressure rating as the abutting pipe.

5. Shop-applied interior linings and exterior coatings shall be held back from the ends of the pipe as indicated or as otherwise acceptable to the CITY.

6. Where indicated, restrained joints shall be field-welded joints. Designs shall include considerations of stresses induced in the steel cylinder, the joint rings, and any field welds, caused by thrust at bulkheads, bends, reducers, and line valves resulting from the design working pressure. All joints to be field welded for thrust restraint shall have the joint rings attached to the cylinder with double fillet welds.

Calculations for the number of joints that need to be welded on each side of all vertical and horizontal angle points shall be furnished to the CITY at no additional cost to the CITY.

7. For field welded joints, design stresses shall not exceed 50 percent of the indicated minimum yield strength of the grade of steel utilized, or 16,500 psi, whichever is less, for the part being examined when longitudinal thrust is assumed to be uniformly distributed around the circumference of the joint.

At the CONTRACTOR’s option, the steel cylinder area may be progressively reduced from the point of maximum thrust to the end of the restrained length.

G. Lap Joints

1. Preparation for field welding shall be in accordance with AWWA C200.

2. The method used to form, shape and size bell ends shall be such that the physical properties of the steel are not substantially altered. Unless otherwise approved by the CITY, bell ends shall be formed by an expanding press or by being moved axially over a die in such a manner as to stretch the steel plate beyond its elastic limit to form a truly round bell of suitable diameter and shape. No process will be permitted in which the bell is formed by rolling. Faying surfaces of the bell shall be essentially parallel, but in no case shall the bell slope vary more than 2 degrees from the longitudinal axis of the pipe.

Steel Pipe, Mortar Lined and Coated
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15026-8 H. Bell and Spigot Ends

1. The CONTRACTOR shall require the pipe manufacturer to submit details complete with significant dimensions and tolerances and also to submit performance data indicating that the proposed joint has performed satisfactorily under similar conditions. In the absence of a history of field performance, the results of a test program shall be submitted.

2. The method used to form, shape and size bell ends shall be such that the physical properties of the steel are not substantially altered.

3. Unless otherwise approved by the CITY, bell ends shall be formed by an expanding press or by being moved axially over a die in such a manner as to stretch the steel plate beyond its elastic limit to form a truly round bell of suitable diameter and shape. No process will be permitted in which the bell is formed by rolling.

4. Unless otherwise approved by the CITY, spigot ends with rolled gasket grooves shall be nondestructively tested by the dye penetrant or magnetic particle method for the full circumference, especially at the weld seam area.

5. Faying surfaces of the bell and spigot shall be essentially parallel, but in no case shall the bell slope vary more than 2 degrees from the longitudinal axis of the pipe.

6. Actual yield strength of the steel used in the spigot rolling operation (i.e. yield strength values in mill certifications and subsequent destructive test results) shall be limited to 50,000 psi.

7. For bell-and-spigot ends with rubber gaskets, the clearance between the bells and spigots shall be such that when combined with the gasket groove configuration and the gasket itself, will provide watertight joints under all operating conditions when properly installed.

8. Full and complete information regarding location, type, size, and extent of all welds shall be shown on the shop drawings. The shop drawings shall distinguish between shop and field welds. Shop drawings shall indicate by welding symbols or sketches the details of the welded joints, and the preparation of parent metal required to make them. Joints or groups of joints in which welding sequence or technique are especially important shall be carefully controlled to minimize shrinkage stresses and distortion.

I. Mitered End Cut Welded Butt Joints or Lap Joints (via Bell Ends)

1. For deflection angles of less than 5 degrees, the Contractor can utilize Mitered end cuts with welded butt or lap joints per AWWA M11 Steel Pipe Guide and applicable requirements.

J. Flanges

1. AWWA C207, Class D flanges (matching ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125 flanges for bolt hole size and drilling) shall be used for pressures up to 150 psi.

2. AWWA C207, Class E flanges (matching ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125 flanges for bolt hole size and drilling) shall be used for pressures between 150 psi and 250 psi.

3. AWWA C207, Class F flanges (matching ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 250 flanges for bolt hole size and drilling) shall be used for pressures between 250 psi and 300 psi or when Class 250 butterfly valves or other appurtenances using flanges corresponding to AWWA C207 Class F are required.

4. Flanges shall be flat-faced type only. Segmented flanges shall not be used.

2.6 CEMENT-MORTAR LINING OF PIPE
A. General

1. Except as otherwise required, interior surfaces of all steel pipe, fittings, and specials shall be cleaned and lined in the shop with cement-mortar lining applied centrifugally in conformity with AWWA C205.

Steel Pipe, Mortar Lined and Coated
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15026-9

2. The progress of the application of mortar lining shall be regulated in order that all hand work, including the repair of defective areas is cured in accordance with the provisions of AWWA C205.

2. During the lining operation and thereafter, the pipe shall be maintained in a round condition by suitable bracing or strutting.

3. The lining machine shall be of a type that has been used successfully for similar work.

4. If lining is damaged or found faulty at delivery site, the damaged or unsatisfactory portions shall be replaced with lining conforming to these Specifications at no additional cost to the CITY.

B. The minimum lining thickness shall be in accordance with AWWA C200, Table 1 of Section 4.

C. The pipe shall be left bare where field joints occur as indicated. Ends of the linings shall be left square and uniform. Feathered or uneven edges will not be permitted.

D. Defective linings, as determined by the CITY, shall be removed from the pipe wall and shall be replaced to the full thickness required. Defective linings shall be cut back to a square shoulder in order to avoid feathered edged joints.

E. Cement-mortar for patching shall be the same materials as the mortar for machine lining, except that a finer grading of sand and mortar richer in cement shall be used when field inspection indicates that such mix will improve the finished lining of the pipe.

F. For all pipe and fittings with plant-applied cement-mortar linings, the pipe manufacturer shall provide a polyethylene or other suitable bulkhead on the ends of the pipe and on all special openings to prevent drying out of the lining. All bulkheads shall be substantial enough to remain intact during shipping and storage until the pipe is installed.

G. Cement-Mortar Lining for Field Application

1. The materials and design of in-place cement-mortar lining shall be in accordance with AWWA C602 and the following supplementary requirements.
a. Portland cement shall conform to Type II, ASTM C150. b. Pozzolanic material shall not be used in the mortar mix. c. Admixtures shall contain no calcium chloride.
d. The minimum lining thickness shall be as indicated for shop-applied cement mortar lining and the finished inside diameter after lining shall be as shown.

2.7 CEMENT MORTAR COATING OF PIPE
A. The exterior surfaces of pipe which will be exposed to the atmosphere inside structures or above ground shall be thoroughly cleaned and then given a shop coat of rust-inhibitive primer and a finish coat B. All pipes for buried service, including bumped heads, shall be coated with a 1-inch minimum thickness of reinforced cement-mortar coating.

1. Exterior surfaces of pipe or fittings passing through structure walls shall be cement mortar coated six (6) inches beyond the inside wall face.

2. Unless otherwise specified, the reinforcement for the coating of pipe sections may be spiral wire, wire fabric, or wire mesh in accordance with AWWA C205.

3. The welded wire fabric shall be securely fastened to the pipe with welded clips or strips of steel.

4. The wire spaced 2 inches on centers shall extend circumferentially around the pipe.

5. The ends of reinforcement strips shall be lapped 4 inches and the free ends tied or looped to assure continuity of the reinforcement.

Steel Pipe, Mortar Lined and Coated
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15026-10

2.8 FABRICATION OF SPECIALS
A. General

1. Specials and fittings shall conform to dimensions stipulated in AWWA C208.

2. Reinforcement for wyes, tees, outlets, and nozzles shall be designed in accordance with AWWA Manual M-11. Reinforcement shall be designed for the pressure indicated and shall be in accordance with the Standard Details.

3. Specials and fittings shall be equal in pressure design strength and shall have the same lining and coating as the adjoining pipe.

4. Unless otherwise specified, the minimum radius of elbows shall be 2.5 times the pipe diameter and the maximum miter angle on each section of the elbow shall not exceed 11-1/4 degrees.

B. Fittings may be fabricated from pipe that has been mechanically lined or coated.

C. Access manholes with covers shall be as indicated. All threaded outlets shall be forged steel suitable for 3000 psi service.

D. Outlets 12-inch and smaller may be fabricated from Schedule 30 or heavier steel pipe in the standard outside diameters, i.e. 12-3/4 inch, 10-3/4 inch, 8-5/8 inch, 6-5/8 inch, and 4-1/2 inch.

E. The design of outlet reinforcement shall be in accordance with the procedures given in Chapter 12 of AWWA Manual M-11, except that the design pressure, P, used in the M11procedure shall equal the greater of 1.25 Pw or 0.9376 Pt. Unless otherwise indicated, outlets 2 inches in diameter and smaller need not be reinforced.

F. In lieu of saddle or wrapper reinforcement as required by the design procedure in Manual M-11, pipe or specials with outlets may be fabricated in their entirety of steel plate having a thickness equal to the sum of the pipe wall plus the required reinforcement.

G. Where required by the M-11 design procedure crotch plate reinforcement shall be furnished.

H. Steel welding fittings shall conform to ASTM A234.

I. Ends for Mechanical-Type Couplings

1. Except as otherwise required, where mechanical-type couplings are indicated, the ends of pipe shall be banded with Type C collared ends using double fillet welds. Where pipe 12-inch and smaller is furnished in standard schedule thicknesses, and where the wall thickness equals or exceeds the coupling manufacturer’s minimum wall thickness, the pipe ends may be grooved.

J. Lining

1. All requirements pertaining to thickness, application and curing of lining indicated for straight pipe shall apply to specials, with the following proviso. If the special cannot be lined centrifugally, it shall be lined by hand. In such case, the lining shall be reinforced with 2-inch by 4-inch No. 12 welded wire fabric positioned approximately in the center of the lining. The wires spaced 2-inches on center shall extend circumferentially around the pipe with the fabric securely fastened to the pipe. Splices shall be lapped 4 inches and the free ends tied or looped to assure continuity.

K. Coating

1. All requirements pertaining to thickness, application and curing of coating for straight pipe shall apply to specials. Pipe above ground or in structures shall be field painted as required in Section 04000.

Steel Pipe, Mortar Lined and Coated
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15026-11 L. Specials and fittings that cannot be mechanically lined and coated shall be lined and coated by handapplication, using the same materials as are used for the pipe and in accordance with the applicable AWWA C602 Standards. Coating and lining applied in this manner shall provide protection equal to that indicated for the pipe.

M. Areas of lining that have been damaged by such fabrication shall be repaired by hand applications in accordance with applicable AWWA C602 Standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPE
A. Immediately before placing each section of pipe in final position for jointing, the bedding for the pipe shall be checked for firmness and uniformity of surface to support the pipe for its full length.

B. All buried pipe shall be installed with 10 gauge copper tracer wire.

C. When the pipe is being laid, it shall be turned and placed where possible, so that any slightly damaged portion will be on top. The damaged area shall be repaired for the protection of any exposed steel.

D. All damaged areas along the pipe shall be repaired using materials and methods acceptable to the CITY.

E. Moderate deflections and long radius curves may be made by means of beveled joint rings, by pulling standard joints, by using short lengths of pipe, or a combination of these methods; provided that pulled joints shall not be used in combination with bevels.

F. The maximum total allowable angle for beveled joints shall be 5 degrees per pipe joint.

G. The maximum allowable angle for pulled joints shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations or the angle which results from a 3/4 inch pull out from normal joint closure, whichever is less.

H. All horizontal deflections or fabricated angles shall fall on the alignment. [In congested city streets or at other locations where underground obstructions may be encountered, the chord produced by deflecting the pipe shall be no further than 6 inches from the alignment indicated.

I. All vertical deflections shall fall on the alignment and at locations adjacent to underground obstructions, points of minimum earth cover, and pipeline outlets and structures. The pipe angle points shall match the angle points indicated.

J. For pipe wall thicknesses of 3/8-inch or less, the maximum radial offset (misalignment) for submerged arc and gas metal arc welded pipe shall be 0.1875 times the wall thickness or 1/16-inch, whichever is larger.

K. For pipe wall thickness greater than 3/8-inch, the maximum radial offset shall be 0.1875 times the wall thickness or 5/32-inch, whichever is smaller.

L. Bevels shall be provided on the bell ends.

M. Mitering of the spigot ends will not be permitted.

N. For pipe 24 inches in diameter and larger, pipe struts shall be left in place until backfilling operations have been completed.

O. Struts in pipe smaller than 24 inches may be removed immediately after laying, provided that the deflection of the pipe during and after backfilling does not exceed that indicated. After the backfill has been placed, the struts shall be removed and shall remain property of the CONTRACTOR.

Steel Pipe, Mortar Lined and Coated
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15026-12 P. The openings of all pipe and specials where the pipe and specials have been cement mortar lined in the shop shall be protected with suitable bulkheads to maintain a moist atmosphere and to prevent unauthorized access by persons, animals, water or any undesirable substance. The bulkheads shall be so designed to prevent drying out of the interior of the pipe. The CONTRACTOR shall introduce water into the pipe to keep the mortar moist where moisture has been lost due to damaged bulkheads.

3.2 RUBBER GASKETED JOINTS
A. Immediately before jointing pipe, the spigot end of the pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned, and a clean rubber gasket lubricated with a NSF approved vegetable-based lubricant shall be placed in the spigot groove.

B. The volume of the gasket shall be “equalized” by moving a metal rod between the gasket and the spigot ring around the full circumference of the spigot ring.

C. The bell of the pipe already in place shall be carefully cleaned and lubricated with a NSF approved vegetablebased lubricant. The spigot of the pipe section shall then be inserted into the bell of the previously laid joint and telescoped into its proper position.

D. Tilting of the pipe to insert the spigot into the bell will not be permitted.

E. After the pipe units have been joined, a feeler gauge shall be inserted into the recess and moved around the periphery of the joint to detect any irregularity in the position of the rubber gasket. If the gasket cannot be “felt” all around, the joint shall be disassembled. If the gasket is undamaged, as determined by the CITY, it may be reused, but only after the bell ring and gasket have had an additional coat of lubrication applied.

3.3 WELDED JOINTS
A. General

1. Field welded joints shall be in accordance with AWWA C206.

2. Where exterior welds are performed, adequate space shall be provided for welding and inspection of the joints.

3. During installation of welded steel pipe in either straight alignment or on curves, the pipe shall be laid so that the lap joint clearance, at any point around the circumference of the joint, shall comply with the requirements of AWWA C206.

4. Unless double fillet welds are indicated, field welded lap joints may, at the CONTRACTOR’s option, be made on either the inside or the outside of the pipe.

5. Butt straps, where used or required, shall be a minimum of 6 inches wide, the same thickness as the pipe wall and shall provide for a minimum of 3/4 inch lap at each pipe joint.

6. The pipe ends shall be cut straight on joints where butt straps are used for realignment, adjustment, or deflection, and fillet welds shall be made as indicated.

7. After the pipe and pipe joint are properly positioned in the trench, the length of pipe between joints shall be backfilled to at least 1 foot above the top of the pipe. Care shall be exercised during the initial backfilling to prevent movement of the pipe and to prevent any backfill material from being deposited on the joint.

8. Prior to the beginning of the welding procedure, any tack welds used to position the pipe during laying shall be removed. Any annular space between the faying surfaces of the bell and spigot shall be equally distributed around the circumference of the joint by shimming, jacking, or other suitable means. The weld shall then be made in accordance with AWWA C206. Where more than one pass is required, each pass except the first and final one shall be peened to relieve shrinkage stresses; and all dirt, slag, and flux shall be removed before the succeeding bead is applied.

Steel Pipe, Mortar Lined and Coated
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15026-13

9. As soon as practicable after welding of each joint, all field-welded joints shall be tested by the liquid penetrant inspection procedure conforming to the requirements of ASTM E165 under Method “B” and “Leak Testing.” All defects shall be chipped out, rewelded and retested.

10. Following tests of the joint, the exterior joint spaces shall be coated in accordance with these specifications after which backfilling may be completed.

3.4 JOINT COATING AND LINING
A. The interior and exterior joint recesses shall be thoroughly wiped clean and all water, loose scale, dirt and other foreign material shall be removed from the inside surface of the pipe.

B. The cement for joint grout and mortar shall be portland cement acceptable under ASTM C150 and shall be of the same type used for the pipe coating.

C. After the pipe has been laid and after sufficient backfill has been placed between the joints to hold the pipe securely in place, the outside annular space between pipe sections shall be completely filled with grout formed by the use of polyethylene foam-lined fabric bands.

D. The grout shall be composed of one part cement to not more than 2 parts sand, thoroughly mixed with water to a consistency of thick cream.

E. The grout space prior to filling shall be flushed with water so that the surface of the joint to be in contact with the grout will be thoroughly moistened when the grout is poured.

F. The joint shall be filled with grout by pouring from one side only, and shall be rodded with a wire or other flexible rod or vibrated so that the grout completely fills the joint recess by moving down one side of the pipe, around the bottom of the pipe and up the opposite side. Pouring and rodding the grout shall be continued to allow completion of the filling of the entire joint recess in one operation.

G. Grouting of the outside joint spaces shall be kept as close behind the laying of the pipe as possible except that in no case shall grouting be closer than 3 joints of the pipe being laid.

H. Grout Bands (Diapers)

1. The grout bands or heavy-duty diapers shall be polyethylene foam-lined fabric with steel strapping of sufficient strength to hold the fresh mortar, resist rodding of the mortar and allow excess water to escape.

2. The foam plastic shall be 100 percent closed cell, chemically inert, insoluble in water and resistant to acids, alkali and solvents.

3. The fabric backing shall be cut and sewn into 9-inch wide strips with slots for the steel strapping on the outer edges.

4. The polyethylene foam shall be cut into strips 6 inches wide and slit to a thickness of 1/4-inch which will expose a hollow or open cell surface on one side.

5. The foam liner shall be attached to the fabric backing with the open or hollow cells facing toward the pipe.

6. The foam strip shall cover the full interior circumference of the grout band with sufficient length to permit an 8-inch overlap of the foam at or near the top of the pipe joint.

7. Splices to provide continuity of the material will be permitted.

8. The polyethylene foam material shall be protected from direct sunlight.

I. The polyethylene foam-lined grout band shall be centered over the joint space with approximately equal widths extending over each pipe end and securely attached to the pipe with steel straps. After filling the Steel Pipe, Mortar Lined and Coated
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15026-14 exterior joint space with cement grout, the flaps shall be closed and overlapped in a manner that fully encloses the grout with polyethylene foam. The grout band shall remain in position on the pipe joint.

J. Joint Lining

1. After the backfill has been completed to final grade, the interior joint recess shall be filled with mortar of stiff consistency mixed in proportions of one part cement to 2 parts sand.

2. The mortar shall be tightly packed into the joint recess and troweled flush with the interior surface, and all excess shall be removed.

3. At no point shall there be an indentation or projection of the mortar exceeding 1/16inch.

4. For pipe smaller than 24 inches in diameter, before the spigot is inserted into the bell, the bell shall be daubed with mortar containing one part cement to 2 parts sand. The spigot end then shall be forced to the bottom of the bell and excess mortar on the inside of the joint shall be swabbed out.

K. The lining machine shall be of a type that has been used successfully for a similar size of pipe. No ball (“rabbit”) shall be used. These joints shall be videotaped by the CONTRACTOR or hand holes shall be provided at each joint, all at no additional cost to the CITY.

L. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all work in a thorough and workmanlike manner by trained personnel, under the supervision of experienced personnel skilled in machine application of cement-mortar lining to pipelines of size comparable to this work.

M. Curing of the in-place cement-mortar lining shall be in accordance with AWWA C602.

N. The CONTRACTOR shall provide additional protective devices as required to ensure that the airtight covers, which maintain a moist condition in the pipeline, are not damaged.

O. Defective areas encompassing the full diameter of the pipe shall be replaced by machine wherever the length measured along the pipe centerline is greater than 5 feet; otherwise defective areas may be replaced by hand. - END OF SECTION -
Electric Actuators
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15140-1 SECTION 15140

ELECTRIC ACTUATORS
PART 1 -- GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish and install electric actuators in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIC ELSEWHERE
A. Related Sections:

1. Section 11000 - Equipment General Provisions

2. Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators

3. Division 16 - Electrical

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

B. Submit complete manufacturer catalog information showing dimensions, electrical requirements, operating instructions, etc.

1.4 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Provide six (6) hard copies plus one (1) electronic version in PDF format.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01730 – Operating and Maintenance Data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer shall provide a 2-year equipment warranty.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. The actuator shall be AUMA, or Engineer Approved Equal.

B. The actuator shall be compact and low profile to minimize space requirements.

C. The actuator shall provide adjustable operation up to 90°.

D. The actuator shall provide easy access for field wiring and adjustment.

E. The actuator shall be built to withstand line vibration and shock without failure.

2.2 ENCLOSURE – WEATHERPROOF
A. Actuators shall be 0-ring sealed, watertight to NEMA 4X/6 and submersible to IP 68-8 (26 feet (8meters) for 96 hours)) in accordance with EN 60529. During submersion it must be possible to operate the actuator at least 10 times. Enclosure must allow for temporary site storage without the need for electrical supply connection. All external fasteners shall be of stainless steel. Gear case shall be cast iron. In order to prevent Electric Actuators
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15140-2 condensation, a heater must be installed inside the actuator, suitable for continuous operation. Actuator must provide an alarm signal in case of failure of anti-condensation heater.

B. When required, actuators for hazardous locations shall be certified explosion proof for Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C & D or Groups B, C & D.

2.3 MOTOR
A. The motor shall be a single phase, permanent split capacitor induction type with Class F or better insulation.

B. The motor shall contain a built-in UL approved automatic reset thermal overload protector set at 275ºF (135ºC) embedded in the motor windings.

C. Motors shall be 230 VAC or 120VAC, 1 Phase, 60 Hz as specified in plans.

D. The actuator shall be sized to guarantee valve closure at the specified torque and/or thrust requirement as indicated by the valve manufacturer or supplier. The actuator must be adequately sized to provide the torque required to operate the valve at 90% of the nominal voltage. The operating speed shall provide valve closing and opening at approximately 12 inches per minute for gate valves, 4 inches per minute for globe valves and as indicated in the valve list for quarter turn valves. Quarter turn valves will be furnished with mechanical stops that restrict the valve/actuator travel. One actuator size (same outside dimensions) shall be available covering output speeds from 4.8 to 216 rpm for a given torque range, to avoid over sizing and unnecessary weight load on valve stem, flange and yoke. An increase of actuator size caused by higher actuator output speed is not acceptable.

E. The electric motor shall be Class F insulated, with a duty rating of at least 15 minutes at 104°F (40°C) ambient temperature at an average load of at least 35% of rated actuator torque. Motor shall be specifically designed and built by the actuator manufacturer for electric actuator service characterized by high starting torque, low stall torque and low inertia. Commercially available motors shall not be acceptable. Electrical disconnection of the motor shall be by means of a plug and socket and motor removal shall be possible without loss of lubricant. The actuator must include a device to ensure that the motor runs with the correct rotation for the required direction of valve travel regardless of the connection sequence of the power supply.

F. The following criteria shall be provided for motor protection:

1. The motor shall be de-energized without damage in the event of a stall condition when attempting to move a jammed valve.

2. The motor shall be de-energized in the event of an over torque condition

3. A minimum of three thermal devices imbedded in the motor windings shall be provided to deenergize the motor in case of overheating.

4. Lost phase protection
G. Other DC and AC motors shall be available upon request.

2.4 ACTUATOR GEAR TRAIN SYSTEM
A. The actuator shall have a self-locking gear train system consisting of a worm and worm gear output drive mechanism, which will hold the valve in the desired position without the need for an electro-mechanical braking system.

B. The spur gear train shall have precision cut multi- staged gears which will withstand locked rotor conditions and are permanently lubricated at the factory.

C. The actuator gearing shall be totally enclosed in a grease-filled cast iron gear case suitable for operation in any orientation. Oil lubrication is not permitted. Actuator gearing shall be hardened steel with alloy bronze worm wheel. The design should permit the opening of the gear case for inspection or disassembly without releasing Electric Actuators
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15140-3 the stem thrust or taking the valve out of service. Where required per application, electric actuators will be provided with worm gearboxes. The worm gearboxes shall be supplied with full 360 bronze or ductile iron worm wheels and end-of-travel mechanical stops on the worm shaft. Designs with segmented worm gears and end-of-travel stops in the gearbox housing will not be permitted.

2.5 MECHANICAL TRAVEL STOPS
A. Mechanical stainless steel travel stops shall be provided and located outside the actuator enclosure for ease of adjustment.

B. Stainless steel lock nuts shall be provided to hold the travel stops in position.

C. O-ring seals for waterproof protection shall be provided.

D. The mechanical travel stops shall limit the travel of the actuator in either direction to the full travel range of the valve.

E. Stainless steel spacers shall be provided to prevent adjustment of travel stops above 0° and below 90°.

2.6 MANUAL OVERRIDE
A. The actuator shall be equipped with a manual override hand wheel to rotate the valve without electrical power.

B. The manual override system shall ensure efficient manual operation without the use of extra tools or levers.

C. A motor power cutout switch shall be provided to cut power to the motor when the actuator manual override is engaged.

2.7 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Each electric actuator shall have a disconnect switch voltage noted in the drawings.

B. Acceptable Manufacture: Rotary or approved equal.

2.8 TRAVEL LIMIT SWITCHES
A. Travel limit switches shall limit the actuator travel in both the open and closed direction of travel.

B. Travel limit switches shall be held in brackets for accurate and repeatable valve position feedback.

C. Travel limit switch cams shall be infinitely adjustable by finger touch or screw driver.

D. All travel limit switches shall be:

1. Single Pole Double Throw (SPDT) Form C, UL Listed, and CSA Approved.

2. 10A at 125/250 VAC and 1/2A at 125 VDC.

E. Travel limit switches shall be pre-wired to a terminal block for ease of access and all internal wiring shall range from 12-22 AWG.

2.9 LOCAL CONTROLS
A. Local controls with 'OPEN - STOP - CLOSE' pushbutton type controls and a lockable selector switch with 'LOCAL - OFF - REMOTE' function. Local controls shall be supplied with indicating lights red for ‘OPEN’, yellow for ‘FAULT’ and green for “CLOSED”.

2.10 SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
Electric Actuators
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15140-4 A. Actuators shall be designed for electric operation under the following service conditions:

1. Temperature range:
a. -40ºF to +160°F in Open/Close Service
b. -40°F to +140°F in Modulating Service

2. Duty Cycle:
a. 25% for Intermittent Operation
b. 100% for Continuous Operation

2.11 TESTING
A. All actuators shall be factory tested at rated load to ensure proper operation. Each actuator shall be performance tested. Test documentation must be provided if requested indicating the following:

1. Torque sensing tripping points in both the open and closed directions of travel

2. Current at the maximum torque tripping point

3. Actuator output speed

4. High voltage test

2.12 MOUNTING
A. All actuators shall comply with ISO 5211 and mount directly to the valve mounting flange and stem without the need for any brackets or couplings.

2.13 PROJECT SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT
A. Torque Limiting System: Shall include two SPDT mechanical switches and two factory-calibrated adjusting screws.

1. The switches, in response to a predetermined load on the actuator output shaft, shall interrupt power to the motor.

2. The switches shall operate at any point and in both directions of actuator travel.

B. Heater: Prevents internal condensation build-up.

1. Shall be a self-regulating temperature control type.

2. Shall be pre-wired to the terminal block for ease of connection to external source.

3. Rated output shall be 5 W at 120 or 220 VAC.

C. Local Control Station: Permits local electrical operation of the actuator.

1. Shall flush mount to the actuator and include:
a. A local-off-remote control switch.
b. An open-stop-close switch.
c. Two lights which indicate open and closed valve position. d. Two ¾” NPT conduit entries in base of enclosure for customer wiring.

2. Enclosure shall be aluminum and weatherproof.

D. Battery Back Up: User-selectable valve fail position upon loss of power supply in 24V applications.

1. Shall flush mount to the actuator and include:
a. Visual and remote indication of battery status and operation. b. Field selectable valve fail position.
c. Two ¾” NPT conduit entries in base of enclosure for customer wiring.

2. Enclosure shall be aluminum and weatherproof.

E. Potentiometer: Shall include two SPDT mechanical switches and two factory-calibrated adjusting screws.

Electric Actuators
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15140-5

1. The switches, in response to a predetermined load on the actuator output shaft, shall interrupt power to the motor.

2. The switches shall operate at any point and in both directions of actuator travel.

F. Auxiliary Switches: Indicates travel position for remote customer control systems.

1. All auxiliary switches shall be:
a. Single Pole Double Throw (SPDT) Form C, UL Listed, and CSA Approved. b. 10A at 125/250 VAC and 1/2A at 125 VDC

2. Up to 6 additional auxiliary switches may be added.

G. Servo NXT: Precise modulating control of the valve position (where modulating is required).

1. Shall accept an analog input command signal proportional to the desired valve position.

2. The analog input signal shall be configurable to either current or voltage input:
a. 4-20mA DC, 0-10V DC, 2-10V DC, 0-5V DC.

3. Shall have an analog output retransmission signal proportional to the actual valve position.

4. The analog output signal shall be configurable to either current or voltage output:
a. 4-20mA DC, 0-10V DC, 0-5V DC.

5. LED driven menu display shall be provided for simplified commissioning, monitor and control of actuator.

6. Voltage spike and transient protection shall be provided on all input terminals and output terminals.

7. Independent isolation shall be provided between analog input command signal and output retransmission signal to eliminate ground loops.

8. 120/230VAC units shall have inductive isolation between line voltage and logic level voltages.

9. Control characteristic shall be linear and duty cycle shall be 100%.

10. Calibration shall be accomplished by pressing a single button to initiate the calibration routine.

11. Independent adjustments shall be provided for deadband and for both open and closed speed control of the actuator.

12. Internal feedback shall be by means of a 10k Ohm potentiometer.

13. Manual mode operation shall be provided to allow for control of actuator when no command signal is present.

14. On-board fault indications shall be provided.

15. Shall be designed to meet UL and CE standards.

H. Series 70 DeviceNet: Network control and feedback of valve position.

1. Shall be available as an option to provide on/off or modulating capability.

2.14 ACTUATOR APPROVALS & CERTIFICATIONS
A. CE

1. Low Voltage Directive: 2014/35/EU

2. EMC Directive: 2014/30/EU

3. Machinery Directive: 2006/42/EC

4. RoHS Directive: 2011/65/EU

5. IP65
B. ABS
Electric Actuators
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15140-6 C. Bureau Veritas Certification
D. CSA Certification

1. For select 120VAC units.

E. UL Certification (cULus)

1. For select 120VAC units.

2. NEMA Type 4, 4x.

2.15 HAZARDOUS LOCATION
A. Certified to UL and CSA standards.

1. For select 120VAC units.

2. NEMA Type 4x, 7, 9.

B. Hazardous location enclosure shall be UL certified to:

1. Class I, DIV 1 & 2, Group C, D

2. Class II, DIV 1 & 2, Group E, F, G

3. Operating Temperature Code: T3B (165°C)
C. All unused conduit entry points to be sealed for ingress protection.

PART 3-- EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Each actuator shall be supplied with a start-up kit comprising installation instruction manual, electrical wiring diagram and cover seals to make good any site losses during the commissioning period. In addition, sufficient actuator commissioning tools shall be supplied to enable actuator set up and adjustment during valve/actuator testing and site installation commissioning
C. Each actuator must be performance tested and individual test certificates shall be supplied free of charge. The test equipment should simulate a typical valve load, and the following parameters should be recorded.

1. Current at maximum torque setting

2. Torque at max. torque setting

3. Flash test voltage

4. Actuator output speed or operating time.
- END OF SECTION -
Valves, General
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15200-1 SECTION 15200

VALVES, GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish and install all valves, actuators, and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. These specifications shall not apply to valves, actuators, and appurtenances to be provided by process equipment vendors as part of process systems or equipment already approved by the ENGINEER.

B. ALL VALVES INSTALLED ON POTABLE WATER LINES SHALL BE NSF 61 CERTIFIED AND RATED TO BE INSTALLED ON POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS.

C. The requirements of Section 11000 - Equipment General Provisions, apply to the WORK of this Section.

D. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all valves and valve actuators except where otherwise indicated.

Valves and actuators in particular locations may require a combination of units, sensors, limit switches, and controls indicated in other Sections of the Specifications.

E. Where a valve is to be supported by means other than the piping to which it is attached, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the valve manufacturer a design for support and foundation that satisfies the criteria in Section 11000. The design, including drawings and calculations sealed by an engineer, shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings. When the design is approved, the support shall be provided.

F. Unit Responsibility: A single manufacturer shall be made responsible for coordination of design, assembly, testing, and furnishing of each valve; however, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for compliance with the requirements of each valve section. Unless indicated otherwise, the responsible manufacturer shall be the manufacturer of the valve.

G. Single Manufacturer: Where two or more valves of the same type and size are required, the valves shall be furnished by the same manufacturer.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 – Submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall contain the following information:

1. Valve name, size, Cv factor, pressure rating and identification number (if any).

2. Complete information on valve actuator, including size, Manufacturer, model number, limit switches, and mounting.

3. Cavitation limits for all control valves.

4. Assembly drawings showing part nomenclature, materials, dimensions, weights, and relationships of valve handles, handwheels, position indicators, limit switches, integral control systems, needle valves, and control systems.

C. Technical Manual: The Technical Manual shall contain the required information for each valve.

D. Spare Parts List: A Spare Parts List shall contain the required information for each valve assembly, where indicated.

Valves, General
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15200-2

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valve manufacturer and model shall be as described in the Drawings or Engineer approved equal.

1.4 SPARE PARTS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the required spare parts suitably packaged and labeled with the valve name, location, and identification number. The CONTRACTOR shall also furnish the name, address, and telephone number of the nearest distributor for the spare parts of each valve. Spare parts are intended for use by the OWNER after expiration of the correction of defects period.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS
A. General: Valves and gates shall be new and of current manufacture. Shut-off valves 6-inches and larger shall have actuators with position indicators. Buried valves shall be provided with valve boxes and covers containing position indicators and valve extensions. Manual shut-off valves mounted higher than 7-feet above working level shall be provided with chain actuators. Valves with no clear way to determine position shall be provided with position indicators. Stem extensions shall be provided on valves where operation of the valve cannot be easily accomplished from ground level.

B. Valve Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, valve actuators shall be in accordance with Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators and Section 15140 - Electric Actuators.

C. Valve Labeling: A label shall be provided on all shut-off valves and control valves except for hose bibs. The label shall be of 1/16-inch plastic or steel, minimum 2 inches by 4 inches in size, as indicated in Section 15005 - Piping Identification Systems, and shall by permanently attached to the valve or on the wall adjacent to the valve as directed by the ENGINEER.

D. Valve Testing: As a minimum, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by the ENGINEER, valves 3 inches in diameter and smaller shall be tested in accordance with manufacturer's standard and 4 inches in diameter and larger shall be factory tested as follows:

1. Hydrostatic Testing: Valve bodies shall be subjected to internal hydrostatic pressure equivalent to twice the water rated pressure of the valve. Metallic valves rating pressures shall be at 100 degrees F and plastic valves shall be 73 degrees, or at higher temperature according to type of material. During the hydrostatic test, there shall be no leakage through the valve body, end joints, or shaft seals, nor shall any part of the valve be permanently deformed. The duration shall be sufficient time to allow visual examination for leakage. Test duration shall be at least 10 minutes.

2. Seat Testing: Valves shall be tested for leaks in the closed position with the pressure differential across the seat equal to the water rated pressure of the valve. The duration of test shall be sufficient time to allow visual examination for leakage. Test duration shall be at least 10 minutes. Leakage past the closed valve shall not exceed 1 fluid ounce per hour per inch diameter for metal seated valves and drop-tight for resilient seated valves.

3. Performance Testing: All valves shall be shop operated from fully closed to fully open position and reverse under no-flow conditions in order to demonstrate the valve assembly operates properly.

E. Valve Marking: Valve bodies shall be permanently marked in accordance with MSS SP25 - Standard Marking Systems for Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and Unions.

Valves, General
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15200-3

2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Materials shall be suitable for the intended application. Materials not indicated shall be high-grade standard commercial quality, free from defects and imperfections that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended. Unless otherwise indicated, valve and actuator bodies shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Cast Iron: Close-grained gray cast iron, conforming to ASTM A 48 - Gray Iron Castings, Class 30, or to ASTM A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings.

2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings, or to ASTM A 395 - Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures.

3. Steel: ASTM A 216 - Steel Castings, Carbon Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-Temperature Service, or to ASTM A 515 - Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and HigherTemperature Service.

4. Bronze: ASTM B 62 - Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings, and valve stems not subject to dezincification shall conform to ASTM B 584 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications.

5. Stainless Steel: Stainless steel valve and operator bodies and trim shall conform to ASTM A 351 - Steel Castings, Austenitic, for High-Temperature Service, Grade CF8M, or shall be Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.

6. PVC: Poly Vinyl Chloride materials for valve body, flanges, and cover shall conform to Cell Classification 12454.

7. CPVC: Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride materials for valve body, flanges, and cover shall conform to Cell Classification 23447.

8. NSF Standard 14: All materials shall be listed for use in contact with potable water.

F. Bodies: Valve bodies shall be cast, molded (in the case of plastic valves), forged, or welded of the materials indicated, with smooth interior passages. Wall thicknesses shall be uniform in agreement with the applicable standards for each type of valve, without casting defects, pinholes, or other defects that could weaken the body. Welds on welded bodies shall be done by certified welders and shall be ground smooth. Valve ends shall be as indicated, and be rated for the maximum temperature and pressure to which the valve will be subjected.

G. Bonnets: Valve bonnets shall be clamped, screwed, or flanged to the body and shall be of the same material, temperature, and pressure rating as the body. The bonnets shall have provision for the stem seal with the necessary glands, packing nuts, or yokes. Below grade valves with above grade worm gear drives/handwheels or electric actuators shall include extended bonnets for mating up to the worm gear drives/handwheel or electric actuator.

H. Stems: Valve stems shall be of the materials indicated, or, if not indicated, of the best commercial material for the specific service, with variable stem packing, O-rings, Chevron V-type packing, or other suitable seal.

Where subject to dezincification, bronze valve stems shall conform to ASTM B 62, containing not more than 5 percent of zinc or more than 2 percent of aluminum, with a minimum tensile strength of 30,000 psi, a minimum yield strength of 14,000 psi, and an elongation of at least 10 percent in 2 inches. Where dezincification is not a problem, bronze conforming to ASTM B 584 may be used, except that zinc content shall not exceed 16 percent.

I. Stem Guides: Stem guides shall be provided, spaced 10-feet on centers unless the manufacturer can demonstrate by calculation that a different spacing is acceptable. Submerged stem guides shall be 304 stainless steel.

J. Internal Parts: Internal parts and valve trim shall be as indicated for each individual valve. Where not indicated, valve trim shall be of Type 316 stainless steel or other best suited material.

Valves, General
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15200-4 K. Nuts and Bolts: Nuts and bolts on valve flanges and supports shall be in accordance with Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metalwork.

L. Coatings: Valve coatings shall be in accordance with section 09800 - Special Coatings or as recommended by the valve manufacturer.

M. Environment: Submerged valves shall be of stainless steel construction as recommended by the valve manufacturer or as approved by the ENGINEER.

2.3 VALVE ACCESSORIES
A. Valves shall be furnished complete with the accessories required to provide a functional system.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. General: Valves, actuating units, stem extensions, valve boxes, and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated. Gates shall be adequately braced to prevent warpage and bending under the intended use. Valves shall be firmly supported to avoid undue stresses on the pipe.

B. Access: Valves shall be installed with easy access for actuation, removal, and maintenance and to avoid interference between valve actuators and structural members, handrails, or other equipment.

C. Valve Accessories: Where combinations of valves, sensors, switches, and controls are indicated, the CONTRACTOR shall properly assemble and install such items so that systems are compatible and operating properly. The relationship between interrelated items shall be clearly noted on Shop Drawing submittals. - END OF SECTION -
Valve and Gate Actuators
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15201-1 SECTION 15201

VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide all valve and gate actuators and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all valves and gates, except where otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.

C. Single Manufacturer: Where two or more valve or gate actuators of the same type or size are required, the actuators shall all be produced by the same Manufacturer.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 – Submittals and Section 15200 - Valves, General. The shop drawing shall substantiate compliance with the Contract Documents requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings of all actuators shall be submitted together with the valve and gate submittals as a complete package.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, all shut-off and throttling valves, and externally actuated valves and gates, shall be provided with manual or power actuators. All actuators shall be complete and operable with mounting hardware, motors, gears, controls, wiring, solenoids, hand wheels, levers, chains, and extensions, as applicable. All actuators shall be capable of holding the valve in any intermediate position between fully open and fully closed without creeping or fluttering.

B. Manufacturers: Where indicated, certain valves and gates may be provided with actuators manufactured by the valve or gate Manufacturer. Where actuators are furnished by different manufacturers, coordinate selection to have the fewest number of manufacturers possible.

C. Materials: All actuators shall be current models of the best commercial quality materials and liberally sized for the maximum expected torque. All materials shall be suitable for the environment in which the valve or gate is to be installed.

D. Mounting: All actuators shall be securely mounted by means of brackets or hardware specially designed and sized for this purpose and of ample strength. The word "open" shall be cast on each valve or actuator with an arrow indicating the direction to open in the counter-clockwise direction. All gear and power actuators shall be equipped with position indicators. Where possible, manual actuators shall be located between 48 and 60 inches above the floor or the permanent working platform.

E Standard: Unless otherwise indicated and where applicable, all actuators shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 540 - AWWA Standard for Power-Actuating Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates.

F. Functionality: Electric, pneumatic, and hydraulic actuators shall be coordinated with the power requirements of Division 16 and instrumentation equipment indicated in Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

Valve and Gate Actuators
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15201-2

2.2 MANUAL ACTUATORS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, all valves and gates shall be furnished with manual actuators. Valves in sizes up to and including 8 inches shall have direct acting lever or handwheel actuators of the Manufacturer's best standard design. Larger valves and gates shall have gear-assisted manual actuators, with an operating pull of maximum 60 pounds on the rim of the handwheel. All buried and submerged gear-assisted valves, all gates, all gear-assisted valves for pressures higher than 250 psi, all valves 30 inches in diameter and larger, and where so indicated, shall have worm-gear actuators, hermetically-sealed and grease-packed, where buried or submerged. All other valves 10 inches to 24 inches in diameter may have traveling-nut actuators, worm-gear actuators, spur- or bevel-gear actuators, as appropriate for each valve.

B. Buried Valves: Unless otherwise indicated, all buried valves shall have extension stems to grade, with square nuts or floor stands, position indicators, and cast-iron or steel pipe extensions with valve boxes, covers and operating keys. Where so indicated, buried valves shall be in cast-iron, concrete, or similar valve boxes with covers of ample size to allow operation of the valve actuators. Covers of valve boxes shall be permanently labeled as requested by the local Utility Company or the ENGINEER. Wrench-nuts shall comply with AWWA C 500 - Metal - Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service, and a minimum of 2 operating keys, or one key per 10 valves, whichever is greater, shall be furnished.

C. Buried and Submerged Actuators: Buried and submerged valve actuators and gear assemblies shall be provided with Type 304 and/or 316 stainless steel bolting and trim, and shall be rated for continuous submerged service. If buried, the valve actuator shall be suitable for a submerged service at a water depth of 10 feet (minimum). If submerged, the actuator shall be suitable for a submerged service at a water depth of 30 feet (minimum).

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER
A. Field Adjustments: Field representatives of manufacturers of valves or gates with pneumatic, hydraulic, or electric actuators shall adjust actuator controls and limit-switches in the field for the required function.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All valve and gate actuators and accessories shall be installed in accordance with Section 15200 - Valves, General. Actuators shall be located to be readily accessible for operation and maintenance, without obstructing walkways. Actuators shall not be mounted where shock or vibrations will impair their operation, nor shall the support systems be attached to handrails, process piping, or mechanical equipment.

B. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: An authorized representative of the Manufacturer shall visit the site and witness the following:

1. Installation of the equipment for not less than 1 day.

2. Inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment for not less than 1 day.

3. Startup and field-testing for proper operation for not less than 1 day. - END OF SECTION -
Butterfly Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15202-1 SECTION 15202

BUTTERFLY VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide butterfly valves and appurtenances, (air and water service) complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. The requirements of Section 11000 – Equipment General Provisions apply to this Section.

C. The requirements of Section 15200 - Valves, General apply to this Section.

D. The requirements of Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators apply to this Section.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

B. Complete Shop Drawings
C. Drawings of butterfly valves and actuators.

D. Drawings showing valve port diameter complete with dimensions, part numbers and materials of construction.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valves shall be subjected to performance, leakage, and hydrostatic tests in accordance with procedures and acceptance criteria established by AWWA C504.

B. The valves shall be certified to NSF/ANSI 61 Drinking Water System Components and certified to be LeadFree in accordance with NSF/ANSI 372.

C. Manufacturer shall have a quality management system that is certified to ISO 9001 by an accredited, certifying body.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. General: Butterfly valves steady-state water working pressures and steady-state differential pressure shall be as indicated on the plans. Operator input torque ratings shall fully comply with the requirements of AWWA C504. Operation shall be clockwise to close, counterclockwise to open. The minimum number of turns to close the valve shall have a minimum of two turns per diameter inch and a maximum of five turns per diameter inch of valve. Compression between the seat and disc edge shall be adjustable from both the upstream and downstream side of the valve disc and the seat shall be field replaceable without disassembly of the disc shaft. Seats with unidirectional adjustment, seats retained in the valve body by the use of fasteners and /or retaining rings, and seats retained on the valve disc are not acceptable.

B. Valves shall be of the body type, pressure class, connection, end joint, and actuator type indicated. Flanged end connections shall fully conform to ANSI B16.1 Class 125.

Butterfly Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15202-2 C. Valve Actuation: Where indicated in the plans, the butterfly valve shall be supplied with an automatic actuator. The valve actuator shall be sized to the specified conditions in Section 15140 – Electric Actuators.

If actual operating conditions are not provided, per AWWA C504, the valve actuator shall be sized to operate the vale at rated working conditions. Each valve and valve actuator shall be assembled, adjusted, and tested by the valve manufacturer as a unit per the latest revision of AWWA C504.

D. Construction: Unless otherwise indicated, all materials of construction shall be suitable for the service, whether water or air. The seats shall be positively clamped or bonded into the disc or body of the valve.

Resilient seats shall provide a 360° continuous, uninterrupted seating surface that shall be field adjustable and replaceable without requiring epoxy, syringes, needles or pressure vessels. Valve actuation shall be per Section 15140 – Electric Actuators and Section 15201 – Valve and Gate Actuators.

Description Material Standards
Valve Bodies Cast Iron ASTM A126 Class B
Valve Stem Stainless Steel T304 ASTM A276
Valve Discs Cast Iron ASTM A48 / Ductile Iron ASTM A536 (64-45-12) Seat Body / Hardware Stainless Steel T316 ASTM A276
Resilient Seat EPDM or Buna-N
Shaft Bearings Teflon Lined with Non-Metallic Fiberglass Composite Backing Painting / Coating Shop Painted / Refer to Section 09800 – Special Coatings E. Manufacturers, or Equal:

1. DeZurik BAW

2. Or Engineer Approved Equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All exposed butterfly valves shall be installed with a means of removing the complete valve assembly without dismantling the valve or operator. The installation shall be in accordance with Section 15200 – Valves, General.
- END OF SECTION -
Check Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15203-1 SECTION 15203

CHECK VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide check valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. The requirements of Section 15200 - Valves, General apply to this Section.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SWING CHECK VALVES (3-INCH AND LARGER)
A. General: Swing check valves shall be of the full waterway body type, with a domed access cover and vent port. Swing check valves shall be suitable for cold working pressures of 250 psig and shall be capable of accepting air cushion, lever and weight or level and spring.

B. The valves shall meet ANSI/AWWA C508 - Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, and shall be certified to NSF 61 and be lead free in accordance with NSF 372.

C. Body: The valve body and cover shall be of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536 (Grade 65-45-12) with flow area equal to the nominal pipe inside diameter throughout the valve. Seat shall be constructed on a 45 degree angle to reduce disc travel. The top access port shall be full size allowing for the removal of the disc without removing the valves from the line. The seat and internal body shall be fully coated with a two part thermosetting epoxy suitable for use in potable water applications.

D. Disc: The resilient disc shall feature a fully encapsulated steel pressure plate with integral molded O-ring on the face of the elastomer. Nylon reinforcements shall be provided in the flexible hinge area of the disc assembly. The flex portion of the disc contains nylon reinforcement and shall be warranted for twenty-five years.

E. Backflow Actuator: If required, check valves shall be provided with a screw-type backflow actuator to allow for the opening of the valve during no flow conditions. The backflow shall be a rising-stem type to indicate position. A stainless steel T-handle shall be provided for ease of operations.

F. Position Indicator: Check valves shall be provided with a mechanical position indicator to indicate disc position.

G. Connections: Swing check valves shall be provided with flanges drilled in accordance with ASME B16.1, Class 125 cast iron flanges or ASME B16.42, Class 150 for ductile iron flanges.

H. Lever and Weight: Unless noted otherwise, all swing check valves shall be supplied with a factory equipped level and weight assembly. The lever shall be equipped with three holes for adjusting the bolted weight assembly. When the valve is closed, the lever and weight shall be located 30 degrees below horizontal. Lever and spring assemblies can be provided at the Engineer’s discretion.

Check Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15203-2 I. Materials:

1. Body & Cover: ASTM A536 Ductile Iron (Grade 65-45-12)

2. Seat: Bronze

3. Disc: Buna-N Rubber

4. Trim: Bronze

5. Diaphragm: Nylon Reinforced Buna-N Rubber.

6. Stem, Nut & Spring: Stainless Steel T316, ASTM A313

7. Body Pattern: Globe

8. Tubing & Fitting: Copper and Bronze.

J. Manufacturers:

1. Val-Matic

2. Or Engineer Approved Equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with provisions of Section 15200 - Valves, General and the manufacturer’s requirements.
- END OF SECTION -
Miscellaneous Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15230-1 SECTION 15230

MISCELLANEOUS VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide all miscellaneous valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. Valves that shall be installed on potable water system must be NSF 61 Certified and rated for potable water installations.

C. The requirements of Section 15200 - Valves, General, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Provide six (6) hard copies plus one (1) electronic version in PDF format.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01730 – Operating and Maintenance Data.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer and model shall be described on the Drawings or Engineer approved equal.

B. The manufacturer shall provide a 2 year equipment warranty.

1.5 SPARE PARTS
A. Spares shall be as requested by the ENGINEER. Payment for spares shall be made in accordance with the General Conditions.

B. A list of spare parts for each piece of equipment shall be obtained from the manufacturer and submitted at the same time as Shop Drawings. The name, address, and telephone number of the nearest distributor for each piece of equipment shall be furnished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR-VACUUM AND AIR-RELEASE VALVES
A. Air and Vacuum Valves: Air and vacuum valves shall be capable of venting large quantities of air while pipelines are being filled, and allowing air to re-enter while pipelines are being drained. The valve shall be the size indicated or the size recommended by the manufacturer based on the proposed operating conditions, with flanged or screwed ends to match piping. Bodies shall be of high-strength cast iron. The float, seat, and all moving parts shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel. Seat washers and gaskets shall be of a material insuring water tightness with a minimum of maintenance. Valves shall be manufactured and designed for minimum 150 psi water-working pressure, unless otherwise indicated.

Miscellaneous Valves
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15230-2 B. Air-Release Valves: Air-release valves shall vent accumulating air while system is in service and under pressure and be of the size indicated and shall meet the same general requirements as indicated for air and vacuum valves except that the vacuum feature will not be required. Valves shall be manufactured and designed for a minimum water-working pressure of 150 psi, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Combination Air Valves: Combination air valves shall combine the characteristics of air and vacuum valves and air release valves by exhausting accumulated air in systems under pressure and releasing or readmitting large quantities of air while a system is being filled or drained, respectively. Valves shall have the same general requirements as indicated for air and vacuum valves. Valves shall be manufactured and designed for a minimum water-working pressure of 150 psi, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Construction: Unless otherwise indicated, all materials of construction shall be suitable for the service. For air valves installed on vertical turbine pumps, the valve shall automatically open allowing full line unrestricted air re-entry to prevent vacuum from forming in the suction column. The valves shall be certified to NSF/ANSI 61 Drinking Water System Components and certified to be Lead-Free in accordance with NSF/ANSI 372. Valves shall conform to the AWWA C-512.

Description Material Standards
Body and Cover Cast Iron ASTM A126 Class B / Ductile Iron ASTM A536 (65-45-12) Float Stainless Steel ASTM A240
Seat Buna-N
Painting / Coating Shop Painted / Refer to Section 09800 – Special Coatings E. Manufacturers, or Equal:

1. DeZurik APCO

2. Or Engineer Approved Equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations, and with provisions of Section 15200 – Valves, General.

B. Altitude valves sensing line must be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements. - END OF SECTION -
Ventilating, Heating and Air Conditioning
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15500-1 SECTION 15500

VENTILATING, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1 -- GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide ventilating, heating and air conditioning systems, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. The requirements of Section 11000 - Equipment General Provisions apply to the WORK of this Section.

1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules and regulations or publications of the Health and Safety Rules (Air Conditioning Systems), the local Plumbing Code, the local Building Code, and all other local codes. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed to permit work in violation of the above codes, rules, and regulations. In the absence of applicable codes, the installation and workmanship shall follow the standards set by the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

B. Equipment Numbers: Equipment is identified by assigned numbers for reference and location purposes in the Contract Documents. The appropriate equipment numbers shall be included on the Shop Drawings and on other submittals.

1.4 WARRANTY
A. Air conditioners, and all fans and blowers, shall carry the manufacturer's standard warranty, and all such warranties shall be furnished upon final acceptance of the completed systems. All reciprocating refrigerant compressors shall carry a 5-year warranty by the manufacturers.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Quality: All mechanisms or parts shall be amply proportioned for the stresses which may occur during operation or for any other stresses which may occur during fabrication and erection. Individual parts that are alike in all units shall be alike in workmanship, design, and materials and shall be of the manufacturer's top line, industrial-commercial grade.

B. Supports: All equipment and appurtenances shall be firmly anchored or connected to supporting members.

All supports required for the proper installation of the equipment, but not forming an integral part of the building structure, shall be provided by the heating and ventilating subcontractor, unless otherwise indicated.

Equipment shall be supported on restrained spring-type vibration isolators.

C. Noise/Vibration Control: The system shall be free of any objectionable vibrations and noise. Flexible connections shall be provided in all ducts and piping connections to fans, compressors, and any other vibrating equipment.

D. Electric Motors: Electric motors shall be provided in accordance with Section 16460 - Electric Motors Ventilating, Heating and Air Conditioning
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15500-2

2.2 DUCTWORK AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
A. Construction: Sheet metal ducts and plenums shall be constructed with airtight joints and seams in accordance with ASHRAE standards and SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. All joints on concealed ducts shall be taped with pressureless tape and adhesive, except welded or soldered joints. Ductwork materials shall be galvanized steel or aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Minimum duct gauges required are as follows:

Maximum Dimension Galvanized Steel Aluminum
of Duct (inches) U.S. Standard Gauge B and S Gauge
12 and less 26 24
13 through 30 24 22
31 through 54 22 20
55 through 84 20 18
B. Supports: Supports for horizontal ducts and plenums shall be galvanized steel angles with hanger rods.

Supports for vertical ducts shall be band iron strap or angle bracket type. Inlet ducts shall be amply braced to withstand maximum negative pressure.

C. Insulation: The exterior of all ductwork inside of buildings downstream of air conditioning or heating units, other than ducts located in air conditioned spaces, shall be insulated with 2-inch thick flexible glass fiber insulation with a UL-labeled vapor barrier. All joints shall be taped to provide a continuous vapor seal. The insulation shall be attached to the ducts with adhesive applied in a 50 percent coverage. Insulation also shall be secured to the bottom of rectangular ducts over 24 inches wide with mechanical fasteners spaced 12 inches on centers. Ductwork to be internally lined will not require exterior insulation.

D. Lining: The interior of supply and return ducts and plenums within 10-feet distance from fans and all ductwork exposed to the weather shall be lined. Duct lining shall be 1-inch thick fiber glass fastened to the inside of the ducts. Fastening shall be 100 percent coverage adhesive and mechanical fasteners 12 inches on center in both directions starting approximately 6 inches from ends of insulation. All exposed edges, ends, and rough surfaces shall be painted with adhesive or taped with 3-inch canvas tape dipped in adhesive.

E. Bird Screens: Removable bird screens shall be provided on all outside air intakes and exhaust air discharges to outside air. Screens shall be secured in frames of same metal as screens. Bird screens shall be ½-inch mesh stainless steel by 14-gauge.

F. Flexible Connectors: Flexible duct connections shall be made with banded or flanged 8-oz canvas, or reinforced plastic, or equal at each point where a blower unit is connected to a duct. A minimum clearance of 3 inches between the duct and source of vibration shall be maintained.

G. Diffusers, Grilles, and Registers: All supply air registers and diffusers, return air, and exhaust grilles shall be constructed with smooth corners, flanges, and sponge rubber gaskets and material as noted on the Diffuser Schedule in the Contract Documents. All supply and return air registers and diffusers shall have individually variable blades and volume control dampers as indicated. All ceiling or duct-mounted outlets shall be offwhite. Wall-mounted outlets shall be factory prime-coated. Terminals shall be Titus; Metalaire; Krueger; or equal.

H. Acoustic Louvers: Acoustic louvers shall be provided as indicated. Acoustic louvers shall have a minimum noise reduction of 14 dB at octave band No. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall submit certified data from a laboratory substantiating the acoustical performance. Static pressure drop shall not exceed 0.100 inches W.C. at 750 fpm.

Ventilating, Heating and Air Conditioning
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15500-3 I. Acoustic louvers shall be of galvanized formed steel construction with air foil blades. Frame and blade face shall be of 16 and 18-gauge, respectively. Air-side blades shall have perforations, and blades shall be packed with 3.5 lb. density fiber glass or with inert, vermin-and moisture-proof mineral fiber for better acoustical performance. Louvers shall be flush with exterior wall, with mounting frames caulked to provide weathertight connections. All protruding inside edges shall be provided with smooth moldings. Acoustic louvers shall be Ruskin,Industrial Acoustics Company; or equal. Coat louvers in accordance with Section 09800 – Special Coatings.

J. Turning Vanes: Square-turn elbows shall be fitted with shop-fabricated double-blade turning vanes mounted inside rails. Construction shall be of the same material as the duct work and be rigid enough to prevent vibration at high air flow.

K. Air Extractors: An air extractor shall be provided on each take-off from main supply duct adjacent to any diffuser, register, or grille where a splitter is not used. Air extractors shall be Carnes; Tuttle and Bailey; or equal. Extractors shall have synchronized steel curved blades, heavy side rails, and screw operator.

2.3 CONTROLS
A. General: All cooling, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment shall be provided with manual and automatic control systems as indicated. The exhaust fan shall be interlocked with the air conditioner to prevent fan operation while the A/C unit is operating. The exhaust fan shall be controlled from a HANDOFF-AUTOMATIC switch and line-voltage cooling thermostat, wall-mounted. Individual exhaust fans shall have manual switches for single or 2-speed motors as indicated.

B. Thermostats: Room thermostats shall be of the modulating electric type, except where 2-position action is required. Thermostats shall be located in air-conditioned spaces and shall have a range of 40 to 100 degrees F.

All thermostats shall have exposed adjustment dials and a thermometer on the front face. Mounting height shall be 5 feet. An insulating back shall be provided where exterior wall mounting is shown. Guards shall be provided for room thermostats installed in areas other than administrative offices or control rooms.

C. Manufacturers: Control system components and thermostats shall be as manufactured by Honeywell; Johnson Controls Company; General Controls; or equal.

2.4 PIPING
A. Piping in air conditioning systems shall be galvanized steel in accordance with Section 15025 - Steel Pipe.

Equipment drains shall be of Type "K" copper tube.

2.5 FANS
A. General: Location, type, capacity, and motor horsepower shall be as indicated. Fans shall be complete with motors, variable motor bases, variable drives, safety cages, belt guards, flexible connections to supply and/or suction ducts, vibration isolators, and necessary accessories. All fans shall be suitable for continuous operation.

B. Performance: Fans shall be guaranteed to deliver the quantities of standard air against the respective static pressure without deviating by more than 5 percent. Every fan wheel, regardless of size, shall be statically and dynamically balanced, and shall be free from objectionable vibration or noises.

Ventilating, Heating and Air Conditioning
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15500-4

2.6 SIDE WALL MOUNTED CENTRIFUGAL EXHAUST FAN
A. Side Wall Exhaust fan shall be direct mounted, direct driven, propeller type. Fan blades shall be fabricated of aluminum. Propellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced in accordance with ACMA standard 204.

Motors shall be continuous duty ball bearing design, permanently lubricated, heavy duty type, matched to the fan load and furnished at the specified RPM, voltage, phase, and enclosure. Motor drive frame assemblies and fan panels shall be epoxy painted steel. Drive frame assemblies shall be welded wire or formed channels and fan panels shall have prepunched mounting holes, formed flanges, and a deep formed inlet venturi.

Motor shall meet the requirements of Section 16460 – Electric Motors. Fan shall be certified for air and sound performance in accordance with ACMA.

B. Performance: Fans shall be guaranteed to deliver the quantities of standard air against the respective static pressure without deviating by more than 5 percent. Every fan wheel, regardless of size, shall be statically and dynamically balanced, and shall be free from objectionable vibration or noises. Fan performances indicated in the schedule shall be minimum. Fan shall have a motor size of 1/2 HP and operate at 0.5” static pressure in inches water gage. The total flow shall be 1700 cfm.

C. Fan manufacturers shall be Greenheck, or Engineer approved equal. Damper manufacturers shall be Arrow, Ruskin or equal.

2.7 AIR CONDITIONER
A. Air conditioning system shall have the following features as a minimum:

1. Cooling Capacity: 48,000 Btu/h

2. Outdoor Condenser Unit: Neoprene isolator pads, liquid line filter drier and sight glass as well as insulated refrigerant lines with 3/4” Armstrong Armaflex and Childers aluminum jacket. Sizing per manufacturer’s recommendations to achieve desired cooling capacity. All outdoor air conditioners shall have heavy galvanized or prime-coated steel cabinets of weather resistant design. Air conditioning unit shall be of the packaged, pedestal design as indicated.

3. Indoor Wall-Mounted Fan: Furnished with manufacturer recommended screw mounting bracket. 3/4” condensate drain with p-trap at vent from unit. All drain pans shall have galvanized steel or copper drain lines connected to the nearest floor sink or drain in accordance with the applicable Plumbing Code.

4. Air conditioner shall be provided with a wired remote controller. All units shall be controlled from cooling room-thermostats. Unless otherwise indicated, motorized dampers shall be controlled from outside air thermostats.

5. All air conditioning units shall have direct expansion coils and, where indicated, gas or electric heaters; filter compartments with access door and industrial type disposable filters mounted on steel frames; mixing boxes with return air, fresh air and relief dampers; mounting frame or curb and restrained springtype vibration isolators.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers

1. Daikin

2. Or Engineer Approved Equal.

Ventilating, Heating and Air Conditioning
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 15500-5

2.8 FILTERS
A. All air handling units and air conditioners shall be provided with filter compartments. The filters shall be of the disposable, high efficiency, industrial type, set into galvanized mounting frames with fastening clips for easy removal.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Roughing-In: It shall be ascertained that all inserts, chassis, shafts, and openings are correctly located; otherwise all new openings shall be cut at no additional expense.

B. Checking: Test and make tight all work, furnish all equipment necessary to carry out the tests and thoroughly clean the system before startup.

C. System Balancing: After completion of all required work, the system, as a whole, shall be checked and balanced. System balancing shall include the following:

1. Adjusting fans, dampers, diffusers, registers, valves, and other devices so that the quantities of air, water, and steam called for on the Drawings are supplied, returned, or exhausted.

2. Measuring and recording at least once the water and air temperatures delivered through each coil on full heating and full cooling: making all necessary adjustments to obtain the required conditions.

3. Measuring and recording current on each fan and motor, and checking for proper operation of all equipment.

4. Adjusting any variable blade registers to the correct setting to obtain the design conditions. - END OF SECTION -

ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 16
General Electrical Requirements
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16000-1 SECTION 16000

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. It is the intent of this part of the Contract Documents to cover the work and materials necessary for erecting a complete electrical system, tested and ready for continuous use. The system shall be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents, and Federal, State, and Local codes and regulations.

1.2 RELATED WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the work with other trades, and furnish and install the equipment in accordance with the manufacturers' requirements.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 00 General Conditions

2. Division 01 General Requirements

3. Division 02 Earthwork

4. Division 03 Concrete

5. Division 09 Painting and Special coatings

6. Division 11 Equipment

7. Division 13 Special Construction

8. Division 15 Mechanical

9. Division 17 Instrumentation

1.3 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Minimum sizes of equipment, and electrical devices, are indicated but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting, nor every structural or mechanical difficulty that will be encountered during the installation of the work.

B. Work indicated on the Plans is approximately to scale, but actual dimensions and detailed Plans should be followed as closely as field conditions permit. Field verification of scale dimensions on Plans is governed by field conditions. Installation of systems and equipment is subject to clarification as indicated in reviewed shop drawings and field coordination.

C. Discrepancies indicated on different Plans, between Plans and actual field conditions, or between Plans and Contract Documents shall be promptly brought to the attention of the ENGINEER for clarification, prior to purchasing and installing equipment.

D. The alignment of equipment and conduit shall be adjusted to accommodate architectural changes, or to avoid work of other trades, without extra expense to the CITY.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install the parts and pieces necessary to the installation of equipment, in accordance with the best practice of the trade, and in conformance with the requirements of these Contract Documents.

F. Items not specifically mentioned in these Contract Documents, or noted on the Plans, or indicated on reviewed shop drawings, but which are obviously necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be deemed to be included herein.

General Electrical Requirements
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16000-2 G. The CONTRACTOR shall lay out and install electrical work prior to installation of the pre-fabricated building. Furnish and install sleeves and openings through floors and walls, required for installation of conduits. Sleeves shall be rigidly supported and suitably packed, or sealed, to prevent ingress of wet concrete.

Spacers shall be installed in order to prevent conduit movement. Dimensions indicated for electrical equipment and their installation are restrictive dimensions.

H. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install inserts and hangers required to support conduits and other electrical equipment. If the inserts, hangers, sleeves, or other mounting hardware are improperly placed, or installed, the CONTRACTOR shall do necessary work, at their own expense, to rectify the errors.

I. Electrical equipment shall be capable of operating successfully at full-rated load, without failure, at an ambient air temperature of 60 degrees C, and specifically rated for the altitude indicated on the Plans. Electrical equipment not rated for operation at that temperature shall be provided with air conditioning to meet the manufacturers' operating temperature.

J. If any contradictions, contrasts, non-homogeneity, or inconsistency appears, the more strict criteria noted and the collective requirements in any and all of the project documents shall apply.

K. The CONTRACTOR shall perform necessary saw cutting, core drilling, excavating, removal, shoring, backfilling, and other work required for the proper installation of conduits, whether inside or outside of the buildings and structures. The CONTRACTOR shall repair and patch where demolition has taken place in a manner to match existing original structure.

1.4 REGULATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Electrical work, including connection to electrical equipment integral with mechanical equipment, shall be performed in accordance with the latest published regulations, codes, and standards, of the following:

1. National Electrical Code (NEC)

2. State and local codes

3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)

4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)

7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards

8. Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)

9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

10. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA) B. When applicable, the material used in the performance of the electrical work shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for the class of service for which they are intended.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. It is the obligation of the CONTRACTOR to organize their work, so that a complete electrical, instrumentation, and control system for the facility will be provided, and will be supported by accurate shop and record drawings, and O&M manuals.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit detailed shop drawings and data prepared and organized by the suppliers.

The quantity of submittal sets required shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

General Electrical Requirements
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16000-3 C. The submittals shall be neatly grouped and organized by specification section number, and sub-section.

Related information shall be highlighted, and the specific product shall be marked. All submittals shall be complete, and presented in one package. Incomplete submittals will be returned without review. If a portion of the project requires a fast track schedule, that portion only may be submitted earlier under a separate cover letter. The following shall be submitted to the ENGINEER and returned, reviewed by the CONTRACTOR before fabrication is started.

1. A complete list of the equipment and materials, including the manufacturer's name, product specification, descriptive data, technical literature, performance charts, catalog cuts, installation instructions, and spare part recommendations for each different item of the equipment specified. The above shall clearly show all the specified requirements as described in the Specifications including but not limited to specific U.L. and NEMA rating, technical capabilities, test result verifications, and acceptance letters.

2. Drawings containing complete point-to-point wiring and schematic diagrams, control diagrams, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will operate as intended. Drawings for each panel. cabinet, or enclosure shall show a complete Bill of Materials, wire numbers for internal panel and field wiring, terminal block numbers, proposed internal layout with assembly details, anchoring, support, and appurtenances of equipment, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearances for maintenance and operations.

3. Any exceptions to these specifications, with the reasons for requesting such exceptions, with calculations and drawings for redesign of related components, including detail drawings showing internal and assembly details, with installation instructions. Proposed layout showing any modifications or exceptions to related work made necessary by this work, with calculations and drawings showing such modifications or exceptions.

D. Upon Project acceptance, the CONTRACTOR shall submit "Record Drawings" of the electrical, control, and instrumentation systems, along with step-by-step procedure manuals for the installation, operation start-up, and maintenance of the equipment. Each set shall include installation, operating, troubleshooting, and maintenance and overhaul instructions in complete detail. It shall also include possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides, as well as simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system installed.

This shall provide the CITY with comprehensive information on all systems and components to enable operation, service, maintenance and repair. Exploded or other detailed views of all equipment, devices, assemblies, and accessory components shall be included, together with complete parts lists and ordering instructions.

1. Record Drawings:
a. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a marked-up set of Contract Document Plans showing actual installed circuit numbers, conduit sizes, cable tray routing, number of conductors, conductor sizes (larger than #12 AWG), and all other deviations from the design Plans. b. Underground conduit and concealed items shall be dimensioned on the Plans from permanent, visible, building features.
c. The CONTRACTOR shall provide actual motor size, starter size, and overload heater size, along with all other protective equipment for all 480 V and 4160 V (if applicable) motor circuits as part of the single line diagrams.
d. The CONTRACTOR shall revise all conductor identification and panel schedules to indicate asbuilt conditions.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
A. Materials, equipment, and parts comprising any unit, or part thereof, specified or indicated on the Plans, shall be new and unused, of current manufacture, and of highest grade consistent with the state of the art. Damaged materials, equipment, and parts are not considered to be new and unused, and will not be accepted.

General Electrical Requirements
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16000-4 B. Field verification of scale dimensions on Plans is directed, since actual locations, distances, and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. The CONTRACTOR shall also review architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and other Plans, and the accepted electrical and mechanical shop drawings, and shall adjust their work to conform to the conditions indicated therein.

C. The fabricator of major components, such as distribution panelboards, switchgear, and motor control centers, shall also be the manufacturer of the major devices therein.

D. Refer to various Division sections for individual equipment manufacturers. Indicated manufacturers are subject to strict compliance with the specifications and complete project documents. The reference to a particular manufacturer does not relieve the CONTRACTOR from conforming to the specified requirements.

2.2 NAMEPLATES
A. Where indicated elsewhere in these specifications, or on the Plans, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install nameplates, which shall be white laminate with black letters. The nameplates shall be fastened to the various devices with round head stainless steel screws. Each disconnecting means for service, feeder, branch, or equipment conductors, shall have nameplates indicating its purpose.

2.3 EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLIES
A. Equipment assemblies, such as Service Entrance Sections, Switchgear, Switchboards, Control and Distribution Panels, and other custom fabricated electrical enclosures shall bear a UL label as a complete assembly. The UL label on the individual components making up the assembly will not be considered sufficient to meet the present requirement. Whenever a generic UL label does not apply for the assembly, a serialized UL label shall be affixed to the assembly, and the serial number shall be submitted with the assembly record shop drawings.

B. Custom fabricated electrical control panels, and enclosures, shall bear a UL label affixed by a local UL inspector.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 UTILITY SERVICE AND EQUIPMENT
A. Electrical Utility: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for contacting and coordinating the electrical utility work with the City of Vernon Public Utilities Department.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for furnishing and installing equipment and material required to bring electrical power service to the service location in conformance with the electrical utility requirements.

The CONTRACTOR may have to provide the following for the electrical utility company's primary (from utility power line to the utility transformer) and secondary (from utility transformer to the service) electrical lines in accordance with the electrical utility company's specifications and requirements:

1. Conduits (verify quantity and sizes).

2. Trenching, backfill, and compacting (verify trench size(s), backfill material, and compaction percentage requirements).

3. Concrete pad(s) (for pad-mounted transformer(s)).

4. Cable protection along the vertical drop at the utility company's pole (if pole-mounted transformer(s)).

5. Ensuring that the utility has provided the available short circuit duty at the point of service.

6. Other items required by the power utility company's specifications.

General Electrical Requirements
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16000-5 C. The CONTRACTOR shall also submit copies of service entrance shop Drawings to the utility, per utility submittal requirements, prior to submittal to the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain written approval from the City of Vernon Public Utilities Department that the service entrance equipment is acceptable prior to release the order to the supplier for fabrication. A copy of the approval letter from the utility shall be transmitted to the ENGINEER along with the submittal.

D. Telephone Service: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for contacting the Telephone Company to coordinate requirements to provide telephone service, as called for on the Plans.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall provide trenching, conduit, and backfill for the Telephone Company's communication lines from the Telephone Company's main distribution panel to the telephone company's connection box at this project site, as required by the Telephone Company.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Coordinate the installation of electrical equipment with other trades.

1. Arrange for equipment to be built-in during structure construction.

2. Where equipment cannot be built-in during construction, arrange for sleeves, box-outs, and other openings, as required to allow installation of equipment after structure construction is complete.

B. Verify that equipment will fit support layouts indicated.

C. Equipment Dimensions and Clearances:

1. Do not use equipment that exceeds the indicated dimensions., except as approved in writing by the ENGINEER.

2. Do not use equipment or arrangements of equipment that reduce required clearances or exceed the space allocation.

D. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

E. Equipment Access:

1. Install equipment so it is readily accessible for operation and maintenance.

2. Equipment shall not be blocked or concealed.

3. Do not install electrical equipment such that it interferes with normal maintenance requirements of other equipment.

F. Equipment shall be installed plumb, square and true with the building construction, and shall be securely fastened.

G. Outdoor wall-mounted equipment, and indoor equipment mounted on earth, or water bearing walls, shall be provided with corrosion-resistant spacers to maintain 1/4-inch separation between the equipment and the wall.

H. Screen or seal all openings into outdoor equipment to prevent the entrance of rodents and insects.

I. Equipment fabricated from aluminum shall not be imbedded in earth or concrete.

J. Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports:

1. Use supports as detailed on the Plans and as specified.

2. Supports and anchoring devices shall be rated and sized based on dimensions and weights verified from approved equipment submittals.

3. Hardware shall be stainless steel.

General Electrical Requirements
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16000-6

4. Do not cut, or weld to, building structural members.

5. Do not mount safety switches and external equipment to other equipment enclosures, unless enclosure mounting surface is properly braced to accept mounting of external equipment.

K. CONTRACTOR shall verify exact rough-in location and dimensions for connection to electrical items furnished by others.

1. Shop drawings shall be obtained from those furnishing the equipment.

2. Proceeding without proper information may require the CONTRACTOR to remove and replace work that does not meet the conditions imposed by the equipment supplied.

3. Provide sleeves wherever openings are required through new concrete or masonry members. Place sleeves accurately and coordinate locations with the ENGINEER.

4. Should any cutting and patching be required on account of failure of the CONTRACTOR to coordinate penetrations, such cutting and patching shall be done at the expense of the CONTRACTOR.
a. The CONTRACTOR shall not endanger the stability of any structural member by cutting, digging, chasing, or drilling and shall not, at any time, cut or alter the work without the ENGINEER's written consent.
1) Provide additional reinforcing if required.
2) Cutting shall be done neatly using proper tools and methods. b. Subsequent patching to restore walls, ceilings, or floors to their original condition shall be done by the CONTRACTOR.

L. Provide concrete foundations or pads required for electrical equipment as indicated or specified.

1. Floor-mounted equipment shall be mounted on a 4-inch concrete housekeeping pad. Pad shall be poured on top of the finished floor or slab.

3.3 TEMPORARY POWER
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install, and maintain, temporary power and lighting systems needed for construction. This temporary system shall include weatherproof panel(s) for the CONTRACTOR's main breakers and distribution system. Ground fault interrupting equipment shall be installed. Connections shall be watertight, with wiring done with Type SO portable cable. After construction is completed, the CONTRACTOR shall remove temporary power equipment and devices.

3.4 CUTTING AND REPAIRING
A. Where it becomes necessary to cut into existing work for the purpose of making electrical installations, core drills shall be used for making circular holes. Other demolition methods for cutting or removing shall be reviewed by the ENGINEER prior to starting the work.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall repair damage caused by construction, or demolition work, and restore damaged areas to original condition.

3.5 CORROSION PROTECTION
A. Wherever dissimilar metals, except conduit and conduit fittings, come in contact, the CONTRACTOR shall isolate these metals, as required, with neoprene washers, 9 mil polyethylene tape, or gaskets. Where fastening conduit, electroplated, or equivalent fasteners and stainless steel bolts shall be used.

B. Factory finishes damaged during shipping or construction shall be restored to original new condition. Rust shall be removed, and bare metal surfaces shall be primed and painted to match the original surrounding finish.

General Electrical Requirements
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16000-7 C. Electrical panels, switchgear, motor control centers, and other electrical equipment shall be shipped in sealed dust and moisture proof plastic sheet enclosures, and the seal maintained until units are installed. Said units shall be new and free of any dirt, dust, water, grease, rust, damaged parts or components. Relays, starters, circuit breakers, switches, contacts, insulators, mechanisms, and buses shall be free of dust, dirt, oil, moisture, metal shavings, and other debris before testing and energizing.

D. Once equipment is installed, it shall be protected at all times with plastic sheet covers until the area is free of dirt, dust, paint spray, water, and other trades. Heat shall be provided to eliminate condensation.

3.6 COORDINATION OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
A. The CONTRACTOR shall verify actual equipment, and motor full-load, and locked-rotor current ratings. The necessary minimum equipment, wire, and conduit sizes are indicated on the Plans. If the CONTRACTOR furnishes equipment of different ratings, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the actual current rating of equipment furnished with the branch circuit conductor size, the overcurrent protection, the controller size, the motor starter, and the branch circuit overcurrent protection. The branch circuit conductors shall have a current carrying capacity of not less than 125 percent of the actual full-load current rating. The size of the branch circuit conductors shall be such that the voltage drop from the overcurrent protection devices, up to the equipment, shall not exceed 2 percent, when the equipment is running at full-load and rated voltage.

3.7 TESTING
A. The electrical work shall be free from improper grounds, and from short circuits. The correctness of the wiring shall be verified first by visual comparison of the conductor connections with connection diagrams. Next, individual circuit continuity checks shall be made by using electrical circuit testers. Last, the correctness of the wiring shall be verified by the actual electrical operation of the electrical and mechanical devices. Any deviation from the wiring indicated on the Plans, or accepted Drawings, shall be corrected and indicated on the record drawings.

B. Each conductor shall be identified as required by the Contract Documents. This identification shall be indicated on the record drawings to enable rapid and accurate circuit tracing by maintenance personnel.

3.8 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS
A. Single line diagrams, as indicated on the Drawings, show circuit voltages, circuit protection rating, and other pertinent data. Where conflicts exist on the Drawings, the single line diagrams shall take precedence.

Grounding conductors are not necessarily indicated. See grounding requirements specified elsewhere herein. - END OF SECTION -
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16100-1 SECTION 16100

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section outlines the wiring requirements for the electrical work unless otherwise specified.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for the CITY’s approval material lists, shop drawings, factory test reports and technical data to the extent required in this Section and Section 16000.

1.3 WIRING
A. Wiring for Furnished Equipment. The wiring from electrical panels, control panels and motor control centers to the furnished equipment shall include all the required materials and installations to complete the wiring as shown on the Drawings, specified and required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide basic materials and all wiring installations as indicated, specified and required.

2.2 METAL CONDUITS
A. Conduits shall be steel, hot-dipped galvanized and equipped with couplings and thread protector caps. The surfaces and threads shall be corrosion-resistant coated. Conduits shall be in ten foot lengths and manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit Co., Nucor, Youngstown, or approved equal. Conduits shall be a minimum size of 3/4 inch above ground, and a minimum size of 1 inch below ground. Supports shall be provided for all conduits.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit shall be provided for all exposed exterior installation unless otherwise indicated and/or specified.

C. Electrical Metallic Tubing may be substituted for rigid steel conduit on the interior of the control building unless otherwise indicated and/or specified.

2.3 PVC COATED - METAL CONDUITS
A. The PVC coated galvanized rigid conduit must be UL Listed. The PVC coating must have been investigated by UL as providing the primary corrosion protection for the rigid metal conduit.

Ferrous fittings for general service locations must be UL Listed with PVC as the primary corrosion protection. Hazardous location fittings, prior to plastic coating must be UL listed. All conduit and fittings must be new, unused material. Applicable UL standards may include: UL 6 Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel, UL514B Standard for Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings.

B. The PVC coated galvanized rigid conduit must be ETL Verified to the Intertek ETL SEMKO High Temperature H2O PVC Coating Adhesion Test Procedure for 200 hours. The PVC coated galvanized rigid conduit must bear the ETL Verified PVC-001 label to signify compliance to the adhesion performance standard.

Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16100-2 C. The conduit shall be hot dip galvanized inside and out with hot galvanized threads.

D. A PVC sleeve extending one pipe diameter or two inches, whichever is less, shall be formed at every female fitting opening except unions. The inside sleeve diameter shall be matched to the outside diameter of the conduit.

E. The PVC coating on the outside of conduit couplings shall have a series of longitudinal ribs 40 mils in thickness to protect the coating from tool damage during installation.

F. Form 8 Condulets, 1/2” through 2” diameters, shall have a tongue-in-groove gasket to effectively seal against the elements. The design shall be equipped with a positive placement feature to ease and assure proper installation. Certified results confirming seal performance at 15 psig (positive) and 25 in. of mercury (vacuum) for 72 hours shall be available.

G. Form 8 Condulets shall be supplied with plastic encapsulated stainless steel cover screws.

H. A urethane coating shall be uniformly and consistently applied to the interior of all conduit and fittings. This internal coating shall be a nominal 2 mil thickness. Conduit or fittings having areas with thin or no coating shall be unacceptable.

I. The PVC exterior and urethane interior coatings applied to the conduit shall afford sufficient flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking at temperatures above 30°F (-1°C).

J. All male threads on conduit, elbows and nipples shall be protected by application of a urethane coating.

K. All female threads on fittings or conduit couplings shall be protected by application of a urethane coating.

L. Independent certified test results shall be available to confirm coating adhesion under the following conditions.

1. Conduit and condulet exposure to 150°F (65°C) and 95% relative humidity with a minimum mean time to failure of 30 days. (ASTM D1151)

2. The interior coating bond shall be confirmed using the Standard Test Methods for Rating Adhesion by Tape Test (ASTM D3359).

3. No trace of the internal coating shall be visible on a white cloth following six wipes over the coating which has been wetted with acetone (ASTM D1308).

4. The exterior coating bond shall be confirmed using the methods described in Section 3.8, NEMA RN1. After these tests the physical properties of the exterior coating shall exceed the minimum requirements specified in Table 3.1, NEMA RN1.

M. Right angle beam clamps and U bolts shall be specially formed and sized to snugly fit the outside diameter of the coated conduit. All U bolts will be supplied with plastic encapsulated nuts that cover the exposed portions of the threads.

N. Installation of the PVC Coated Conduit System shall be performed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s Installation Manual. To assure correct installation, the installer shall be certified by Manufacturer to install coated conduit.

O. Type 304 stainless steel screws shall be furnished and used to attach the cover to the conduit body. All coated material shall be installed and patched according to the manufacturer’s recommended installation and patching instructions.

P. Conduit straps shall be PVC coated or stainless steel.

Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16100-3 Q. Approved Material: PVC coated galvanized rigid conduit and Fittings as manufactured by PlastiBond, Perma-Cote, Kor Kap, or approved equal.

2.4 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS
A. Nonmetallic conduits shall be Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride as manufactured by Carlon, Allied Tube & Conduit Co., Cantex, JM Eagle, or approved equal. All conduits shall be of one type, and low temperature, corrosion, and moisture resistant.

B. Nonmetallic Conduit may be installed for underground conduit runs which are outside of the buildings and structures and run between buildings and structures. Rigid steel bends and risers shall be used with nonmetallic conduit wherever conduit rises above grade. Each nonmetallic conduit shall contain an appropriately sized grounding conductor per NEC requirements.

2.5 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
A. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be provided for short connections to equipment as shown on the drawings and as required which withstand temperatures from -50 degrees Fahrenheit to +220 degrees Fahrenheit.

B. Liquid-tight Conduit shall have an interlocked flexible galvanized steel core with a permanently bonded exterior gray polyvinyl chloride jacket.

C. Conduits, l-l/4 inch and smaller shall have an internal copper bonding conductor wound spirally in the space between each convolution for the equipment ground provided by the manufacturer.

D. Separate Ground Conductor shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR in liquid-tight flexible conduits that do not have the internal copper bonding conductors included by the manufacturer.

E. Manufacturers for liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be Anaconda, Electri-Flex, or approved equal.

2.6 CAST METAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
A. Provide conduit outlet bodies, boxes, fittings, gaskets and covers for lighting outlets, lighting switches, receptacles, control stations, alarm, switch and thermostat outlets, etc. in exposed conduit installations as indicated and required. Cast boxes and fittings shall be finished as specified in Section 16000. The outlet bodies, boxes, fittings and covers shall be cast iron alloy with threaded hubs, and of sufficient size to provide free space for all conductors that shall be enclosed. The materials shall be manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, Pyle-National, or approved equal.

B. Covers and Gaskets shall be provided for all conduit outlet bodies, boxes and fittings. The covers shall be cast iron alloy and equipped with neoprene gaskets.

C. PVC Coated Fittings shall have the same polyvinyl chloride coating that is on the conduit to which they shall be connected. The PVC coating shall be bonded to the surfaces of cast outlet bodies, boxes, fittings and supports by Kor-Kap, Robroy, Youngstown, or approved equal.

D. Plastic Fittings shall be solvent weld type, and shall match the conduit to which they shall be connected.

E. Expansion/Deflection Fittings shall be provided as indicated, specified and required. The fittings shall permit movement between two conduits without damage to the conduits and conductors.

The expansion/deflection fittings consist of cast metal conduit hubs securely attached to a flexible outer neoprene jacket. A flexible copper grounding strap shall be provided inside the fitting and Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16100-4 connected to the two hubs. The linear expansion or contraction shall be a movement up to 3/4 inch. The linear misalignment shall be a movement up to 3/4 inch. The angular misalignment shall be a movement up to 30 degrees. The expansion/deflection fittings shall provide flexible and watertight conduit joints.

F. Thread Lubricant shall be provided for all metal conduit threads. The lubricant shall inhibit corrosion and maintain grounding continuity, and shall be Crouse-Hinds STL, Thomas and Betts "Kopr-Shield" or approved equal.

G. Couplings and Elbows shall be of the same type as the conduit to which they shall be connected, except where rigid steel bends and risers are connected to nonmetallic conduits where conduits rise above grade. For metallic conduits, the couplings and elbows shall be steel, hot dipped galvanized, threaded and one-piece. For plastic conduits, couplings and elbows shall have plain ends for tight weld fits, which form watertight joints.

2.7 STEEL BOXES AND FITTINGS
A. Provide the steel boxes and fittings as indicated and required.

B. Pull Boxes shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the connected conduits and enclosed conductors. Boxes 24 inches square and smaller shall have gasketed screw type covers. Larger boxes shall have bi-parting gasketed hinged doors with latch mechanisms, handles and cylinder locks complete. Provide two keys for each lock. Pull boxes shall be painted as specified in Section 16000 and 16118. The pull boxes shall be Hoffman, Boss, Cooper B-Line, or approved equal.

2.8 WATER SEAL FITTINGS
A. Provide the malleable iron water seal fittings connected to rigid steel conduits as indicated, specified and required.

B. Sealing Bushings shall be provided on the ends of exterior underground conduits that terminate at indoor equipment. The bushing shall consist of a thick neoprene sealing ring secured between two metal plates by socket head screws. When the conduit sealing bushing is in place and the screws are tightened, the neoprene shall become compressed between the metal plates and be forced against the conduit inside wall and also against the conductor insulation to form a watertight seal inside the conduit.

C. Wall and Floor Seals shall be provided to completely seal the areas around the conduits that pass through concrete walls and floors. Seals shall have a neoprene grommet between two pressure rings, which provides a watertight seal on the outer surface of the entering conduits.

2.9 CONDUIT FITTINGS
A. Provide all the hot-dip galvanized steel and iron conduit fittings required to complete the wiring installations.

B. Liquid-tight Conduit Fittings shall be Types LT, ST, CT as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, Pyle-National or approved equal.

C. Union shall be provided, as required, for conduit connections to threaded outlet bodies, boxes, and equipment, for connecting two steel conduits together. Unions shall be type UNY or UNF.

Running threads are not acceptable. Union shall be Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Pyle-National or approved equal.

Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16100-5 D. Bushing Reducers shall be provided in conduit fitting hubs for connections to smaller conduits.

Reducers shall be Appleton, Thomas and Betts, or approved equal.

E. Conduit Enlargers shall be provided for connecting two conduits of different sizes together. The enlargers shall be Appleton, Thomas and Betts, or approved equal.

F. Locknuts shall be provided on the threads of conduits that enter through close fitting openings in enclosures. Locknuts shall have notches all around for tightening with a screwdriver. Locknuts shall be Appleton, OZ Gedney, Thomas and Betts or approved equal.

G. Metallic Insulated Bushings with ground terminals shall be provided on the ends of threaded steel conduits and nipples that terminate through openings in sheet steel enclosures. The malleable iron grounding bushings shall have smooth and well rounded surfaces to protect the conductor insulation. The conduit threads shall be deep, clean and easily attached to the conduits. The bushings shall be OZ Gedney, Thomas and Betts or approved equal.

H. Plugs shall be the recessed type and installed in all unused conduit fitting hubs and couplings.

Plugs shall be Appleton, Crouse-Hinds or approved equal.

I. Interchangeable Hubs shall be provided for rigid steel conduit connections to sheet steel enclosures. The interchangeable hub shall have an insulated throat, sealing ring and vibrationproof nut. Machined serrations on hub and nut shall bite into the metal enclosure assuring an equipment ground. The hubs shall be Myers "Scru-Tite”, "Space-Saver", Raco, or approved equal.

2.10 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conductors and cables shall be new, single conductor, copper, not smaller than #12 AWG (except fixture wire or control power conductors) unless otherwise indicated, and as shown on the Drawings. No running splices will be allowed for new conductor installations. Where modifications to existing conductor runs, and conductors are unable to be replaced, an acceptable means of splicing would be to use STA-KON butt splice or equal, with heat shrinkable insulating cover (T&B cat #H5 or equal). Use calibrated T&B #WT1455 ratchet tool for compression of terminal at all STA-KON terminals and connectors.

B. Steel Interlocked Armor cables shall be provided for power circuits to the motors when called for on the Drawings. The cables shall be 600 volts, three conductor, rated 90 degrees centigrade and stranded copper. The conductors shall be individually polyethylene insulated, grouped together with fillers and ground wires, and covered with binding tape. The cable shall be enclosed in an interlocked aluminum or galvanized steel armor that shall be protected with a polyvinyl chloride outer jacket. The interlocked armor cables shall be approved for submersible pump power wiring installations. The power cables shall be manufactured by General Electric, Okonite, Cyprus or approved equal. The power cables shall be securely attached to steel messenger cables with stainless steel binding tape as shown on the Drawings unless otherwise indicated.

C. Conductors 250MCM and Larger shall be stranded, 600 volts, ethylene propylene rubber insulation, Type RHW. Conductors shall be manufactured by Rome, Southwire, or approved equal.

D. Conductors smaller than 250MCM shall be stranded, 600 volt and Type XHHW-2. Conductors shall be manufactured by Rome, Southwire, or approved equal.

E. Ground and Neutral Conductors shall be provided for the required ground and neutral wiring.

1. The insulated ground and neutral conductors shall be the same type as the phase conductors.

2. Bare ground conductors shall be copper, soft drawn, annealed, concentric lay, stranded conforming to ASTM Specifications B3 and B8.

Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16100-6 F. Fixture Wires shall be rated 90 degrees centigrade, #16 AWG stranded, thermoplastic insulated with an outer jacket. The wire shall be Type TFFN and manufactured by Brand-Rex, Carol Cable, or approved equal.

G. Control power conductors shall be type XHHW stranded #14 gauge with manufacturer sequential number identification on exterior of insulation jacket.

H. Instrumentation Signal Cables shall be Type TC single twisted pair or multi twisted pairs of stranded, copper cables with 600 volt, 15 mil polyvinyl chloride insulation over each conductor, overall aluminum-mylar tape shield, overall tinned copper drain wire and 45 mil minimum polyvinyl chloride jacket overall, 90 degrees centigrade dry/75 degrees centigrade wet rating.

Twisted pair cables that are required to be shielded, shall have aluminum-mylar tape shields and tinned copper drain wires over individual twisted pairs of cable. Single twisted pair cables shall be #16 AWG minimum. Cables shall be manufactured by Belden, Okonite, or approved equal.

I. Wire Lubricant shall be provided to ease the pulling of cables and conductors in conduits. The lubricant shall be Aqua Gel, Polywater or approved equal. “Yellow 77” is not acceptable.

2.11 WIRE CONNECTORS
A. Connectors shall be provided for splices and terminal connections of all copper conductors and cables. The connector shall fit the conductor to which it shall be connected, and the assembly shall have joint contact surfaces not less than 50 percent.

B. High voltage conductors (480V) shall be terminated in junction boxes using appropriately sized and color coded Weidmuller terminal blocks (green = grounding conductors, white or gray = neutral/grounded conductors, black red or blue for medium voltage (120V-240V) and brown, orange and yellow for high voltage conductors (480V)).

C. Compression Connectors for # 8 AWG and larger shall be copper lugs for terminal connections, and two-way copper sleeves and taps for splice connections. A crimping tool shall be provided to make tight and neat compression connections. The connectors and crimping tool shall be Square D, Thomas and Betts, Buchanan or approved equal.

D. Tapered Spring Connectors shall have live springs attached to inner steel housings and enclosed with plastic insulators. Connectors shall be provided for # 10 AWG conductors and smaller, and shall be Buchanan Type B2, Scotchlok Type B, Thomas and Betts Type PT or approved equal.

E. Ground Clamps shall be provided for cable connections to ground rods and metal pipes as shown on the Drawings. Clamps shall be copper alloy, heavy duty, corrosion resistant and consist of Ubolts and saddles with bolted cable connections. The ground clamps shall be OZ Gedney, Thomas and Betts, Burndy or approved equal.

F. Electrical Tape shall be plastic, 0.007 inches thick, and resistant to abrasion, alkalies, acids, corrosion, moisture, low and high temperatures. The tape shall be Scotch No. 33 Plus, Plymouth Premium Black No. 4453, or approved equal.

G. Wire Markers shall be provided to identify each conductor at equipment terminals, and in intermediate junction boxes, pull boxes, handholes and manholes. At motor control centers and control panels, identify each motor or other electrical device circuit conductor with the motor or device number shown on the drawings and with the terminal number of the motor control center or control panel to which the conductor is connected. At motor and device terminals, at control stations, and in junction boxes, pull boxes, handholes and manholes, identify each motor or device circuit conductor with the terminal number of the motor control center or control panel to which the conductor is connected. In addition to identifying each conductor with the terminal number, in junction boxes, pull boxes, handholes and manholes, identify each group of Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16100-7 conductors forming a motor or device circuit with the motor or device number shown on the drawings. At panelboards, junction boxes, pull boxes, handholes and manholes, identify each panelboard circuit conductor with the panelboard number and circuit number. The individual conductor wire markers shall be adhesive and manufactured by Thomas and Betts, Brady, Scotch 3M or approved equal. The wire marker to identify groups of conductors shall be nylon cable tie markers as manufactured by Brady, Seton, Thomas and Betts, Panduit or approved equal. The marker pads on the cable tie markers shall be large enough to show the motor or device numbers.

The motor or device numbers on the cable tie markers shall be 3/16 inch high minimum and shall be applied to the marker pads using marking pens for the purpose which shall be provided by the manufacturer of the cable tie markers. When a device is not numbered on the drawings, use a short descriptive title or assign numbers and provide the CITY with a list of the devices and assigned numbers. Electrical devices include items such as solenoid valves, vibrators, horns, heaters, analyzers, computers, instruments, etc.

2.12 PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards shall be factory assembled, metal enclosed, dead front and equipped with bus, time switches, contactors, terminals and thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers as shown on the drawings.

B. Circuit Breakers shall be molded case, quick-make, quick-break, single and multipole, and bolted type. Each circuit breaker shall have clear indications for "ON," "OFF", and "TRIP" positions.

The minimum interrupting capacity shall be 10,000 symmetrical amperes at 240 volts. As indicated, provide devices to lock the branch circuit breaker in the "ON" and "OFF" positions.

Ground fault protection, 5 milliampere sensitivity, shall be provided for the indicated 120 volt branch circuits, which shall be an integral part of the regular branch breaker. A single pole circuit breaker with integral ground fault circuit interruption shall require no more panelboard branch circuit space than the regular single pole circuit breaker.

C. Copper Bus shall be provided for panelboards. Bus shall be provided for the complete length of the panelboard branch circuit area including circuits indicated as spaces. Bus bars shall be drilled and tapped for the indicated spaces for installation of future circuit breakers.

D. Single Phase Panelboards, three wire, shall be bussed so that any two adjacent single-pole breakers shall be connected to opposite polarities. A single handle two-pole circuit breaker can be installed in any location, and in place of two adjacent single pole breakers.

E. Terminals and connectors shall be provided for the feeder, neutral and branch conductors shown on the Drawings.

F. Circuit Numbers shall start at the top of the panelboard. Odd numbers shall be assigned in sequence on the left side, and even numbers shall be in sequence on the right side of the panelboard.

G. The Cabinet shall enclose the bus and breaker assembly, and shall be steel fabricated and coated with corrosion-resistant finish as specified in Section 16000 and 16160. The front of the panelboard shall include a trim, hinged door, flush cylinder lock with catch. The lock shall be furnished with two keys, and all locks shall be keyed alike. Fronts shall not be removable when the door is in the locked position.

H. Contactors shall be provided as indicated and specified in this Section.

I. Metal Circuit Directory frame and card with clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1/4-inch high and 3 inches long for each branch circuit. The card shall be completely typed to identify each connected and spare circuit.

Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16100-8

2.13 MOTORS AND CONTROLS
A. The motors shall be furnished and installed with the driven equipment as indicated and specified per plans.

B. Motor Wiring shall be provided as shown on the Drawings. Include the wiring interconnections between the motors, motor starters, control panels and controls as required.

C. Control Power shall be 120 volts, single phase and 60 hertz unless otherwise indicated. A separate control transformer shall be provided for each motor magnetic starter, contactor and grouped relays as indicated.

D. Contactors shall be provided for circuits as shown on the Drawings, specified and required. The contactor shall be electrically held unless otherwise indicated, 600 volt, 60 hertz, industrial duty, and connected to 120 volts AC circuit with remote control device. The drawings shall indicate the number of poles and ampere ratings for the contactors and the locations, which shall be mounted inside motor control centers, panelboards or separate metal enclosures as indicated. Enclosures shall be finished as specified in Section 16000 and 16160. The silver alloy power contacts shall be load break within the rating of the contactor without assistance from additional arcing contacts. The magnetic coil shall be continuous duty, encapsulated and easily removable. The magnet shall provide rapid action on pickup or dropout and satisfactory operation without hum.

The 120 volt circuit shall be provided by an individual control power transformer for each contactor. The contactors shall be Square D Class 8903, Cutler-Hammer Type C30, AllenBradley Bulletin 702 or approved equal.

2.14 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
A. Circuit breakers, fuses, relays and other protective devices that protect the conductors and equipment against overload currents and short circuit currents shall be provided as indicated, specified and required. The circuit breakers shall be coordinated as specified in this Section and Section 16000 and 16141.

B. Circuit Breakers shall be molded case type unless otherwise indicated. Breakers shall be quickmake and quick-break on manual or automatic operation. The drawings shall indicate the number of poles and ampere trip ratings. The handle mechanism shall be trip-free which prevents holding the contacts against overload or short circuit conditions.

1. The thermal device shall provide time-delay tripping on overloads, and the magnetic device shall provide instantaneous tripping on short circuits. The instantaneous magnetic trip shall be adjustable and accessible from the front of the circuit breaker on frame sizes above 100 amperes. Non-automatic breakers shall have no tripping devices, and shall be used for manual switching of circuits. Molded case thermal-magnetic circuit breakers shall have at least the following interrupting capacities in symmetrical amperes at 480 volts unless otherwise indicated.
a. 100 Ampere Frame - 22,000.
b. 225 Ampere Frame - 22,000.
c. 400 Ampere Frame - 30,000.
d. 600 Ampere Frame - 30,000.
e. 800 Ampere Frame - 30,000.
f. 1,000 Ampere Frame - 30,000.
g. 1,200 Ampere Frame - 30,000.
h. 2,000 Ampere Frame – 65,000.
i. 2,500 Ampere Frame - 65,000.
j. 4,000 Ampere Frame - 65,000.

Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16100-9

2. Solid state circuit breakers shall be equipped with programmers, integral current sensors, logic and trip circuitry, sensor-powered shunt trips and integral ground fault protection. The programmer shall include silicon transistors, silicon diodes, silicon controlled rectifiers and printed circuitboards to assure the circuit breaker's reliability and stability. Each printed circuit board shall be given a protective epoxy coating to prevent moisture absorption, fungus growth and signal leakage. Gold plated surfaces shall be provided on all electrical connectors and adjustment taps. Sensing power and signals shall be derived from three current transformers inside the circuit breaker, which shall supply power to the solid state programmer. The trip shall utilize logic circuitry contained in the programmer. The ampere setting shall be a tap adjustment which selects the continuous current setting of the breaker.

These tap adjustments shall be made with knobs on the front of the programmers.

Regulated DC power shall be provided by the full wave rectifiers and filters in the power supply. There shall be individual signals from the programmer which shall trip the breaker on overloads, short circuits, ground faults and high temperatures. The interrupting capacity for the solid state circuit breaker shall be 100,000 symmetrical amperes at 480 volts, unless otherwise indicated. It shall be possible to lock the operator handle in the "off" position with a padlock.

3. Molded plastic housings that contain standard molded case circuit breakers and current limiters connected to the load side of the breakers shall be provided as indicated. The circuit breaker shall be ambient temperature compensated, and shall be provided with thermal overload protection. The integrally fused circuit breaker shall be capable of interrupting short circuit currents up to 100,000 symmetrical amperes at 480 volts, unless otherwise indicated. The time current limiting characteristics of the fuses shall be coordinated with the time current tripping characteristics of the circuit breaker. The fuse limiters shall be individually interlocked with the breaker element tripping mechanism so that no fuse can be inserted or removed until the circuit breaker is in the "off" position. An interlock shall be provided so the circuit breaker cannot be closed if a fuse limiter is either missing or has blown. Fuse limiters shall be individually removable from the molded case housing. It shall be possible to lock the operator handle in the "off" position with a padlock.

4. Motor circuit protectors (MCP) shall be provided as shown on the drawings. They shall be molded case magnetic-trip-only circuit breakers. Each pole shall provide instantaneous protection by means of a single adjustable magnetic element that trips all currents equal or above the trip setting. The single adjustment screw shall adjust all poles simultaneously.

Tripping shall be clearly indicated by the handle automatically assuring a position midway between the manual "OFF" and "ON" positions. All poles shall be constructed to open, close and trip simultaneously. The contacts shall be of non-welding silver alloy. It shall be possible to lock the operator handle in the "OFF" position with a padlock.

5. As indicated, motor circuit protectors shall be provided with current limiters having an interrupting capacity of 100,000 amperes, unless otherwise indicated. The MCP and limiter shall be fully coordinated so the motor circuit protector shall open all three poles if the limiter operated. The current limiters shall be so constructed that they can only be replaced by an identical or similar limiter having the same interrupting capacity. It shall be possible to lock the motor circuit protector handle in the "OFF" position with a Padlock.

6. The circuit breakers shall be mounted inside low voltage switchgears, motor control centers, switchboards or separate metal enclosures as indicated. Breakers shall be equipped with indications for the "trip","on", and "off" positions, and connectors that fit the conductors shown on the drawings. Submittal shall include complete descriptive data, technical data and manufacturers Certified Test Reports for circuit breakers 600 amperes and larger. The molded case circuit breakers shall be manufactured by Square D, Allen Bradley, Cutler Hammer, Siemens, General Electric, or approved equal.

Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16100-10 C. Fused Switches shall be provided in metal enclosures that are suitable for locations shown on the Drawings. Each switch shall be industrial type, heavy duty, horsepower rated, quick-make, quickbreak and equipped with fuses, cover-handle interlock, "ON-OFF" indications and feature to lock the operating handle in the "OFF" position. The drawings shall indicate the volts, amperes and number of poles. The switches shall include connectors that shall fit the conductors shown on the drawings. The fuses shall be Fusetron or Low-Peak dual-element type and capable to interrupt 200,000 amperes, unless otherwise indicated. Ratings for volts and amperes shall be shown on the drawings. The enclosure shall be finished as specified in Section 16160. On the front of the enclosure, attach a plastic nameplate that identifies the load. The fused switches shall be manufactured by Square D, Allen Bradley, Cutler Hammer, Siemens, General Electric, or approved equal.

D. Overload Relays shall be provided in each phase of all circuit breakers and magnetic starters to properly protect the conductors and equipment that shall be connected on the circuits. Provide one spare overload relay for each overload relay provided.

E. Overcurrent Protection Device Coordination. All overcurrent protection devices on this project shall be coordinated so that they will perform as follows:

1. When two or more overcurrent protective devices in series with each other experience current flow greater than their rated current, the device with the lowest rated current shall trip and/or open the circuit first and thereby prevent the higher rated devices from operating.

2. The Supplier of the circuit breakers shall prepare a coordination study to verify the above stated performance requirements. The study shall be documented by the Supplier and the documents shall include but not be limited to the following:
a. Manufacturer's overcurrent device operating curve printed on transparent paper for each overcurrent device. In the case of fuses, both minimum melt and maximum clearing time curves shall be included.
b. One reproducible copy of all project single line diagrams so marked to show which operating curve applies to each overcurrent device on the diagram (the operating curves shall also be correspondingly marked).
c. A tabulation of the required settings of all of the adjustable overcurrent devices so that the performance requirements are met. This documented coordination study shall be submitted for review before the overcurrent devices are supplied for the project.

Circuit breakers which have ground fault protection features are specifically required to meet this performance requirement.

2.15 WIRING DEVICES
A. Receptacles and switches shall be specification grade, heavy duty and provided in galvanized steel and cast metal boxes with covers as identified and located on the drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, the device phenolic color shall be ivory for all flush duplex receptacles and local switches, and their coverplates. Unless otherwise indicated the device phenolic color shall be brown for all duplex receptacles and local switches which are installed in surface mounted boxes.

Galvanized steel boxes shall be installed in the walls for flush devices. All surface device outlets shall have cast iron boxes.

B. Convenience Receptacles, for exterior installations, shall be single, grounding type, polarized, NEMA 5-15R, rated 20 amperes and 125 volts AC, and shall have side screw terminals for copper wire unless otherwise indicated equipped with ground fault capabilities. The metal coverplate shall attach to the box with corrosion resistant screws. The plug opening in the coverplate shall have an ethylene propylene rubber gasket. Attached to the coverplate shall be a stainless steel hinge-spring metal cover. The receptacles shall be ivory and manufactured by Hubbell, Slater, P&S, Arrow Hart, General Electric or approved equal. The convenience outlet Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16100-11 shall be weatherproof with the hinged cover closed. Also, the outlet shall be weatherproof with the hinged cover open and a cord plug attached to the receptacle. The coverplate shall be manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, Intermatic or approved equal.

C. Local and Weatherproof Switches shall be toggle type, rated 20 amperes and 120-277 volts AC, and equipped with side screw terminals for copper wire. Single pole switches shall be #1221, #1991, #4901 brown and ivory. Three way switches shall be #1223, #1993, #4903 brown and ivory. The switches shall be manufactured by Hubbell, Slater, P&S, Arrow Hart, General Electric or approved equal.

2.16 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Provide the non-fusible disconnect switches, as indicated, specified and required.

B. Switches shall be steel enclosed, heavy duty, NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R as required, 2-pole and 3- pole, 250 volt and 600 volt, ampere rating as indicated, and finished as specified in Section 16000. On the front of the enclosure, attach a plastic nameplate that identifies the load.

Disconnect switches shall be manufactured by Square D, Allen Bradley, Cutler Hammer, Siemens, General Electric, or approved equal.

C. Mechanisms shall have quick-make and quick-break operating handles and provisions for padlocking in the "OFF" position. The switch shall have an interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of the hinged cover when the switch is in the "ON" position, and an interlock to prevent closing the switch mechanism with the hinged cover open.

D. Copper Lugs shall be included for the copper wire connections. The lug shall fit the conductor which shall be connected to the lug.

2.17 SUPPORTS
A. Provide the galvanized and PVC coated metal channels, fittings, stanchions, clamps, hangers, and required hardware to support all conduit and equipment as required.

B. Channels shall be steel and cold rolled. One side of the channel shall have a continuous slot. On both sides of the slot, the edges turn inward and form a guide for the spring nuts. The fittings shall be fabricated from steel and attached to the channel with bolts and spring nuts. The channel, fittings and hardware shall be hot-dipped galvanized and manufactured by Unistrut, GTE Products Co., Ideal Industries, Joslyn Mfg & Supply Co., or approved equal.

C. One-Hole Clamps shall be malleable iron, galvanized for steel conduits and equipped with clampbacks. The clamps shall be Thomas and Betts, Appleton or approved equal.

D. Beam Clamps shall be malleable iron, galvanized, right angle and parallel types. The clamps shall be manufactured by Thomas and Betts, Appleton or approved equal.

E. Spacers shall be plastic and provided to support underground conduits for concrete encasements.

The spacers shall be Carlon, Johns-Manville, Underground Products or approved equal.

F. Steel Anchors shall be sleeve and stud types for securing equipment to concrete foundations, floors and walls. The anchors shall be Phillips "Red Head", Diamond or approved equal.

Concrete foundation to include 4” housekeeping pad.

G. Toggle Bolts shall be steel, spring wing type for securing equipment to hollow walls and ceilings.

Toggle bolts shall be Phillips "Red-Head", Diamond or approved equal.

Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16100-12 H. Conduit Hangers shall be heavy gauge formed steel, galvanized and equipped with carriage bolts, 1/4-inch rods and nuts. The hangers shall be Appleton, Ideal Industries, Josyln Mfg & Supply Co. or approved equal.

I. U-Bolts shall be heavy gauge steel, galvanized and equipped with two hexagon steel nuts. The Ubolts shall be Kindorf, Allied Tube & Conduit Co., or approved equal.

J. Hardware shall be provided to securely attach all equipment and materials.

2.18 NAMEPLATES
A. Nameplates shall be provided as indicated to identify equipment, and the positions and circuits within the equipment. Also, individually enclosed equipment shall be provided nameplates as indicated.

B. The Nameplates shall be laminated black plastic with 1/4 inch high white letters, NEMA ES-1, 3- ply, 1/l6-inch thick, beveled and satin finished. Nameplate inscriptions shall include the identifications for the equipment and loads and shall identify the controls on control equipment as shown on the Drawings.

C. Plastic Nameplates shall be provided for switchgears, motor controllers, substations, service equipment, switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, and individually enclosed circuit breakers, disconnect switches, magnetic starters, relays, manual starters and control stations unless otherwise indicated. Provide lighting switch nameplates as indicated on the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Provide the wiring installations and equipment installations, including connections and interconnections as indicated, specified and required. Assure proper fits for all equipment and materials in the spaces shown on the Drawings.

B. Excavations and Backfills. Earthwork shall be performed for equipment foundations, supports and underground conduits as indicated and as specified.

C. Concrete shall be provided for electrical equipment foundations, support foundations and conduit encasements as indicated and as specified. Concrete foundation to include 4” housekeeping pad.

D. Painting. Painting shall be provided all for exterior exposed surfaces. Field damaged finishes on equipment shall be touched-up with paint that is equal in quality and color to the original. Finish shall be ANSI 61 Gray or other as approved by the CITY.

3.2 RACEWAYS
A. Provide all the cable tray and conduit installations, including the outlet bodies, boxes, gaskets, covers, fittings and supports to complete the raceway systems as shown on drawings and as required. Install ground conductors in all non-metallic conduits.

B. Exposed Installations. The installations shall be completed with hot-dipped galvanized cable trays, rigid steel conduits and intermediate steel conduits with wrench tight connections. In hazardous areas, only rigid steel hot-dipped galvanized conduits shall be installed. In corrosive areas, PVC coated galvanized rigid steel conduits shall be installed. Maintain a minimum clearance of 12 inches for conduits that shall be installed near hot pipes or surfaces (150 degrees Fahrenheit or higher). Exposed conduits shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to buildings and structures.

Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16100-13 C. Flexible Conduits. Flexible conduits shall be liquid-tight with fittings for short tight connections (30 inches maximum) to equipment, except in Class 1, Division 1 areas. A separate ground conductor shall be installed in flexible conduit that does not have the internal copper bonding conductor included by the manufacturer.

1. Flexible Couplings. The couplings shall be explosion-proof with fittings for short, flexible, tight connections to equipment in Class 1, Division 1 hazardous areas.

D. Threads. All steel conduit threads shall be coated with a corrosion resisting lubricant, and the connections shall be made watertight. The lubricant shall maintain the grounding continuity.

1. Locknuts and Bushings. Locknuts and bushings shall be installed on the threads of steel conduits that enter through close-fit openings in enclosures.

E. Sealing Bushings. The bushings shall be installed on the ends of exterior conduits that terminate at indoor equipment. The bushing shall provide a water-tight seal inside the conduit.

F. Seal Fittings. Seal fittings shall be connected to rigid steel conduits in hazardous areas to prevent gases and flames to pass from one area to another through the conduit system. Also, sealing fittings shall be installed to completely water seal inside conduits and the areas around steel conduits that pass through concrete floors and outside walls.

G. Expansion/Deflection Fittings. Expansion/Deflection fittings shall be connected to steel conduits as indicated and required.

H. Penetrations. Penetrations through concrete for sleeves and conduits shall be approved by the CITY. Submit the sizes, locations and methods for all penetrations.

I. Stub-ups. All steel conduit stub-ups shall be painted per requirements in Pertinent Sections.

Conduits shall be painted a minimum of 4 inches above and below concrete slabs. Finish shall be applied before concrete is poured. Identify spare stub-ups under control panels, motor control centers and switchboards with tags as to the location of the termination of the conduit at the other end.

J. Terminations. Conduits entering equipment, including control panels, motor control centers, switchboards, etc. shall enter in the same vertical section in which the circuit will terminate. Tag conduits at each end for identification.

K. Tool Marks. Conduits and fittings that have tool marks shall be smoothed and finished with paint that matches the original finish.

L. Conduit Through Roof. Provide a watertight seal around the conduit on the roof. Coordinate the work with the roofing contractor.

M. Furnished Equipment. Provide conduit installations as shown on the Drawings, and specified in other Sections of the Specifications for furnished equipment.

N. Alterations. Alterations to existing installations shall be completed as indicated and specified.

3.3 BOXES AND FITTINGS
A. Outlet bodies, boxes, gaskets, covers, fittings and supports shall be installed as indicated, specified and required.

B. Cast Iron. Cast iron outlet bodies, boxes, gasketed covers and fittings shall be connected to exposed galvanized rigid steel conduits.

Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16100-14 C. Sheet Steel. Sheet steel boxes shall be provided with close-fit holes for steel conduit connections.

Weatherproof boxes shall be provided with interchangeable conduit hubs for steel conduit connections as indicated.

D. Interchangeable Hubs. The hubs shall be installed in steel enclosures for rigid steel conduit connections. Cut a close fitting hole in the sheet steel enclosure and place the interchangeable hub in the opening. Connect the hub on the conduit and make a tight connection to the enclosure.

E. The purpose of all circuits shall be legibly identified at the panel, receptacles, junction boxes and equipment in a permanent manner (i.e. Etched Plates, Conductor Tag, Permanent Marker, Etc.).

The labeling shall include panel circuit number, “To” and “From” identification and marked “Spare” where applicable.

3.4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Install all the conductors and cables for the wiring as indicated, specified and required.

B. Conductors. Conductors shall be completely installed and connected. Apply wire lubricant to ease the pulling of conductors in conduits. Recommended pulling tensions shall not be exceeded.

Splice and terminal connections shall be made tight with spring and compression connectors. The connectors shall be crimped with a tool that provides uniform and tight connections. Connectors shall be sized as outlined in paragraph on Wire Connectors in this Section. Include all the required wiring interconnections. When routing conductors and cables through precast concrete pull boxes and manholes, the longest (not shortest) route from entrance to exit shall be used.

C. Insulate. All connections shall be insulated as required with tight wraps of plastic tape. Apply insulation putty to fill irregularities and voids in splices. High and medium voltage cable splices shall be completed as instructed by the cable manufacturer.

D. Furnished Equipment. Provide wiring installations as shown on the Drawings, and specified in other Sections of the Specifications for furnished equipment.

E. The purpose of all circuits shall be legibly identified at the panel, receptacles, junction boxes and equipment in a permanent manner (i.e. Etched Plates, Conductor Tag, Permanent Marker, Etc.).

The labeling shall include panel circuit number, “To” and “From” identification and marked “Spare” where applicable.

3.5 PANELBOARDS
A. Install and completely connect all the factory assembled panelboards as shown on the Drawings.

B. Elevation. The elevation to the top of the panelboard shall be six feet above grade unless otherwise indicated.

C. Clearance Space. Provide at least 1/2-inch clearance between the back of the panelboard cabinet and the RTU Cabinet.

D. Anchor Bolts. Securely attach the panelboard to the wall with anchor bolts.

E. Locking Devices. Attach locking devices on the handles of branch circuit breakers for the "ON" position as shown on the Drawings.

F. Circuit Director Card. Completely type the card to identify each connected and spare circuit.

G. Tight Connections. Provide tight connections for feeder and branch circuit wiring.

Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16100-15

3.6 MOTORS AND CONTROLS
A. Install all the wiring and control equipment as indicated, specified and required.

B. Motors. Motors shall be provided with the driven mechanical equipment.

C. Wiring. The wiring installations shall be complete. Include all the required wiring interconnections between the motor magnetic starters, and between the starters and the instrument control panels. Provide motor frame conduit connection boxes as required. Be certain that all wiring connections provide the proper motor rotation.

D. Magnetic Starters. The magnetic starters shall be provided in the motor control centers unless otherwise indicated.

3.7 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
A. Install all the overcurrent protective equipment as indicated, specified and required.

B. Metal Enclosures. The enclosures for individual equipment shall be constructed to satisfy the condition in the location where they shall be installed.

C. Overload Relays. Overload relays shall be provided in the control equipment for three phase and single phase circuits as required. Check the full load amperes for each motor and the overload relay rating. Replace the relays that shall not satisfactorily protect the connected motors.

D. Trip Settings. Circuit breakers shall assure the required circuit protection with the indicated trip settings.

E. Fuses. Provide fuses that have the current and voltage ratings to protect the circuits shown on the Drawings.

3.8 WIRING DEVICES
A. Install the required local switches, convenience outlets and clock outlets complete, including the supports and wiring.

3.9 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Provide the complete installations for fused disconnect switches and non-fused disconnect switches where shown on the Drawings and as required.

B. Mounting Height. Switches shall be installed 5 feet from grade or floor to the top of the enclosure unless otherwise indicated.

C. Connections. The steel enclosures shall be connected complete with steel conduits terminating into interchangeable hubs attached to the enclosures. Wire connectors shall be provided for connecting the copper conductors.

3.10 SUPPORTS
A. Install the required structural channels, brackets, stanchions, U-bolts, clamps, anchors, hangers, fittings and other hardware to securely attach and support all the equipment and conduits.

B. Painting. Brackets, stanchions and other unfinished steel supports shall be painted per requirements of "Painting and Protective Coatings" Section of the Specifications.

Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16100-16

3.11 NAMEPLATES
A. Nameplates shall be positioned and lined-up to provide a neat appearance. They shall be attached to the cleaned metal surfaces of enclosures as directed by the CITY.

B. Nameplates. Nameplates shall be installed on primary interrupters, switchgears, substations, switchboards, service equipment, motor controllers, motor control centers, panelboards, and individually enclosed circuit breakers, disconnect switches, magnetic starters, manual starters, relays and control stations unless otherwise indicated. Install lighting switch nameplates as indicated on the Drawings.

3.12 CHECKING, ADJUSTING AND TESTING
A. Provide the required labor and equipment, and all checking, adjusting and testing operations on the electrical installations.

B. Check all wire terminals shall be checked to assure tight connections.

C. Adjust. Adjust repeat cycle timers, interval timers and time delay relays and other devices so the controls shall operate in the indicated sequence.

D. Wiring Tests. The tests shall be performed to detect wrong connections, short circuits, continuity and grounds. Insulation tests shall be made with a hand crank test instrument on all cables and conductors. NOTE: WARNING. Do not make insulation tests on any conductors either signal or power that are connected to semi-conductor type equipment. Remove the conductors from the equipment before insulation testing; severe damage may result from meggar-type instruments.

Power feeders and branch conductors shall be tested phase to phase, and phase to ground. Phase to ground tests on shielded cable shall mean "conductor to shield". After insulation resistance tests have been performed, high voltage and medium voltage shielded cables shall be "hi-Pot" tested in accordance with the current ICEA Standards and the manufacturer's recommendation.

Voltage shall be applied and removed in a slow, even manner, and the conductors shall be grounded for at least one minute after the voltage is removed to insure that no charge remains.

Test voltage and application time for the various cables and conductors shall be submitted to the CITY. Correct any defects in the wiring systems.

E. Equipment Tests.

1. Perform equipment tests as indicated and directed by the manufacturer. Refer to Section 16000 for Manufacturers' Certified Reports on primary interrupters, substations, switchgears, service equipment and motor control centers.

F. Test Data. Test data for equipment, shielded cables and supply voltage shall be submitted to the CITY.

G. Supply Voltage. Test the supply voltage while the normal plant loads are operating. If the voltage is not within normal limits (plus or minus one percent), notify the power company and request a voltage correction.

H. Operation Tests. Perform operation tests and observe that all loads operate satisfactorily. - END OF SECTION -
Conduits
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16111-1 SECTION 16111

CONDUITS
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install conduits as required, and as shown on the Plans. Materials employed shall be as shown on the Plans.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product literature including manufacturer part number, model number, material, size, and specifications. Material shall not be installed until the ENGINEER has reviewed the submittal data.

B. Shop Drawings shall be submitted for review and acceptance showing routing, conduit size, and number and size of wires in each conduit before installation of conduit and any related work.

C. Proposed routing of conduits buried under floor slabs-on-grade.

D. Identify conduit by tag number of equipment served or by circuit schedule number.

E. Proposed routing and details of construction including conduit and rebar embedded in floor slabs, columns, etc. Identify conduit by tag number of equipment served or by circuit schedule number.

F. Proposed location and details of construction for openings in slabs and walls for raceway runs.

G. Refer to Section 16000 and Section 01300 for further submittal requirements.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): C80.1, Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit.

B. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA): RN-1, Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit.

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

1. 1, Flexible Metal Conduit.

2. 6, Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel.

3. 360, Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit.

4. 467, Grounding and Bonding Equipment.

5. 514C, Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers.

6. 651, Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings.

7. 870, Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings.

8. 884, Underfloor Raceways and Fittings.

9. 1203, ExpolsionProof and Dust-IgnitionProof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations.

Conduits
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16111-2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAYS
A. Exposed conduit in an unclassified or hazardous area shall be galvanized rigid steel (GRS) unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Plans. Conduits in the corrosive areas shall be PVC coated GRS unless otherwise indicated. Underground and/or concrete encased conduits shall be PVC, unless otherwise indicated. All wiring, except as otherwise noted, shall be in conduit. Conduit size shall not be less than the National Electrical Code (NEC) size required for the conductors therein and shall not be smaller than 3/4- inch. No underground conduit shall be less than one inch.

B. Condulet type fittings shall be Form 7, Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or equal with wedge nut covers. All condulets located outdoors or in wet locations shall be weathertight.

C. In unclassified areas, flexible conduit shall be grounding type, weatherproof, corrosion resistant, and watertight. All sizes of liquidtight flexible conduit shall have an external bonding jumper. The maximum length shall be per NEC. Connectors shall be Raco, OZ Gedney type 4Q-L, or equal.

D. Couplings, connectors, and fittings shall be standard types specifically designed and manufactured for the purpose. They shall be installed to provide a firm mechanical assembly and electrical conductivity throughout.

E. Expansion fittings shall be OZ Gedney type AX with jumper for exposed locations and type DX at structural expansion joints, Spring City, or equal. Conduits shall have expansion fittings in accordance with NEC.

F. The conduits and fittings shall be supported per NEC requirements as a minimum.

2.2 GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL (GRS)
A. Conduit and couplings shall be hot-dipped galvanized with zinc coated threads and outer coating of zinc bichromate, in accordance with ANSI C80.1 standards, as manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit Corporation, Nucor, Youngstown, or equal.

B. Steel conduit shall not be buried in earth without concrete encasement and additional corrosion protection. A half-lapped wrapping of 20 mil PVC based corrosion protection tape shall be used.

2.3 PVC COATED GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL (PVC-GRS)
A. PVC coated GRS conduit shall be installed where shown on the Plans or elsewhere specified and shall conform to NEMA RN-1 and ANSI C80.1 standards.

B. The zinc surface of the conduit shall remain intact and undisturbed on both the inside and the outside of the conduit throughout the preparation and application processing. A Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) coating shall be bonded to the galvanized outer surface of the conduit. The bond between the PVC coating and the conduit surface shall be greater than the tensile strength of the plastic. The thickness of the PVC coating shall be a minimum of 0.040-inch (40 mil).

C. A loose coupling shall be furnished with each length of conduit. A PVC coating shall be bonded to the outer surface of the coupling and a PVC sleeve equal to the outside diameter of the uncoated conduit shall extend beyond both ends of the coupling approximately one pipe diameter or 1-1/2 inches, whichever is smaller. The wall thickness of the coating on the coupling and the sleeve shall be a minimum of 0.055-inch (55 mil).

D. A PVC coating shall be bonded to the inner and outer surface of all conduit bodies and fittings and a PVC sleeve shall extend from all hubs. The wall thickness of the coating on conduit bodies and fittings and the sleeve walls shall be identical to those on couplings in length and thickness. The covers on all Conduits
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16111-3 conduit bodies shall be coated on both sides and shall be designed to be completely interchangeable.

The inside of conduit bodies shall remain undisturbed in the processing.

E. Type 304 stainless steel screws shall be furnished and used to attach the cover to the conduit body. All coated material shall be installed and patched according to the manufacturer's recommended installation and patching instructions.

F. Conduit straps shall be PVC coated or stainless steel.

G. PVC coated conduit and fittings shall be as manufactured by Kor Kap Corporation, Robroy, or equal.

H. PVC coated flexible conduits shall be liquid and vaportight and manufactured in accordance with UL 360 standards.

2.4 RIGID NONMETALLIC - PVC
A. Where specifically indicated on the Plans, or elsewhere specified, conduit may be high density Schedule 40, 90 degrees C, heavy-duty PVC. The conduit shall be manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride compound which meets ASTM D1784, NEMA TC-2, and UL 651 standards. Smoke emissions shall be limited to less than 6 grams per 100 grams of material tested.

B. Where conduit concrete encasement is indicated on the Plans, conduit supports shall be installed at five foot intervals. PVC conduit shall be manufactured by Carlon, Allied Tube & Conduit Co., Cantex, JM Eagle, or equal.

2.5 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be liquid and vaportight, oil and ultraviolet ray resistant and manufactured in accordance with UL 360 standards. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be formed of a continuous, spiral wound, galvanized steel core with an extruded PVC jacket. The PVC jacket shall be rated for high ambient heat applications, 90 degrees Celsius.

B. For corrosive locations, liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be formed of a continuous, spiral wound, aluminum core with an extruded PVC jacket. The PVC jacket shall be impervious to corrosive liquids and vapors.

C. An external bonding conductor shall be required for all flexible conduit connections. Flexible conduit and connectors shall be listed for grounding.

D. Connectors for liquidtight flexible conduit shall be galvanized, furnished with a sealing ring and locknut, and suitable for wet locations.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Conduit runs are schematic only, and shall be modified as required to suit field conditions, subject to review and acceptance by the ENGINEER.

B. Conduit shall run continuously between outlets and shall be provided with junction boxes where connections are made. Couplings, connectors, and fittings shall be acceptable types designed and manufactured for the purpose, and shall provide a firm mechanical assembly, and electrical conductivity throughout.

Conduits
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16111-4 C. Conduit runs shall be straight and true. Elbows, offsets, and bends shall be uniform and symmetrical.

Changes in direction shall be made with long radius bends, or with fittings of the condulet type.

D. Conduit runs in buildings and structures shall be exposed except as specifically noted, or accepted by the ENGINEER.

E. Conduit runs shall not interfere with the proper and safe operation of equipment, and shall not block or interfere with ingress or egress, including equipment removal hatches.

F. Exposed conduits shall be securely fastened with clamps, or straps, intended for conduit use. All exposed conduit shall be run on the walls and ceiling only and shall be parallel to the planes of the walls or ceiling.

No diagonal runs will be permitted. Flexible conduit shall be used only for short lengths required to facilitate connections between rigid conduit to motors from junction boxes, or control equipment. The maximum length of flexible conduit shall be 3 feet.

G. Conduit runs on water-bearing walls shall be supported one inch away from the wall on an accepted channel. When channel galvanizing, or other coating, is cut or otherwise damaged, it shall be field coated to original condition. No conduit shall be run in water-bearing walls, unless specifically designated otherwise.

H. Conduit shall be thoroughly reamed to remove burrs. GRS shall be reamed during the threading process, and Rigid Nonmetallic PVC shall be reamed before applying fittings. A zinc rich cold galvanizing shall be used to restore corrosion protection on field cut threads. Bushings and lock nuts or hubs shall be used at conduit terminations. The total number of bends in any run between pull points shall not exceed 360 degrees. Junction boxes and pull boxes shall be installed at points acceptable to the ENGINEER. Conduit ends shall be plugged to prevent the entrance of moisture or debris during construction. All spare conduits shall be adequately capped and shall contain a suitable pull string.

I. Joints shall be set up tight. Hangers and fastenings shall be secure, and of a type appropriate in design, and dimensions, for the particular application.

J. Conduit runs shall be cleaned and internally sized (obstruction tested) so that no foreign objects, or obstructions remain in the conduit prior to pulling in conductors.

K. After installation of complete conduit runs 2 inches and larger, conduits shall be snaked with a conduit cleaner equipped with a cylindrical mandrel of a diameter not less than 85 percent of the nominal diameter of the conduit. Conduits through which the mandrel will not pass shall not be used.

L. Expansion fittings shall be installed across all expansion joints and at other locations where necessary to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction.

M. Provide trenching, backfill, and compaction for conduits installed underground.

N. Each conduit shall be provided with stainless steel identification tags affixed by means of stainless steel wire to the conduit’s termination bushing. The minimum size of the identification tags shall be ¾-inch X 2-inch. The identification tag shall be embossed with the conduit number shown in the Design Plans. The letters and numbers on the tags shall, as a minimum, be 1/4"-inch high.
- END OF SECTION -
Concrete Pull Boxes
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16118-1 SECTION 16118

CONCRETE PULL BOXES
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install pre-cast concrete pull boxes in the locations indicated on the Plans and as required.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted for review prior to installation in accordance with the Contract Documents, Section 01300 and Section 16000.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. The pull boxes shall be designed for traffic conditions, and the pull box and cover shall be designed for heavy traffic bridge loading unless otherwise noted. The pull boxes shall have dimensions indicated on the plans.

The pull boxes shall be constructed of concrete.

B. The pull boxes shall be Quazite, Christy, Jensen, or equal, with covers. The covers shall be engraved "ELECTRICAL".

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The pull boxes shall be installed on 12 inches of compacted gravel and shall be installed in such a manner that the cover of the pull box will be flush with finished grade. - END OF SECTION -
Surge Protective Devices
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16120-1 SECTION 16120

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND TESTING
A. UL 1449 - Surge Protective Devices
B. UL 1283 – Electromagnetic Interference Filters
C. UL 67 – Panelboards (UL 67 listing for internal panelboard SPD) D. NEC 2020 - (NEC Article 242 SPD Installation practice/NEC Article 250.53 Grounding) E. NFPA 78 - Guide on Electrical Inspections
F. ISO 9001:2015 - Quality standard
G. IEEE C62.41.1 and C62.41.2 - 2002 - (System shall be designed to meet American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering Inc. C62.41) H. IEEE C62.45 2002. - (System shall be tested to meet the C62.45) I. Category A & B - (0.5 SEC x 100 kHz Ring Wave)
J. Category B3 Biwave - (8 x 20 SEC at 3,000 Amperes and 1.2 x 50 SEC at 6,000 Volts) K. Category C3 Biwave - (8 x 20 SEC at 10,000 Amperes and 1.2 x 50 SEC at 20,000 Volts) L. The fusing elements must be capable of allowing the SPD’s rated single impulse current to pass through the SPD at least one time without failure. The system shall be tested to 1,000 sequential ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1 and C62.41.2 Category C3 combination wave transients. The Category C3 combination wave is defined as a

1.2 x 50 microsecond wave at 20,000 volt open circuit voltage waveform and 8 x 20 microsecond wave at 10,000 ampere short circuit current waveform. In addition, the system components shall be tested repetitively 1,000 times testing based on an IEEE C62.33 (MOV test) and C62.35 (SAD test) without failure or degradation exceeding ±10%.

M. CBEMA (ITIC) and IEC - (Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers Association or Information Technology Industry Council and International Electrotechnical Commission define clamping voltage tolerance guidelines for sensitive equipment)

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Must have approval fifteen days prior to bidding on project. Request for submittal must be in writing with the following items.

B. Drawings: Electrical and mechanical drawings shall be provided by the manufacturer which show unit dimensions, weights, mounting provisions, connection notes, wire size and wiring diagram.

C. Equipment Manual: The manufacturer shall furnish an installation manual with installation notes, start-up and operating instructions for the specified system. Installation instructions shall clearly state whether the system requires an external overcurrent device to maintain the system’s UL 1449 listing.

Surge Protective Devices
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16120-2 D. National Electrical Code (NEC) 242 - Installation requirements for SPD.

1. Section 242.8, An SPD shall be a listed device (UL 1449).

2. Section 242.10, SPD shall be marked with a short-circuit current rating and shall not be installed at a point on the system (ex. service, distribution or branch panels) where the available fault current (AIC rating) is in excess of that rating.

E. UL 1449 stipulation for fused SPD - The manufacturer’s authorized representative is required to submit the following:

1. Certify that the SPD system is UL 1449 listed (UL Card).

2. Indicate the type of internal or external fusing that is incorporated in the SPD system and what impact the fusing has on the performance of the device with respect to surge capacity and clamping levels.

F. CBEMA (ITIC) & IEC - SVRs must meet voltage tolerance guidelines:

1. SVR clamp levels for wye and single phase (L-N, L-G and N-G):
a. 400-600V for 120V systems, 800-1200V for 277V systems and 1200-1500V for 347V systems

2. SVR clamp levels for delta circuits (L-L and L-G):
a. 1000-1200V for 240V systems, 1500-1800V for 480V systems and 1800-2000V for 600V systems
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SERVICE ENTRANCE/SWITCHBOARD/SWITCHGEAR
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Current Technology

2. LEA International Inc.

3. Liebert

4. Phoenix Contact

5. General Electric

6. OR approved equal
B. Equipment shall be a multi-stage parallel protector rated for 277/480VAC, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE, plus ground.

The equipment’s minimum surge current capacity shall be 400 kA per phase (L-N plus L-G) and 200 kA per mode (L-N, L-G, L-L and N-G).

C. The system protection modules shall contain a technology that utilizes a symmetrical array of balanced metal oxide varistors (MOV). Each MOV will be individually coordinated to pass UL 1449.

D. All primary transient paths shall utilize copper wire, copper bus bar and lugs of equivalent capacity to provide equal impedance interconnection between phases. No plug-in module or components shall be used in surge carrying paths.

E. Each protection module shall have a visual indicator that signifies that the protection circuitry is on line. The unit shall not be taken off line to verify integrity of system. Redundant status indicators shall be mounted on the front of the door that monitors the system protection circuitry.

Surge Protective Devices
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16120-3 F. The system shall be modular with field replaceable modules. Modular units shall contain a minimum of one module per phase.

G. Each protection module shall have a capacitive filtering system connected in each Line to Neutral (LN)(Wye) mode or Line to Line (LL)(Delta) mode to provide EMI/RFI noise attenuation (UL 1283).

H. Protection modes: The SPD shall provide Line to Neutral (LN)(Wye), Line to Ground (LG)(Wye or Delta), Line to Line (LL)(Delta) and Neutral to Ground (NG)(Wye) protection.

I. Service Conditions: Rate surge protective device for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. MCOV: Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage of 125% or greater.

2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 degrees F.

3. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, noncondensing.

4. Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet above sea level.

2. 2 BRANCH PANEL PROTECTION
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Current Technology

2. LEA International Inc.

3. Liebert

4. Phoenix Contact

5. General Electric

6. OR approved equal
B. Device shall meet all specification requirements in section 2.1 except as follows:

1. Equipment shall be a multi-stage parallel protector rated for 277/480VAC, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE, plus ground. The equipment’s minimum surge current capacity shall be 400 kA per phase (L-N plus L-G) and 200 kA per mode (L-N, L-G, L-L and N-G).

C. The system protection modules shall contain a technology that utilizes a symmetrical array of balanced metal oxide varistors (MOV). Each MOV will be individually coordinated to pass UL 1449.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The specified service entrance/switchboard/switchgear system shall be installed with the shortest lead length possible not to exceed five (5’) electrical feet from the power conductor(s) it is protecting, must have a grounding of 25 Ohms (per NEC Article 250.53(A)(2) Exception) or less and shall avoid any unnecessary or sharp bends. Utilize a 3 pole 15 amp breaker for connection means.

B. The specified branch panelboard system shall be installed with the shortest lead length possible not to exceed a foot and half (1.5’) electrical feet from the power conductor(s) it is protecting, must have a grounding of 25 Ohms (per NEC Article 250.53(A)(2) Exception) or less and shall avoid any unnecessary or sharp bends.

Surge Protective Devices
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16120-4

3.2 WARRANTY AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer shall provide a product warranty for a period of not less than five (5) years from date of installation. Warranty shall cover unlimited replacement of SPD modules during the warranty period. Those firms responding to this specification shall provide proof that they have been regularly engaged in the design, manufacturing and testing of SPD for not less than twenty (25) years. Utilize a 3 pole 15 amp breaker for connection means.

3.3 ACCEPTANCE
A. Manufacturer's representative shall visit site, verify installation, and submit to Contracting Officer a letter stating that equipment and installation meets intent of Contract Documents and manufacturer's warranties and that guarantees are in effect.
- END OF SECTION -
600 Volt Class Cable
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16123-1 SECTION 16123
600 VOLT CLASS CABLE
PART 1 –GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers the furnishing and installation of 600 Volt Class cables and conductors, terminations and splicing, and pulling lubricants.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300, Section 16000, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, prior to installation.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc.:

1. 44, Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

2. 83, Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables.

3. 486A/B, Wire Connectors.

4. 510, Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape.

B. National Electrical Code.

C. Insulated Cable Engineers Association.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTED MANUFACTURERS
A. Conductors and Multi Conductor Cables (MCC), subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: Okonite Company, Southwire, General Cable or equal.

2.2 CONDUCTORS
A. Wire sizes shall be American Wire Gauge (AWG) sizes with Class B stranded construction. Number 2 AWG and smaller shall be factory color coded with a separate color for each phase and neutral, which shall be used consistently throughout the system. Larger cables shall be coded by the use of colored tape. Conductors sized No. 1 and larger shall be Type 2, rated for 90 degrees C. All circuit conductors, #6 or smaller shall be "THWN" stranded copper. All other conductors shall be "XHHW" stranded copper.

B. Individual or multiple conductor cables for power, control, and alarm circuits of 480 volts or less shall be insulated for not less than 600 volts and shall have insulation type as indicated on the Plans. "THHN' shall conform to UL 83 and "XHHW' shall conform to UL 44. Where wire size is not indicated, they shall be of the size required by the NEC, except that no wire external to panels and motor control centers shall be less than No. 12 AWG, unless specifically noted on the Plans. Panel control wiring shall not be less than No. 14 AWG.

C. All wiring shall be as indicated on the Plans. Wires shall be new and shall be soft drawn copper with not less than 97 percent conductivity. The wire and cable shall have size, grade of insulation, voltage, and manufacturer's name permanently marked on the outer covering at not more than 2-foot intervals. All wires 600 Volt Class Cable
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16123-2 shall conform to the latest Standards of the ASTM, and ICEA, and shall be tested for their full length by these Standards. Insulation thickness shall be not less than that specified by the National Electrical Code.

2.3 TERMINATIONS AND SPLICES
A. No splices shall be allowed except for lighting or receptacle circuits.

2.4 PULLING LUBRICANT
A. All cables shall be properly coated with pulling compound (Aqua Gel, Polywater, or equal) before being pulled into conduits so as to prevent mechanical damage to the cables during installation. "Yellow 77" is not acceptable.

B. Other lubricants to be substituted must be accompanied by a statement from the cable manufacturer as to its acceptable use with the cable being installed.

2.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. All conductors shall be numbered with "tube sleeve" type tags with heat impressed letters and numbers.

B. Color code all wiring as follows:

1. Lighting and power wiring:

CONDUCTOR 120/208 480VAC 24V 120 VAC
VAC DC Control/ Power
Phase 1 Black Brown Blue Red
Phase 2 Red Orange
Phase 3 Blue Yellow
Neutrals White White White

2. Color code ends of feeder phase conductors only.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The pulling tension and side-wall pressures, as recommended by the cable manufacturer, shall not be exceeded.

B. All circuits shall be continuous from origin to termination without splices in intermediate pull boxes.

Sufficient slack shall be left at the termination to make proper connections. In no case shall a splice be pulled into the conduit. Conductor splicing shall not be permitted without the ENGINEER's approval.

C. Install all cables in conduit.

D. Each feeder and branch circuit shall be installed in its own individual conduit unless combining feeder and branch circuits is permitted as defined in the following:

1. As specifically indicated on the Plans.

2. For lighting, multiple branch circuits may be installed in a conduit as allowed by the NEC and with the wire ampacity derated in accordance with the requirements of the NEC. Conduit fill shall not exceed the limits established by the NEC.

3. When field conditions dictate and written permission is obtained from the ENGINEER.

E. Feeder and branch circuits shall be isolated from each other and from all instrumentation and control circuits. 600 Volt Class Cable
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16123-3 F. Control circuits shall be isolated from all other feeder, branch and instrumentation circuits, except as noted above.

1. 12 V DC, 24 V DC and 48 V DC control circuits may be combined in common conduit.

2. 125 V DC control circuits shall be isolated from all other DC and AC control circuits.

3. 120 V AC control circuits shall be isolated from all DC control circuits.

G. Make splices only at pull or junction boxes.

1. Crimp or indented-type connectors are not allowed, except for control circuits landed on terminal strips. - END OF SECTION -
Instrumentation Class Cable
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16124-1 SECTION 16124

INSTRUMENTATION CLASS CABLE
PART 1 -- GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers cable use for process signal and controls.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300, Section 16000, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, prior to installation.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the instrumentation cable shall be as manufactured by Belden, Okonite, General Cable or equal.

2.2 INSTRUMENTATION CABLE
A. Instrument cable shall be Type TC, and have the number of individually shielded twisted pairs indicated on the Plans and shall be insulated for not less than 600 volts. Unless otherwise indicated, conductor size shall be No. 16 AWG minimum. Shielded, grounded instrumentation cable shall be used for all analog and low voltage digital signals.

B. The cable jacket shall be PVC, flame retardant with 90 degrees C temperature rating. The cable shield shall be a minimum of 2.3 mil aluminum or copper tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage and a tinned copper drain wire.

C. The conductors shall be bare soft annealed copper, Class B, 7 strand minimum concentric lay with 15 mils nominal thickness, PVC jacket, 4 mil nominal thickness, 90 degrees C temperature rating. One conductor within each pair shall be numerically identified. Conductor insulation shall be PVC without a nylon jacket.

D. Pairs shall be assembled with a nominal 2-inch lay and shall then be group shielded with a minimum of 1.3 mil aluminum or copper tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. All group shields shall be completely isolated from each other.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Feeder and branch circuits shall be isolated from each other, and from instrumentation and control circuits.

Instrumentation cables shall be installed in separate raceways from other cables and wiring. This includes portions running through manholes. Instrumentation cable shall be continuous between instruments or between field devices and instrument enclosures. There shall be no intermediate splices or terminal boards, unless otherwise shown on the Plans.

B. Maintain electrical continuity of the shield when splicing twisted shielded pair conductors. Drain wires shall be terminated inside enclosures at grounded terminal blocks. Only one end of each instrument loop cable drain wire shall be grounded. Ground drain wire of shielded conductors at one end only.

Instrumentation Class Cable
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16124-2 C. Terminate instrumentation and control wiring, including spare wires, at control panels and motor control centers on terminal boards mounted inside the equipment.

1. CONTRACTOR shall supply terminal boards as required.

2. Do not field wire directly to devices.
- END OF SECTION -
Outlet, Pull, and Junction Boxes
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16130-1 SECTION 16130

OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXES
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Outlet, pull and junction boxes.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 00 - General Conditions

2. Division 01 - General Requirements.

3. Section 02084 – Underground Precast Concrete Utilities Structures

4. Section 16000 – General Electrical Requirements

5. Section 16111 - Conduits.

6. Section 16141 - Wiring Devices.

7. Section 16170 - Grounding.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: Refer to Section 16000.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Refer to the Contract Documents, Section 01300 and Section 16000.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. See Section 16000.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:

1. Galvanized steel boxes:
a. Appleton Electric Co.
b. Steel City.
c. Raco.

2. Sheet metal boxes for non-classified areas:
a. Hoffman Engineering Co.

3. Corrosion-resistant boxes:
a. Hoffman Engineering Co.
b. Crouse-Hinds.

4. Hazardous location boxes (Class I, II & Ill):
a. Appleton Electric Co.
b. Crouse-Hinds.
c. Killark.

Outlet, Pull, and Junction Boxes
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16130-2 d. O-Z/Gedney.

5. Raintight and watertight boxes:
a. Appleton Electric Co.
b. Crouse-Hinds.

6. Terminal boxes:
a. Hoffman Engineering Co.

7. Boxes in sidewalk shall be precast concrete:
a. Appleton Electric Co.
b. Crouse-Hinds.
c. O-Z/Gedney.

8. Boxes in earth:
a. Carlon Electric Products.

9. Exposed switch and receptacle boxes:
a. Appleton Electric Co.
b. Crouse-Hinds.

B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01630.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Pull and Junction Boxes for Offices and other Dry Architecturally Finished Areas:

1. Material: 14 GA, galvanized steel.

2. Concentric knockouts on all four sides.

3. Flat cover fastened with screws.

4. NEMA 1 classification.

5. UL listed.

B. Pull and Junction Boxes for General Use Unclassified Areas Suitable for NEMA 12 Enclosures:

1. Material: 14 GA galvanized steel with seams continuously welded, ground smooth and no knockouts.

2. Zinc rich coating on all seams.

3. Stainless steel captivated cover screws threaded into sealed wells.

4. Flat door with oil resistant gasket.

5. NEMA 12 classification.

6. UL listed.

C. Pull and Junction Boxes for Wet Areas:

1. Material: 14 GA steel with polyester powder coating inside and out over phosphatized surfaces.

2. Seams continuously welded, ground smooth, no knockouts.

3. Stainless steel clamps on four sides.

4. Flat cover with oil resistant gasket.

5. NEMA 4 classification.

6. UL listed.

Outlet, Pull, and Junction Boxes
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16130-3 D. Pull and Junction Boxes for Corrosive Areas:

1. Material: 14 GA steel with powdered epoxy resin coating inside and out or fiberglass-reinforced polyester material.

2. Steel boxes:
a. Seams continuously welded, ground smooth, no knockouts. b. Rolled lip around all sides.
c. Hinged door.
d. Captivated stainless steel door screws.
e. Flat door with oil-resistant gasket.

3. NEMA 4X boxes shall be stainless-steel.
a. Hinged door with latch and lockout.
b. Neoprene door gasket.
c. Grounding bushing(s).

4. NEMA 4X classification.

5. UL listed.

E. Pull and Junction Boxes for Hazardous Areas:

1. Material: Cast gray iron alloy or copper-free cast aluminum.

2. Drilled and tapped openings or tapered threaded hub equipped.

3. Flat bolted-down or threaded cover with neoprene gasket.

4. Stainless steel hex head screws.

5. Explosion proof, UL listed for Class 1 Groups C and D.

F. Pull and Junction Boxes for Sidewalks:

1. Cast-iron box and cover, hot-dip galvanized.

2. Flange for flush mounting.

3. Checkered cover with neoprene gasket, pry bar slots and stainless steel screws.

4. UL listed.

5. Drilled and tapped holes.

6. Watertight NEMA 4 classification.

G. Large Pull and Junction Boxes (100 CU IN and larger):

1. Located in general use areas:
a. NEMA 12 construction:
1) Welded steel.
2) Furnished with gray enamel inside and out over phosphatized surfaces.

2. Located in wet and corrosive areas:
a. NEMA 4X with stainless steel screws.
b. Type 304 L welded stainless steel:

3. Constructed of 14 GA steel with seams continuously welded, ground smooth, no knockouts.

4. Rolled lip around all sides.

5. Rigid handles for covers larger than 9 SF or heavier than 25 LBS.

6. Split covers when heavier than 25 LBS.

Outlet, Pull, and Junction Boxes
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16130-4 F. Traffic-rated Pull Boxes:

1. Shall be pre-cast concrete and meets the requirement of Section 02084 – Underground Precast Concrete Utilities Structures
H. Terminal Boxes:

1. SS Boxes rated for NEMA 4X or unless noted otherwise.

2. Provided with plain blank screw cover, subpanel (removable back panel), and terminal points.

3. Refer to Drawing for dimensions and number of terminals.

4. Each terminal box shall be supplied with 15% spare terminals or 2 din-rail mounted terminals (whichever is greater)

5. Terminal blocks shall be screw-post barrier-type, din rail mounted, white center marker strip.

6. Rated 20 ampere, minimum 600 V. or as required by the specified conductors.

I. Fiberglass Cable-Pulling Enclosure:

1. Use: Access points to facilitate pulling of electrical cables in buried conduit runs.

2. Size and quantity: As shown on Drawings.

3. Type: Rectangular fiberglass composite, suitable for direct burial pedestrian traffic on top, -50 degrees Fahrenheit, chemical, sunlight, and weather resistant.

4. Provide matching top with "ELECTRIC" logo.

J. Outlet Boxes:

1. Use: Installation of wiring devices.

2. Boxes for exposed wiring:
a. Cadmium plated, cast, ferrous metal, with threaded hubs.

3. Boxes for concealed wiring:
a. Code gage, hot-dip galvanized steel.
b. Include bar hangers for metal stud partitions.
c. Provide barriers between switches in boxes with 277 V switches on opposite phases. d. Use extension and plaster rings where required.
e. Provide grounding screw.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Use locknut and bushing for boxes in non-classified areas.

B. Use cast metal boxes with threaded conduit hubs in hazardous areas.

C. Use Type FS and FD boxes in wet areas and where exposed rigid steel conduit is required.

D. Use epoxy resin coated, stainless steel, cast aluminum for corrosive areas.

E. Fill unused punched-out, tapped, or threaded hub openings with insert plugs.

F. Use outlet boxes sized to accommodate quantity of conductors enclosed.

Outlet, Pull, and Junction Boxes
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16130-5 G. Use boxes sized to accommodate conduit tying into box.

H. Install pull boxes or junction boxes in conduit runs where indicated or required to facilitate pulling of wires or making connections.

1. Make covers of boxes accessible.

I. Install pull boxes or junction boxes rated for the area classification.

J. Install rigid conduit squarely into boxes which do not have hubs or are drilled and tapped.

1. Install with locknut on the outside and bushing on inside.

K. Install conduit into boxes with hubs, or that are tapped, using thread lubricant.

L. Do not use back-to-back boxes on this Project.

M. Support outlet boxes for incandescent fixtures and other ceiling-mounted devices in lay-in acoustical tile ceilings by bar hangers anchored to ceiling construction members which do not interfere with tile removal. - END OF SECTION -
Wiring Devices
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16141-1 SECTION 16141

WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Light switches, receptacles, device plates, dimmers, plug-in strips and tele-power poles.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 00 – Conditions of the Contract

2. Division 01 – General Requirements.

3. Section 16000 – General Electrical Requirements

4. Section 16130 – Outlet, Pull, and Junction Boxes

5. Section 16170 – Grounding.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: Refer to Section 16000.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Refer to the Contract Documents, Section 01300 and Section 16000.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:

1. Light switches (except explosion proof):
a. Hubbell.
b. P&S.
c. Arrow Hart.
d. General Electric.
e. Leviton.

2. Explosion proof light switches:
a. Crouse-Hinds.
b. Appleton Electric Co.
c. Killark.

3. Door switches:
a. General Electric.
b. P&S.
c. Arrow Hart.
d. Micro-switch.

4. Receptacles (except explosion proof):
a. Hubbell.
b. P&S.

Wiring Devices
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16141-2 c. Arrow Hart.
d. General Electric.
e. Leviton.

5. Explosion proof receptacles:
a. Crouse-Hinds.
b. Appleton Electric Co.
c. Killark.

6. Welding receptacles:
a. Crouse-Hinds.
b. Appleton Electric Co.

7. Tele-power poles:
a. Wiremold.

8. Dimmers:
a. Lutron.
b. General Electric
c. P&S.

9. Plug-in strip:
a. Wiremold.

B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01630.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Light Switches for Unclassified Areas:

1. Toggle type, quiet action, specification grade with grounding terminal.

2. Back and side wired.

3. Solid silver cadmium oxide contacts.

4. One-piece switch arm rated 20 A, 120/277 VAC.

5. UL listed.

6. Color: Ivory.

7. Wall plate: Type 304 stainless steel.

8. Type: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Receptacles for Unclassified Areas:

1. Straight blade, grounding type, specification grade.

2. Back and side wired with wrap-around bridge.

3. Rated 20 A, 125 VAC.

4. UL listed.

5. Color:
a. For use on normal power: Ivory.
b. For use on UPS systems: Red.
c. For use on isolated ground systems: Orange.

6. Wall plate: Type 304 stainless steel.

7. Type: As indicated on Drawings.

Wiring Devices
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16141-3 C. Light Switches for Wet Areas:

1. Presswitch type, quiet action, specification grade, with grounding terminal.

2. Back and side wired.

3. Solid silver cadmium oxide contacts.

4. One-piece switch arm rated 20 A, 120/277 VAC.

5. UL listed.

6. Color. Ivory.

7. Wall plate: Gray weatherproof presswitch type.

8. Type: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Receptacles for Wet Areas:

1. Straight blade, grounding type, specification grade.

2. Back and side wired with wrap around bridge.

3. Rated 20 A, 125 VAC.

4. UL listed.

5. Color: Ivory.

6. Wall plate: Weatherproof, cast aluminum, UL listed, WDL open and closed.

7. Type: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles:

1. Straight blade, grounding type, specification grade.

2. Rated 20 A, 125 VAC.

3. UL listed.

4. Test and reset buttons.

5. Wall plate: Indoor or weatherproof as required.

6. Feed-through type.

F. Light Switches for Corrosive Areas:

1. Corrosion-resistant NEMA 4X enclosure with switch consisting of:
a. Fiberglass reinforced polyester enclosure.
b. Fiberglass reinforced polyester gasketed wall plate with built-in toggle lever switch with stainless steel shaft.
c. Grounding bushing.
d. Rated 20 A, 125 VAC.
e. UL listed.
f. Type: As indicated on Drawings.
g. Color. Yellow.

2. Optional: Corrosion-resistant enclosure and switch consisting of:
a. Cast copper-free aluminum "FS" or "FD" ridge type hub box. b. Toggle type, quiet action, specification grade with grounding terminal. c. Rated 20 A, 125 VAC with solid silver cadmium oxide contacts. d. UL listed.
e. Neoprene gasket.
f. Cast aluminum cover with stainless steel screws and lever to activate switch.

Wiring Devices
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16141-4 g. Type: As indicated on Drawings.
h. Color: Yellow.

G. Receptacles for Corrosive Areas:

1. Corrosion-resistant straight blade, grounding type, specification grade.

2. Back and side wired with wrap-around bridge.

3. Rated 20 A, 125 VAC.

4. UL listed.

5. Color: Yellow.

6. Box: "FS" or "FD" ridge type cast hub box of copper-free aluminum.

7. Gasket: Neoprene.

8. Wall plate: Weatherproof, cast aluminum, UL listed, WDL open or closed.

9. Type: As indicated on Drawings.

H. Explosion proof Light Switches for Use in Hazardous Areas:

1. Explosion proof, UL listed for Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, and D; and Class II, Division 1 and 2 areas, Groups E, F, and G.

2. EDS factory sealed.

3. Malleable iron body and cover.

4. Aluminum sealing chamber.

5. Front operated handle with stainless steel shaft.

6. Rated 20 A, 125 VAC.

7. With grounding screw.

8. Type: As indicated on Drawings.

I. Explosion proof Receptacles for Use in Hazardous Areas:

1. Explosion-proof, UL listed for Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, and D; and Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F and G.

2. Factory-sealed malleable iron receptacle with spring-loaded cover.

3. Malleable iron mounting box.

4. Rated 20 A, 125 VAC.

5. "Dead-front" construction requiring plug to be inserted and rotated to activate receptacle.

6. Type: As indicated on Drawings.

J. Welding Receptacles: 1. 60 A, 480 V, 3 pole, 4 wire, grounding type.

K. Plug-In Strip: Surface steel raceway plug-in strip with single 15 A, 125 V, 3 wire grounding-type receptacles spaced 18 IN on center.

1. Prewired with two #12 TW and one #12 TW green insulated ground.

2. Minimum 1-1/4 IN wide x 3/4 IN deep.

3. Suitable fittings and snap-in cover.

Wiring Devices
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16141-5

4. Finish:
a. Stainless steel.

5. Receptacle color:
a. For use on normal power: Ivory.
b. For use on UPS systems: Red.
c. For use on isolated ground systems: Orange.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Surface mount receptacles and light switches in concrete construction.

B. In masonry and metal stud construction, recess mount receptacles and light switches unless device precludes recessed mounting or unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.

C. Where more than one receptacle is installed in a room, they shall be symmetrically arranged.

D. Set switches and receptacles plumb and vertical to the floor.

E. Set recess-mounted switches and receptacles flush with face of walls.

F. Do not connect dimmers to loads in excess of 80 percent of the rating of the dimmer.

G. Provide blank plates for empty outlets.
- END OF SECTION -
Terminal Blocks
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16143-1 SECTION 16143

TERMINAL BLOCKS
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers terminal blocks for control and other wiring.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300, Section 16000, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents prior to installation.

1.3 MANUFACTURERS
A. Terminal blocks shall be Entrelec, Phoenix Contact, Weidmuller, or equal.

B. Surge protection blocks shall be Eaton, series SD, or equal.

C. Power distribution blocks shall be Ilsco Corporation, or equal.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. Terminal blocks shall mount on standard DIN rail, and be of the size required for conductors therein. A minimum of 25 percent spares shall be provided in each terminal box. No more than 2 conductors shall be allowed per termination. Jumper bar assemblies shall be installed for interconnecting terminal blocks, distributing power and signal commons. Terminal blocks shall be U.L. rated for 600 Volts, and 30 Amps, minimum.

B. Grounding terminal blocks shall be provided for instrumentation cable shields. The terminal blocks shall have distinctive 2-color bodies, and shall be mounted to the DIN rail with metal screw down type clamps, providing a positive ground connection. One grounding terminal block shall be installed for every 2 instrument cables terminated. Grounding terminal blocks shall be U.L. rated for 600 Volts, and 20 Amps, minimum.

C. Terminal blocks shall be available in a variety of colors, including red, green, blue, gray, black, yellow, and orange.

D. DIN mount fuse holders shall have blown fuse indicators for DC and AC circuits. Fuse holders shall be of the compression clamp type. Fuse holders shall be U.L. listed, and rated for 600 Volts. Fuse sizes shall not exceed the U.L. current rating for the fuse holders.

E. DIN rail shall be prepunched, zinc bichromate plated steel. Symmetrical DIN rail shall be 35mmX7.5mm, minimum.

F. Terminal blocks for 4 to 20 milliamp signals shall have knife disconnect switches, and accessible test points for testing and measurement of current loop signals, without the need for removing wire terminations.

2.2 SURGE PROTECTION BLOCKS (SPB)
A. Analog inputs and outputs shall be terminated at surge protection blocks (SPB). The SPBs shall be designed for a working voltage of 32 volts, and shall be fused.

Terminal Blocks
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16143-2 B. SPBs shall provide full hybrid line to line protection, and shall have a GDT rating of 10,000 A (8/20µs pulse waveform).

C. SPBs shall be UL94 listed.

2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS (PDB)
A. PDBs shall be Electro tin plated and manufactured from high strength 6061-T6 aluminum alloy.

B. PDBs shall be UL Recognized, rated 90 degrees C, and CSA Certified.

C. PDBs shall provide flexibility in using the connector as an in line splice or to reduce conductor size for taps.

D. PDBs shall be rated for 600 Volts and dual rated for Copper and Aluminum Conductors.

E. PDBs shall have the sizes and ratings as shown on the Plans.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Each terminal block and fuse holder shall be identified with the circuit number, or conductor number, corresponding to the identification appearing on the shop Drawings for the equipment, or system.

B. Terminal block and fuse holder markers shall be computer printed plastic-type, with permanent markings.

C. End clamps and end sections shall be installed on each terminal block and fuse holder assembly.

D. Terminal blocks for DC voltages shall be blue, and AC voltages shall be gray. - END OF SECTION -
Induction Motors
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16150-1 SECTION 16150

INDUCTION MOTORS
PART 1 -- GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
This Section outlines the electrical requirements for squirrel-cage induction motors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit for the Engineer's approval shop drawings, factory test reports, manufacturers' certified reports and technical data for motors supplied with driven equipment to the extent required in this Section, and the Specification Sections for mechanical equipment.

A. Shop Drawings: In addition to information to be included in the shop drawing and, shop drawings shall include the following:

1. Motor locked rotor and full load currents.

2. Power factors and efficiencies at full load, three quarters load and half load.

3. Motor housing material, winding material NEMA Design letter, NEMA Code Letter, ambient temperatures and maximum elevations in which motor is designed to operate continuously, service factor, NEMA insulation Class, temperature rise, type of enclosure, voltage, bearing life and dynamic balance; all of which shall comply to the requirements of the specifications.

4. Nameplate data.

5. Dimensions and weights of motors.

6. Motor construction details.

7. Speed torque/current at 100 percent volts.

8. Wiring diagrams, internal and typical external connections.

B. Current Data: Submit to the ENGINEER all field recorded current data. The data shall indicate the full load current for each motor and current rating for the overload relay in each motor starter and controller.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
Motors shall be supplied by the manufacturer of the driven equipment as specified in this section, and specifically outlined in the driven equipment specifications. The Motors shall be completely fabricated, assembled, checked and tested at the factory in accordance with NEMA MG-1. The induction motors shall be Siemens, Louis Allis, Baldor-Reliance, U.S. Motors, or approved equal.

A. Motor Ratings (non-submersible type):

1. Torque and slip characteristics shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the driven equipment and as specified. Motor manufacturer shall confirm motor capability to the specifications.

2. Motors shall operate continuously and satisfactorily in ambient temperatures from minus 10 degrees C to plus 50 degrees C at a maximum elevation of 1,200 feet without exceeding nameplate horsepower rating.

3. The motors shall have high power factor and the minimum power factor shall be 80 percent at full load.

Induction Motors
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16150-2

4. Motors shall be designed for high efficiency. Motors with the following minimum efficiencies, at full load, shall be provided:
a. 80 percent minimum efficiency shall be provided for motors through 5 horsepower. b. 85 percent minimum efficiency shall be provided for motors 7-1/2 through 15 horsepower. c. 90 percent minimum efficiency shall be provided for motors 20 through 40 horsepower. d. 92 percent minimum efficiency shall be provided for motors 50 through 125 horsepower. e. 94 percent minimum efficiency shall be provided for motors 150 horsepower and larger.

5. The motors shall be sized so that the BHP does not exceed 95 percent of the full load nameplate horsepower.

6. The motor must be able to accelerate the driven machine from zero to top speed at 90 percent of rated voltage without overheating.

7. The maximum locked rotor KVA/HP code letter for motors smaller than 15 HP shall not exceed the requirements for NEMA Design B motors. The maximum locked rotor KVA/HP code letter shall be Code G for motors 15 HP through 250 HP unless otherwise indicated. The maximum locked rotor KVA/HP code letter shall be Code F for motors 300 horsepower and larger unless otherwise indicated.

8. All motors shall be insulated and braced for full voltage across the line starting regardless of the starting method used.

9. Motors 1/2 HP and larger shall be NEMA MG1-1.16 Design B and shall have NEMA MG1-1.65 Class F insulation.

10. The temperature rise by resistance above the temperature of the cooling medium, for each of the various parts of the motor shall not exceed the values of the NEMA MG1-1.65 Class B insulation system as indicated in NEMA MG 1-12.42. These are total temperatures, based on maximum ambient of 40° C (104° F), plus additional heat (temperature rise) generated by motor operation. Greater than 40° C ambient shall require at a minimum, Class H insulation special application considerations or special motor designs.

11. All open and TEFC motors 250 HP and less and all vertical motors shall have a 1.15 service factor. All horizontal motors larger than 250 HP shall have a 1.0 service factor.

12. Motors 1/2 HP through 250 HP shall be 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hertz unless otherwise indicated.

13. Motors smaller than 1/2 HP shall be 120/240 volts, 1 phase, 60 Hertz unless otherwise indicated.

B. Motor Construction:

1. Enclosures for induction motors shall be approved for the installations and as indicated. The enclosure types shall be one of the following as outlined in the driven equipment specifications unless otherwise indicated.
a. Totally-enclosed fan cooled
b. Totally-enclosed non-ventilated
c. Weather-protected, Type I
d. Weather-protected, Type II
e. Drip-proof fully guarded
f. Drip-proof
g. Splash-proof
h. Open

2. Provide epoxy vacuum pressure impregnated (VPI) motors when indicated in the driven equipment specifications. The windings in squirrel cage induction motors shall be completely filled with an insulating resin epoxy which also forms a protective coating. a. The stator windings on all motors, except 56 and 140 frame sizes, shall be vacuum pressure impregnated with an epoxy or shall be epoxy encapsulated 56 and 140 frame size motors shall have extra dips and bakes of Class F varnish.

Induction Motors
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16150-3

3. Housing, end brackets and all outside components shall be cast iron or aluminum except WP II or open drip-proof enclosures which may be fabricated steel or aluminum.

4. A condensate drain hole shall be provided on all enclosed motors. The drain hole shall be provided in each end bracket on horizontal motors. A single drain hole shall be provided in the lower bracket of vertical motors. Open motors shall be self draining. A U.L. approved breather/drain shall be provided on all explosion-proof motors.

5. The motors shall be equipped with terminal boxes for all conduit and wire connections as required. a. The terminal boxes shall be properly sized, diagonally split, cast iron, and rotatable in 90 degree steps. Provide a gasket between the box and motor frame and between the box and the cover.

Terminal boxes shall be attached to the motor frame with grade 5 zinc plated and chromated steel bolts or cap screws. All terminal boxes shall have threaded holes for conduit entrance.

6. The castings shall be coated with a red-oxide zinc-chromate primer, and finished with a corrosion resistant epoxy coating. All fabricated steel enclosures shall be coated on all inside and outside surfaces except shafts and register fits.

7. Provide stainless steel fasteners and nameplates of ample size with clear numerals and letters. a. Nameplates shall indicate the manufacturer, serial number, model number, type, horsepower, phase, hertz, volts, design, full load amperes, locked rotor code letter, service factor, speed, insulation class, temperature rating, information required by NEMA MG 1-10.38 and other essential data.
b. Nameplate data shall be in the English language and units. c. Nameplates shall be secured to the motor frame with corrosion resisting pins in accessible locations.

8. Ground lugs shall be provided in all main motor terminal boxes for grounding.

9. All motors shall have copper windings.

10. Antifriction bearings shall be grease lubricated except for vertical, high thrust motors, which may require oil lubrication.
a. Grease lubricated bearings shall include accessible fittings for in-service, periodic relubrication. b. Oil lubricated bearings shall be a reservoir type with a sump for settling foreign matter, accessible and exterior fill and drain plugs and a visual oil level indicator with maximum and minimum indicator levels.
c. Horizontal, direct connected motor bearings shall be designed for 1 year minimum B-10 bearing life at NEMA minimum V-belt criteria for the rating.
d. Horizontal, V-belt connected motor bearings shall be designed for 3 year minimum B-10 bearing life for the application V-belt drive or 1 year minimum B-10 bearing lift at NEMA minimum V-belt criteria whichever is more restrictive.
e. Vertical motor bearings shall be designed for 2 year minimum B-10 bearing life at design operating thrust. At maximum operating thrust, B-10 life shall not be less than one year.

Transient (shut-off) thrust shall not exceed 30% of the static deformation limit. Motor shall be designed for 30% momentary upthrust capacity except 3600 RPM units which must have 30% continuous upthrust capacity. Any system which exceeds 30% upthrust must be designed for continuous upthrust at one year B-10 bearing lift.
f. Pre-lubricated, double shield bearings are acceptable only on single phase and 56 frame motors.

11. The dynamic balance of motors built in frame size 143 and larger shall be 0.001 inches total amplitude or peak to peak displacement.

12. Accessories for motors 125 HP and larger shall include the following:
a. A set of non-linear, resistance temperature detectors, "PTC thermistors" or equal, shall be embedded in the winding. The detector relays shall have one normally open and one normally closed (spare) contacts, and shall be mounted in the motor control center. One relay shall have the normally open contact to actuate an alarm and shut down motor when the temperature rise reaches 15 degrees centigrade below the motor insulation temperature rating when operating in an ambient temperature of 400C. The detector shall protect the motor against overheating caused Induction Motors
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16150-4 by overloads, loss of cooling medium and single phasing. b. A set of non-linear, resistance temperature detectors, "PTC thermistors" or equal, shall be required for bearing temperature. The detector relay shall have one normally open and one normally closed (spare) contacts, and shall be mounted in a box with cover on the motor frame.

One relay shall have the normally open contact to actuate an alarm and shut down motor when the temperature rise reaches 15 degrees centigrade below the motor insulation temperature rating when operating in an ambient temperature of 400C. The detector shall protect the motor against overheating caused by loss of cooling medium and bearing failure. c. All of the above accessories shall have wires brought out in a terminal box or boxes.

13. Motors shall have a guaranteed maximum noise level that shall be in accordance with NEMA MG3 Standards Publication for Sound Level Prediction for Installed Rotating Electrical Machines, except where more restrictive requirements are outlined in other Sections of the Specifications.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Provide all the equipment installations and wiring installations, including connections as indicated, specified and required. Assure proper fits for all equipment and materials in the spaces as shown on the Drawings.

B. Motors:

1. Provide power, control, alarm, and grounding installations for all motors as indicated and required.

2. Check the connections and provide correct rotation for all motors.

3. Record the full load current to each motor, and the overload relay rating in each motor starter for the certified data submittal.

4. Provide the required wiring for all control equipment that shall be furnished and installed by other Sections of the Specifications.

5. Field damaged factory finish on equipment shall be touched-up with paint that is equal in quality and color to the original factory finish.

3.2 FACTORY TESTS
A. All Motors shall be given a standard commercial test as defined by NEMA MG 1-12.51 and IEEE 112a and b.

B. All Motors 125 horsepower and Larger shall be given complete tests as defined by IEEE 112 Method A and B. Report of test shall include data on IEEE 112 Form A2, as applicable to the motor tested. Test shall confirm the following:

1. Service factor temperature.

2. Efficiency

3. Torque

4. No load, full voltage vibration level.

C. Vibration Tests shall be per NEMA MG 1-12.06 and MG 1-2053.

D. All Testing, other than lock conditions shall be at full voltage +5 percent.

Induction Motors
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16150-5

3.3 FIELD CHECKS
A. Motor Installations shall be complete and correct.

B. Operation Tests shall be performed to observe that motors start, run and stop satisfactorily under design load. - END OF SECTION -
Enclosures
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16160-1 SECTION 16160

ENCLOSURES
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This specification includes enclosures to house electrical controls, instruments, terminal blocks, and serve as junction boxes where shown on the Plans.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300, Section 16000, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents prior to installation.

1.3 MANUFACTURERS
A. Enclosures shall be manufactured by Hammond, Hoffman, Rittal, or equal.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL
A. Enclosures shall be fabricated from 14 gauge steel with seams that are continuously welded. Doors shall have full length piano hinges with the door removable by pulling the hinge pin.

B. A rolled lip shall be provided around three sides of the door and around all sides of the enclosure opening. The gasket shall be attached with oil-resistant adhesive and held in place with steel retaining strips. Exterior hardware, such as clamps, screws, and hinge pins, shall be of stainless steel for outdoor installations. A hasp and staple shall be provided for padlocking. Each enclosure shall have a print pocket. All wires entering or leaving the enclosure shall terminate on terminal strips. All wires and terminals shall be clearly identified as specified elsewhere in these specifications.

C. Finish shall be white enamel interior, light gray enamel, ANSI 61 exterior, over phosphatized surfaces. Special finishes and colors shall be furnished for wet locations. Plans should be checked for special conditions.

2.2 NEMA RATING
A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, enclosures shall be NEMA 12 for indoors, NEMA 4X for corrosive areas, and NEMA 3R for outdoor installations. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be 316 stainless steel, unless noted otherwise. NEMA 4X enclosures shall also be used in wet or wash down areas.

2.3 FIBERGLASS ENCLOSURES (where indicated in plans)
A. Where called out in the Plans, fiberglass NEMA 4X enclosures shall be compression molded, fiberglass reinforced polyester, high impact, and heat resistant.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Enclosures shall be installed as indicated on the Plans, and according to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Enclosures shall be properly grounded, and shall include ground straps connected to hinged doors and accessories. - END OF SECTION -
Grounding
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16170-1 SECTION 16170

GROUNDING
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. A ground grid system consisting of the indicated configuration of copper wires, and ground rods, or concrete encased grounding electrodes ("UFERs") shall be provided to minimize station potential gradient irregularities and drain leakage and fault currents to earth.

B. Whether indicated on the Plans or not, neutral conductors, cable shields, metallic conduits, cable terminations, junction boxes, poles, surge arresters, and other non-current-carrying metallic parts of equipment shall be grounded.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300, Section 16000, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents prior to installation.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 250
PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. A resistance of not greater than 25 ohms shall be provided, unless otherwise specified. Ground resistances shall be measured as herein described. Resistances of systems requiring separate ground rods, rather than a counterpoise, shall be measured separately before bonding below grade. The combined ground resistance of separate systems bonded together below grade may be used to meet the specified ground resistance, but the minimum number of rods indicated must still be provided.

2.2 GROUND RODS
A. Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel conforming to UL 467, 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length.

Unless otherwise indicated, ground rods shall be driven into the ground until tops of rods are approximately 6 inches below finished grade. In counterpoise systems, tops of ground rods shall be approximately at elevations of counterpoises. Where the specified ground resistance cannot be met with the indicated number of ground rods, additional ground rods, longer ground rods, or deep-driven sectional rods shall be installed and connected until the specified resistance is obtained, except that not more than three additional ground rods shall be required at any one installation. Ground rods shall be spaced as evenly as possible at least 6 feet apart and connected below grade.

2.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connections above grade shall be made with bolted solderless connectors, and those below grade shall be made by a fusion-welding process. An embossing die code or other standard method shall provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire.

2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR
A. Service entrance ground wires shall be sized in accordance with 2020 NEC Table 250.66, unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. After being located to provide maximum physical protection, exposed ground wires shall be securely attached to structural supports at not more than 2-foot intervals with suitable fasteners. Bends Grounding
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16170-2 greater than 45 degrees in ground wires are not permitted. Routing of ground conductors through concrete should be avoided, except where specifically called for in these Documents. When concrete penetration is necessary, nonmetallic conduit shall be cast flush with the points of concrete entrance and exit, so as to provide an opening for the ground wire. The opening shall be sealed with a suitable compound after installation of the ground wire.

2.5 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR
A. Neutral conductors shall be grounded where indicated. Equipment grounding conductors shall be sized in accordance with 2020 NEC Table 250.122, unless otherwise indicated. Ground wires shall be protected by conduit, where such wires run exposed above grade in non-fence-enclosed areas, or are run through concrete construction. Where concrete penetration is necessary, nonmetallic conduit shall be cast flush with the points of concrete entrance and exit, so as to provide an opening for the ground wire. The opening shall be sealed with a suitable compound after installation of the ground wire. Bends greater than 45 degrees in ground wire connections to the ground rods, or counterpoises are not permitted.

2.6 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Equipment frames of motor housings, metallic tanks, metallic equipment enclosures, metal splicing boxes, chain-link fencing, and other metallic noncurrent-carrying metal items, shall be grounded. Connections to earth shall be made in the same manner as required for system grounding. Equipment or devices operating at less than 750 volts may be connected to secondary neutral grounding electrodes.

2.7 SURGE ARRESTER GROUNDING
A. Surge arresters shall be grounded. Resistance to ground for intermediate-class arresters shall be not more than 10 ohms and for distribution-class arresters shall be not more than 25 ohms. Ground wire connections shall be not less than No. 4 AWG for distribution arresters and No. 1/0 AWG for intermediate arresters. Connections to earth shall be made in the same manner as required for neutral conductors. Surge arrester grounds may use the same ground wires provided for equipment operating at more than 750 volts. Surge arrester and secondary neutral grounds shall be separate from and independent of each other but both grounds shall be bonded together below grade at the ground rods or may utilize a common counterpoise.

2.8 LIGHTING POLE GROUNDING
A. Base of fighting poles shall be connected to an adjacent ground rod as indicated on Plans. A ground connection from poles back to neutral ground points shall also be provided utilizing equipment grounding conductor.

2.9 METALLIC STRUCTURES
A. Metallic structures and buildings shall be grounded per NEC.

2.10 GROUNDING RINGS
A. When required, grounding rings shall be installed using bare copper cable with ground rods at least 25 feet intervals using thermoweld connecting means as indicated on Plans in accordance with NEC requirements.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. It is the intent of these Contract Documents that all device and equipment grounds shall be run as a separate conductor in the conduit from the equipment to the distribution panels or system ground. Wireways and enclosures shall be properly bonded and grounded, and ground conductors shall be run for all circuits.

Grounding
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16170-3 B. Equipment cases and devices shall be grounded. Ground rods shall be driven, and concrete encased conduits installed, before a building, or structure is built, and ground conductors brought through the concrete to accessible points for grounding equipment. These systems shall be installed at each structure, where transformers, switchboards, panelboards, and MCCs are installed.

C. Duct banks shall contain a concrete encased system bare copper ground conductor. The system ground conductors shall run continuously in duct banks, through handholes and other raceway boxes. The system ground shall be connected to the structure grounding systems to provide a continuous grounding system. Each metallic raceway, panel, switchboard, and other metallic devices associated with the electrical and control systems shall be bonded to this grounding system.

D. Ground rod shall be installed not less than 6 inches below grade. Equipment, neutral, and surge arrester ground wires shall be connected to the ground grid as indicated.

3.2 TESTS
A. Pre-Energization Tests --- Pre-energization tests shall include, but shall not be limited to tests that the equipment engineer is required to perform under paragraph "GENERAL REQUIREMENTS." No part of the electrical system shall be energized until all station grounding system components have been tested and demonstrated to comply with the requirements specified, and until associated test reports have been submitted and approved.

B. Operating Test - After the installation is completed, the CONTRACTOR shall conduct an operating test for approval. Equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements herein. Tests shall be performed in the presence of the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish instruments and personnel required for the test.

C. Ground-Resistance Measurements - Ground-resistance measurements of each ground rod shall be taken and certified by the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER. No part of the electrical distribution system shall be energized prior to the resistance testing of that system's ground rods and grounding system and submission of test results to the ENGINEER. Test reports shall indicate the location of the ground rod and grounding system and the resistance and the soil conditions at the time the test was performed. When the building water service is used as a ground or part of the grounding system, ground-resistance measurements shall also be made of this connection. Ground-resistance measurements shall be made in normally dry weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall, and with the ground under test isolated from other grounds. The resistance to ground shall be measured using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE Std 142 and Std 81.

3.3 TEST RESULTS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform the above tests and submit a certified test report prior to energizing the equipment.
-END OF SECTION -
Supporting Devices
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16190-1 SECTION 16190

SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals, are indicated on the Plans, schedules, and specified in other sections of these Specifications.

B. Types of supports, anchors, sleeves and seals specified in this section include the following:

1. One-hole Conduit Straps

2. One-Hole Conduit Straps with Clamp Backs

3. Two-Hole Conduit Straps

4. Conduit Hangers

5. I-beam Clamps

6. Channel Clamps

7. Round Steel Rods

8. Drop-in Anchors

9. Wedge Type Anchor Bolts

10. Lead Expansion Anchors

11. Toggle Bolts

12. Wall and Floor Seals

13. Cable Supports

14. U-Channel Strut System

15. Sleeves

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300, Section 16000, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents prior to installation.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Abbeon Cal Inc., Elcen Metal Products Co., Ideal Industries, Inc., Joslyn Mfg and Supply Co., McGraw Edison Co., Rawlplug Co.

Inc., Allied Tube and Conduit Corp., Cooper B-Line Inc., Greenfield Mfg Co., Inc., OZ Gedney, Power-Strut, and Unistrut, and Robroy Industries.

2.2 GENERAL
A. Provide supporting devices that comply with manufacturers standard materials, design, and construction, in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installations, and as specified herein.

Supporting Devices
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16190-2

2.3 SUPPORTS
A. Provide supporting devices of types, sizes, and materials indicated, and having the following construction features:

1. One-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting electrical metallic tubing, and liquidtight flexible conduit; zinc plated steel, stainless steel or galvanized steel; snap-on, heavy duty.

2. One-Hole Conduit Straps with Clamp Backs: For supporting rigid metal conduit, and intermediate metal conduit; cast galvanized steel.

3. Two-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting electrical metallic tubing, rigid metal conduit, and intermediate metal conduit; zinc plated steel, stainless steel or galvanized steel.

4. Conduit Hangers: For supporting electrical metallic tubing, rigid metal conduit, and intermediate metal conduit; zinc plated steel, stainless steel or galvanized steel.

5. I-Beam Clamps: Electroplated zinc or hot dipped galvanized malleable iron.

6. Channel Clamps: Electroplated zinc or hot dipped galvanized steel.

7. Round Steel Rod: National coarse thread, electroplated.

2.4 ANCHORS
A. Provide anchors of types, sizes, and materials indicated, with the following construction features:

1. Lead Expansion Anchors: For CMU walls, 114"-20 threads, set tool required.

2. Toggle Bolts: Electroplated steel, size as required.

3. Drop-in Anchors: Stainless steel, size as required.

4. Anchor Bolts: Stainless steel, size as required.

5. Half-round head, non-removable anchor bolts shall not be used.

2.5 SEALS
A. Provide seals of types, sizes and materials indicated; with the following construction features:

1. Wall and Floor Seals: Provide factory-assembled watertight wall and floor seals, of types and sized indicated; suitable for sealing around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls.

Construct seals with steel sleeves, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws.

2. Conduit sealing bushings shall be manufactured by OZ Gedney, Model CSMI, or equal.

3. The conductor sealing bushings shall be manufactured by OZ Gedney, Model CSBG, or equal.

2.6 CONDUIT CABLE SUPPORTS
A. Provide cable supports with insulating wedging plug for non-armored type electrical cables in risers; construct 2" rigid metal conduit; 3-wires, type wire as indicated; construct body of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.

Supporting Devices
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16190-3

2.7 U-CHANNEL STRUT SYSTEM
A. Provide U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment, 12-gage hot-dip galvanized steel, of types and sizes indicated; construct with 9/16" diameter holes, 8" O.C. on top surface, with the following fittings that mate and match with U-Channel:

1. Fixture hangers

2. Channel hangers

3. End caps

4. Beam clamps

5. Wiring stud

6. Thinwall conduit clamps

7. Rigid conduit clamps

8. Post Bases

9. U-bolts

2.8 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Provide pipe sleeves from the following:

1. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs.

2.9 PVC COATED U-CHANNEL STRUT SYSTEM
A. Provide PVC Coated U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment, 20 mil PVC coated steel, of types and sizes indicated; construct with 9/16" diameter holes, 8" O.C. on top surface, with all Stainless Steel hardware, and the following fittings that mate and match with PVC Coated U-Channel:

1. PVC Coated Strut nut

2. PVC Coated Pipe straps

3. Touch up compound (Gray)

2.10 STAINLESS STEEL U-CHANNEL STRUT SYSTEM
A. Provide Stainless Steel U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment, of types and sizes indicated; construct with 9/16" diameter holes, 8" O.C. on top surface, with all stainless steel hardware, and the following stainless steel fittings that mate and match with Stainless Steel U-Channel:

1. Fixture hangers

2. Channel hangers

3. End caps

4. Beam clamps

5. Wiring stud

6. Post bases

7. Rigid conduit clamps

8. U-bolts
Supporting Devices
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16190-4 PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves and seals as indicated, in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and with recognized industry practices to insure supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply with requirements of NECA and NEC for installation of supporting devices.

B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work.

C. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure. Arrange for grouping of 2 or more parallel runs of conduits to be supported together on channel type hangers where possible. Install supports with spacing indicated and in compliance with NEC requirements.

D. Torque sleeve seal nuts, complying with manufacturer's recommended values. Ensure that sealing grommets expand to form watertight seal.

E. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for touch up of field cut ends or damaged PVC coated U-channel and fittings.

F. Remove burrs and apply a cold zinc galvanizing paint to field cut galvanized U-channel strut. - END OF SECTION -
Electrical Identification
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16195-1 SECTION 16195

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Electrical identification work specified in this section covers the following:

1. Buried cable warnings

2. Electrical power, control and communication conductors

3. Operational instructions and warnings

4. Danger signs

5. Equipment/system identification signs

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals to the ENGINEER shall include the following:

1. Manufacturer’s data on electrical identification materials and products

2. Samples of each color, lettering style and other graphic representation required for each identification material or system

1.3 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering electrical identification products maybe incorporated in the work include, but not limited to, the following:

1. W.H. Brady Co.

2. Ideal Industries, Inc.

3. Panduit Corp.

4. or, equal

1.4 QUALITY COMPLIANCE
A. Comply with applicable requirements of UL Std. 969, "Marking and Labeling Systems", pertaining to electrical identification systems.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. Where more than single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each application.

2.2 COLOR CODED CONDUIT MARKERS
A. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, flexible or semi-rigid, permanent, plastic-sheet conduit markers, extending 360 degrees around conduits; designed for attachment to conduit by adhesive, adhesive lap joint of marker, matching adhesive plastic tape at each end of marker, or pretensioned snap-on. Except as otherwise indicated, provide lettering that indicates voltage of conductor{s} in conduit. Provide 8" minimum length for 2" and smaller conduit, 12" length for larger conduit.

Electrical Identification
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16195-2 B. Unless otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, provide white markers with black letters.

C. Conduit identification shall be via stainless-steel tags. See comments for Section 16111.

2.3 CABLE AND CONDUCTOR WIRE MARKERS
A. Cable and conductor wire markers shall be self-laminating vinyl on white background, printed using a Brady TLS2200 printer, Seton printer, or equal. Handwritten wire markers are not acceptable.

2.4 SELF-ADHESIVE PLASTIC SIGNS
A. Provide manufacturer's standard, self-adhesive or pressure-sensitive, pre-printed, flexible vinyl signs for operational instructions or warnings; of sizes suitable for application areas and adequate for visibility, with proper wording for each application, e.g., 208V, EXHAUST FAN, RECTIFIER.

B. Unless otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, provide white signs with black lettering.

C. Signs shall be attached with stainless-steel screws

2.6 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS
A. Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in electrical identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of electrical systems and equipment. Comply with ANSI A13.1 pertaining to minimum sizes for letters and numbers.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements of NEC.

B. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of painting.

C. Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing authorities for identification of electrical work.

3.2 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Where electrical conduit is exposed in spaces with exposed mechanical piping that is identified by a colorcoded method, apply color-coded identification on electrical conduit in manner similar to piping identification.

Except as otherwise indicated, use white as coded color for conduit.

3.3 CABLE/CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION
A. Apply cable conductor identification, including voltage, phase and feeder number, on each cable conductor in each box enclosure/cabinet where wires of more than one circuit or communication/signal system are present, except where another form of identification (such as color-coded conductors) is provided. Match identification with marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents, and similar previously established identification for project's electrical work.

Electrical Identification
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16195-3

3.4 EQUIPMENT/SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A. Install engraved plastic-laminate sign on each major unit of electrical equipment in building; including central or master unit of each electrical system including communication-control-signal systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification or signal system. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, 1/2" high lettering on 1-1/2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are required), white lettering in black field. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings.

Provide signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical work:

1. Panelboards, electrical cabinets and enclosures

2. Access panel/doors to electrical facilities

3. Major electrical switchgear.

B. Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to substrate with brass or stainless steel screws, except use adhesive where screws should not or cannot penetrate the substrate.

C. Identification signs shall be black lettering on a white field to match the Districts’ standard.

3.5 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. The neutral shall be white to match the requirements of Part 2.5 (B) in Section 16123. The 3-phase wires shall be identified at the switchgear, panelboards and motor control centers as Phases A, B, and C. At 277/480V, Phase A shall be brown, Phase B shall be orange, and Phase C shall be yellow. The neutral shall be gray.

B. In addition to color coding all conductors, each conductor shall be identified in each pull box, manhole, panelboard, cable tray, or termination with circuit identification markers. This identification is applicable to all power, control, alarm, and instrumentation conductors and these markings shall be recorded on the Record Documents. Markers shall be slip-on PVC sleeve type as manufactured by Brady, Seton, or equal.

C. Markers for other cabling shall be B-292 vinyl as manufactured by Brady, Seton, or equal.

D. Exposed medium voltage conduits shall be labeled at 50-foot intervals with f-inch letters stating the voltage - example - "12,470 volts". Labels shall be vinyl plastic as manufactured by Brady, Seton, or equal.

3.6 AUTOMATIC EQUIPMENT WARNING SIGNS
A. Permanent warning signs shall be mounted at all mechanical equipment that may be started automatically or from remote locations. Signs shall be in accordance with OSHA regulations and shall be suitable for exterior use. The warning signs shall be fastened with round head brass screws or bolts, located and mounted in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER.

B. Warning signs shall be 7 inches high by 10 inches wide, colored yellow and black, on not less than 18 gauge vitreous enameling stock. Sign shall read:

CAUTION

THIS EQUIPMENT STARTS

AUTOMATICALLY

BY REMOTE CONTROL

3.7 HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING SIGNS
A. Permanent and conspicuous warning signs shall be mounted on all equipment, doorways to equipment rooms, pull boxes, manholes, where the voltage exceeds 600 volts.

Electrical Identification
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16195-4 B. Signs shall be in accordance with OSHA regulation, and shall be suitable for exterior use. The warning signs shall be fastened with round head brass screws or bolts, located and mounted in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER.

C. Signs shall be 7 inches high by 10 inches wide, colored red and white, on not less than 18 gauge vitreous enameling stock. Sign shall read:

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

KEEP OUT

3.8 CONDUCTOR FASTENERS
A. Glue-on type conductor fasteners shall not be used in any panels, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, motor control centers, or other enclosures containing electrical devices and/or conductors.
- END OF SECTION -
Cathodic Protection
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16200-1 SECTION 16200

CATHODIC PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This project involves the cathodic protection of the Well No. 22 steel casing and a polyethylene encased 12- inch ductile iron pipe related to the Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Project.

B. This specification section outlines the materials, installation and testing requirements of the cathodic protection systems such as, but not limited to, the cathodic protection rectifier, deep anode groundbed, junction box, standard-potential magnesium anodes, structure connections, insulating flange kits and wiring for the corrosion protection of underground pipeline.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All cathodic protection installation work shall comply with NACE publication: SP0169 (2013 revision) “Control of External Corrosion on Underground and Submerged Metallic Piping Systems” and with RP0286 (latest revision) “Electrical Isolation of Cathodically Protected Pipelines”.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 – Submittals and Section 15000 – Piping, General.

B. As-built drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the General Provisions.

C. Submit manufacturer’s catalog cuts for the following items for review by the ENGINEER:

1. Cathodic Protection Rectifier

2. Mixed Metal Oxide Anodes

3. Deep Anode Hardware

4. Junction Box

5. Galvanic Anodes

6. Terminal Boards

7. Test Station Boxes

8. Shunts

9. Cable

10. Insulating Flange Kits

11. Thermoweld and/or Pin Brazing Equipment

1.4 GUARANTEE
A. CONTRACTOR shall guarantee all materials and workmanship of items furnished under these specifications shall be free from defects for a period of one (1) year after final completion and acceptance of the entire contract work. The CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, repair or replace all defective materials or workmanship supplied by him that are found to be deficient with respect to any provisions of this specification.

Cathodic Protection
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16200-2 PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cathodic Protection Rectifier

1. Cathodic protection transformer-rectifier shall be air cooled, constant DC voltage output with a DC output of 24 Volts/24 Amperes, as manufactured by Corrpro or a CITY approved equal.

2. DC Output Ratings: Rectifiers shall be rated at 24 Volts/24 Amperes, or as close to this output as what can be reasonably manufactured. Rectifiers shall be capable of supplying continuous, full rated output at an ambient temperature of 45° C, in full sunlight with an expected life in excess of 30 years.

3. AC Input Ratings: Full rated DC output shall be obtainable with an AC input voltage at 5% below the nominal value. Continuous AC input voltage at 10% above the nominal value shall not damage the transformer, the diode bridge assembly, or exceed any component ratings.

4. Cooling: Cooling shall be by natural air convection. Rectifier enclosure shall be vented for natural air convection and shall be screened against insects, dust, and fitted with external louvers.

5. Transformer materials and construction shall be rated for Class "H" operation (180° C).

6. Other Options: Additional options that may be incorporated into the rectifier include: Communications filter, pre-wiring for a remote monitoring system, 115 Volt/15 Ampere GFCI convenience plug, and separate analog meters for DC Voltage and current output.

7. Electrical Panels: Electrical panels shall have a minimum thickness of 0.25" laminated phenolic, rated for Class "B" operation (105° C maximum).

8. Connection Hardware: All electrical hardware shall be copper or high conductivity brass, suitably sized, and finished with electrolysis nickel plating for superior corrosion resistance. All connections shall be tightly secured with lock washers and nuts torqued to manufacturer's recommended specifications. All electrical connections shall use the “double nut” method to ensure that any compression of the panel material will not affect the electrical conductivity of the connection.

9. Enclosure shall be stainless steel and sized to fit the rectifier needed.

10. Rating: The rectifier and enclosure must have a Lab Test certification, or a UL1012 listing.

11. Enclosures shall be equipped with a pad-lockable draw latch. Draw latch shall accommodate a 3/8- inch shackle padlock.

12. Meter shunts shall be panel-mounted Holloway type "SW" style, with an accuracy of 0.25%.